1. Health
Send to a Friend via Email
Paige Waehner

Does Winsor Pilates Work?

By July 2, 2003

Follow me on:

Years ago, I posted a question in the Exercise Forum about Winsor Pilates. This was at a time when Winsor Pilates was very popular and we've had hundreds of comments since this posting.

Below you'll find a variety of comments from people who've tried the workout series and their opinions of how it works for them. Mari Winsor is still around and has dozens of Pilates videos and products to choose from. You can compare prices on some of those at Pricegrabber.

For more, visit our fabulous Pilates Site here at About.com.

Comments
May 17, 2006 at 11:23 pm
(1) yuriy says:

winsor pilates really looks like a simple excercise , but it really does work.. for beginers and people that are in shape.. you can really notice the body parts needing a tone.

June 5, 2006 at 10:57 pm
(2) Zoe says:

I have been using Pilates for the past two years!! This is the same person who couldn’t stick to a work out plan if I tried.
In just 4 weeks I went from a size 12 to a size 7 and the best part..is I have kept it off.
The answer: YES it works!!

June 6, 2006 at 4:00 pm
(3) Julie says:

Winsor Pilates is great!! You become more flexible with every work out. You will see results fast. With the 20-minute workout, you won’t even work up a sweat, but you will feel completely invigorated and ready to take on the day!

June 7, 2006 at 7:58 am
(4) John T. says:

Wow !

I’ve only used Pilates for 2 days and all my muscles exploded !

June 9, 2006 at 11:03 am
(5) Lizzy D says:

YES IT DOES~

I have 3 kids and am now in the process of getting back to my pre pregnancy weight! This is the fastest so far! And with my belly being streched 3 times, i needed something that really works, and this DOES!

June 18, 2006 at 11:10 pm
(6) Geri Denney says:

I have used it for a year because I think it’s good for me, but I have not seen a difference in my size or weight.

June 20, 2006 at 11:33 am
(7) Jane says:

I have been thinking about buying it! And when i see this… I am sure that i’ll buy it! But how long time does it take before you see the resoults?

June 21, 2006 at 4:19 pm
(8) Tiffany Caldwell says:

I love winsor pilates. I lost 6 lbs in one week. I would highly recommend pilates instead of dieting.

June 22, 2006 at 5:35 pm
(9) jasmin says:

I`ve been doing pilates on and off because it was hard at first but ever since i started doing it regularly i feel stronger and my muscles are quite toned

June 24, 2006 at 1:30 am
(10) Jen says:

Winsor Pilates really does work! I know that your probaly one of those people like me who hate getting up and working out but trust me when you are finish with the 20 minute workout you wanna go and do another 20 minutes because you feel re-freshed! I lost 6 pounds a week with the 20 minute workout and avoiding junk food.

June 27, 2006 at 9:50 am
(11) Lisa says:

I love Winsor Pilates. I used to swim for 4-5 hours a day in high school so when I came to college I felt like a slob not doing anything. Then I started the winsor pilates workouts everyday. I have never been this flexible and my muscles are as toned as when I was swimming! I recommend this for everyone regardless of weight, experience, or age! It’s so easy!

July 10, 2006 at 8:02 pm
(12) Kimi says:

It does work!! I saw the video when I was 9 months pregnant, and got it, hoping it wasn’t a waste. 6 weeks after my baby I started, and within 2 months I lost most of the weight. After a few months, I was down to a 4 easily, and longer and leaner than I have ever been in my life. I love it. I have become a devoted user, touting how amazing it is. And it feels GREAT!!

July 15, 2006 at 3:27 am
(13) jenn says:

I would love to try this put i dont have a credit card are checkin account,,,Is there anyway to send the money via quick payment …like western union or something to get this…

July 17, 2006 at 10:24 am
(14) Lori says:

I actually bought the original set from Target. I absolutely love it! The commercial does not lie, people really do notice a difference in you when you stick with it for just a couple of weeks. I was getting compliments after only 2 weeks!

July 18, 2006 at 10:23 am
(15) Anita says:

It really works! My posture is better, my muscles are stronger, and you can see actual definition. I especially like the new pilates circle!

July 18, 2006 at 1:29 pm
(16) erika says:

I actually bought mine at Big Lots for $2.99 each! See if your big lots has any????

July 18, 2006 at 3:34 pm
(17) J. Oliver Stanton says:

I love them. It helps posture, endurance, strength and of course the weight issue. I do the 20 min. workout 3 times a week and I’ve lost 2in. in only a week and a half. They really do work

July 19, 2006 at 1:39 pm
(18) Danielle says:

I’ve worked out with Pilates and the 20 minutes goes by so quick. I’ve noticed my stomach muscles have tightened, and I feel great!

July 21, 2006 at 4:47 pm
(19) Theresa says:

This is the best work out I have found to help me get back into shape after having kids. I have had 4 kids and I have gotten my hips back down to 35 inches using Pliates. Also I feel so strong! If you use the 20min work-out 3 times a week, you will see a difference with in 2 weeks. Like every other work-out. The more you put into it, the more you get out of it. SO BREATHE AND STRETCH!

July 22, 2006 at 1:11 pm
(20) Ann says:

First i didn’t belive it!
I thought all what they said was crap! All of it was fake!And yes, they are all perfekt, and they say it’s the best! But i have learnd , not to belive all what people say! But then i found out something, i belived; Jennifer Aniston use it! GEAT! And soon, i’ll buy it! :)

July 28, 2006 at 2:56 pm
(21) lisa says:

i used to have a great figure,but after having a baby i have a disgusting flabby bell that will not shift and wider hips!is it likely that this could help me?many thanks!!

July 29, 2006 at 8:34 am
(22) joan says:

This is the ONLY workout program that I can stick to. It does work as described in the infomercials. I have wasted alot of money on other programs. Once you get them, you find out there’s alot more to it than what they described on TV. Winsor Pilates is just what they say on TV…nothing more. You do not HAVE to do the 60 minute workouts to get results…do them if you want to and for “more” strength and toning. I bought my first set about 4 years ago and got my sister and cousin hooked.

July 31, 2006 at 5:48 am
(23) Crystal says:

I just bought it, just I haven’t received it yet. I have tried other pilates videos, but I wanted to have the real deal. From what I have experienced so far is that it really does help with your posture, gives strength, and helps you feel refreshed after it is all done. I think Winsor Pilates is great for everyone, especially if you aren’t the type that likes to jump around or have the time to work-out 60 minutes a day.

July 31, 2006 at 5:30 pm
(24) Andrťa says:

I have been doing winsor pilates for two months now and have not lost any weight but I am a lot leaner and my muscles are very strong without the bulk. I love the way it has helped improve my posture so that I look and feel taller

July 31, 2006 at 9:33 pm
(25) Krystal says:

I weigh about 180 pounds and i’m only 14. So i was really depressed about me being fat and all. But then my mom bought winsor pilates and i have never seen any faster results. It easy and it’s fun.I used to be a size 14-16 but now i’m a size 2. I lost70 pounds in just 3 months doing winsor while avoiding junkfood. I am sooo happy now because i finally have a hot boyfriend. YAHOO WINSOR PILATES!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

August 9, 2006 at 10:07 pm
(26) dayana bilbao says:

Winsor Pilates does work. I have been using for 3 years. I was 175 pounds and a size 14. I’m 133 pounds and a size 6. The 20 minute workout is great. Believe me, it works!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

August 14, 2006 at 6:29 pm
(27) Jessica says:

i have been using winsor pilates for only a month now and i went from a size 12 to a 7 already!! not only that but im energized and not nearly as stressed! it really works!!

August 19, 2006 at 9:34 am
(28) ashley says:

Hey! I just ordered the $9.99 kit this morning. Is it not as good as the $80.00 ones??

August 21, 2006 at 11:40 am
(29) angela says:

I started pilates just a week ago and i feel great i love the way you feel after each work out i have noticed the difference in my arms and legs, it works on your core too. i love pilates!!

August 25, 2006 at 6:37 am
(30) Larissa says:

I’m so lazy…how lazy you ask? I’ve had a two year membership at LA Fitness that is literally across the street from me. I wouldn’t need my second hand to count how many times I’ve gone. I absolutely love Winsor Pilates & actually look forward to popping in the video and starting my fun work out with the
sculpting circle.

August 25, 2006 at 1:51 pm
(31) Joanne says:

I am 51 years old and worked out on and off since my twenties. I’ve gone through Jane Fonda video’s and a membership at Bally’s. I have gone through a long stretch of not exercising. I’m going to order Winsor Pilates and see how it works for me. I looks line something I would really like. I’ll report back.

August 28, 2006 at 6:46 pm
(32) amy says:

just ordered it and can’t wait to test it out for myself

August 29, 2006 at 11:27 am
(33) SxD says:

It is great! I’ve always believed in exercising and have always either jogged or done other exercise videos but was never happy with the bulk I formed. I tried Pilates 2-3yrs back but didn’t feel the burn & couldn’t appreciate it. Then I decided to give it a try again a few mnths back. I ordered couple of Winsor Pilates DVDs off ebay and I just LOVE it. I think all pilates videos are same, maybe Winsor Pilates just targets people by making their 20minute videos which seems easy. I haven’t lost any big weight coz I was healthy even before I started it but I’m definitely toning up. I feel my core is getting stronger and I’m starting to look leaner than before. I think I’m a fan of Pilates now! Definitely give it a try – you’ll love it!

August 31, 2006 at 9:49 am
(34) Cheizi says:

I did ballet for about 9 years and stopped about 3 years ago. needless to say my flexibility went down the drain. I’ve been doing pilates for only 3 weeks and ALREADY I feel as flexible as I was 3 years ago. I can actualy FEEL my muscles being toned, Winsor Pilates is AMAZING!

September 3, 2006 at 3:23 am
(35) Elle says:

In the past three years I’ve gained a lot of weight from stress and emotional eating and last year I bought the Winsor fat buring DVDs but I never did it because I hated the 50 minute aerobic excersize so much.

About 4 weeks ago I changed my eating habits and automatically my face got thinner and my clothes fit more loosely so 6 days ago I decided to speed it up by wholeheartedly starting the Winsor system but this time only alternating between the 20 min. burn basics and the 20 min. ab sculpting workouts. I’ve taken my measurements before hand and will do it again in a week and I’ll comment on the hopeful change. I think it will work. I might add some cardio like jumping rope to acccelerate the weight loss.

I’m really inspired by most of the comments here but they almost sound like they were fabricated by the company, they’re so positive. I hope they’re real!!!!

September 5, 2006 at 2:06 am
(36) Sophie says:

I got one of the 20 min. ones (the one with “the seal” at the end) today and I’ve done it twice already but I don’t really feel that much different and it wasn’t hard at all, will it make a difference? did anyone else find that?

September 6, 2006 at 4:17 am
(37) Elisabeth says:

Well, using the 20 min. workout is great, and I can feel the change more than I Can see the change:) But its fun and I think it will work for me if I can keep the good work going:) Good luck!

September 13, 2006 at 10:21 am
(38) Jan says:

I have been using the Winsor Pilates 20 minute workout for some time, and it definately tones me up! I have some spinal and foot injuries and therefore cannot do any kind of impact exercise, even walking. Winsor Pilates is the only thing I have found that I can do that works!

September 19, 2006 at 7:31 am
(39) Elizabeth says:

I ordered Winsor Pilates and I’m sooo excited to try them out. I was a dancer for 16 years and then stopped I have ained some weight..I’m lookin to get rid of it!! I hope it works!!!

September 28, 2006 at 1:02 pm
(40) Tamra says:

I first started doing the Winsor Pilates program 3 years ago. I couldn’t belive the difference it had on me. I dropped about 80 lbs in 4 months. Of course I was watching what I ate and doing other healthy things but it was the pilates that made the difference. I’ve watched what I eat in the past and never had those kind of results EVER. It works no doubt. Unfortunatly I got complacent, life got busy and I lost sight of my goal and gained some back. I have just started doing them again and after only a week I can feel the difference in how I carry myself and I sit taller. I alternate doing the 20 minute abs Mon, Wed, Fri, and the 20 min buns & thights Tues, Thurs, and then I do the advanced 1 hour workout on Sunday. In 1 week I’ve already lost 7 lbs. It works it really does!! For the person that commented about hoping these were real. I am a real person, and it really does work!

September 29, 2006 at 2:21 pm
(41) Angela says:

I’m 50 years old and have done all the diet fads since the SEVENTIES!Without success. I started Pilates on my 49th birthday and felt a difference just after the first workout. I felt energized and stress-free. I stuck with it for 4 months, doing a workout three times a week. OMG!!! The difference in my body was unbelievable! Then I got lazy and laid off working out for six months and lost everything I had accomplished. I’m working out again and in just TWO WEEKS of daily 20-minute workouts, I am trim, tone, and THREE SIZES SMALLER! A size FOUR from a size TWELVE!!!! I have tried various Pilates workouts and find they are all pretty much the same. I LOVE Winsor Pilates because it remains so upbeat. I will be posting results as soon as I get my personal page up and running. (www.sarielfire.net) Stick with Pilates for just a week and you’ll be amazed at the difference in your body, your energy, and your mind. Good luc everyone!

September 29, 2006 at 6:51 pm
(42) Kelli says:

I just purchased the Winsor pilates with the circle. I love the work out. It is fun and easy but you can feel it the next day. I have to kids 22 months apart, so I have a lot of flab on my belly. I have not seen any results yet but it is easy to squeeze in 20 minutes during the day. You feel so good after doing it you can not wait to do it again and trust me I am not one that likes to exersice. Hopefully I will be able to come back in a couple of weeks to tell everybody how much weight I lost.

October 1, 2006 at 2:20 pm
(43) Andrea says:

I think it totally works! My body is getting a form I haven’t seen in a long time! I do the advanced 55 min workout everyday just to get results faster. I don’t have to go to the gym, I just lie down in front of the TV and start. And while doing it I HAVE A GREAT TIME! I don’t know how much weight and inches I lost but I don’t really care because I know I won’t stop doing it because I LOVE doing it!
You gotta try it!

October 4, 2006 at 7:56 pm
(44) Emily says:

Hey I got a book on Pilates not winsor pilates tho and it was so slow and boring and i only did it for a week and then i got bored is winsor pilates any different because i do NO excersise at all and being a teenager i eat alot of junkfood and im scared im going to get fat!

October 5, 2006 at 3:30 am
(45) Britany says:

Hi! I just ordered winsor pilates yeasterday and i just cant wait to get it . I’m really excited!

October 6, 2006 at 4:33 pm
(46) Ashley says:

I orderes pilates when it first came out years ago. I never stuck to it. I was thinking of ordering the circle series, but at the same time am not sure if I want to. Does anyone know if the circle series works faster than the other videos?

October 8, 2006 at 6:40 pm
(47) carmen says:

October 8,2006

I am 47-years-old mother of 3 and I just ordered my 1st Winsor Pilates package today. I have been riding a bike between 2-7 miles a day, 7 days a week, for past 8 weeks, with very little change in my weight or in the fit of my clothes, it has been very, very discouraging! I have a daughter that is a college student and is taking a pilates class at school she has been raving about how great she feels and that she is toning and seeing muscle definition she has never had before. I am really excited about her results and can’t wait to see what it does for me. I will truthfully comment on what I think about the program once I receive it and have given it a try for a month or so.

Comment by Carmen-October 8, 2006 @5:30 pm

October 8, 2006 at 10:59 pm
(48) Karen says:

I LOVE winsor pilates!!!! I became an addict a couple of years ago & noticed big differences fast. Most of my tops that hung around my waist were up around my belly button and I seemed to gain a couple of inches in height. Got a bit slack for a while but have just recently got back into it, its the only exercise I enjoy. For anyone thinking about trying it, DO. You’ll feel amazing.

October 9, 2006 at 2:23 am
(49) jenna says:

I dont know wheather to belive any of these postings or not. Someone please tell me if Winsor Pilates reall works.

October 9, 2006 at 12:38 pm
(50) Nancy says:

I bought windsor pilates on vhs and recently purchased the one with the circle. It really DOES work. It does not feel like it’s doing too much. You don’t end up with pain so sometimes you feel like it’s not helping, but it is. It give you long, lean muscles .. not bulky ones. I love it and it’s easy. It produces results. You just have to be self disciplined enough to do it.

Nancy

October 10, 2006 at 12:43 am
(51) Jessica says:

I am 16 years old and i way, like, 375!!! and i am in a size 28 in jeans (and that is sqeezing in them). I can’t even buy cloths at almost ANY store, not even wal*mart. I am not picked on a whole lot (of course, there are some mean people everywhere), but over all, i have lots of friends and stuff, but i just wanted to do this for me! I am tired of wearing the same jeans and t-shirts all the time. i wear t-shirts because all other shirts show the bottom of my stomach or the rolls on my back. i want to go shopping and buy clothes that i like, not just seeing what will fit me. I have ordered and i hope it works!!!

October 10, 2006 at 6:07 am
(52) Christine says:

Jenna- I just got started on the DVD’s, I will let you know in a couple of weeks weather or not I see any results. Currently, I am about 180lbs and wearing a size 12-14 pant size… The DVD’s are nice and I can feel a burn when doing them. I really like them a lot (So far)! I am a nurse in the military so I have to stay in shape, my weight and size has been a yo-yo ever since I can remember… Anyway, I will write back in a couple of weeks, so look for my posting and how the DVD’s worked for me. :-)

October 19, 2006 at 6:03 pm
(53) Ellen says:

I’m about 7 months pregnant now and am afraid I will not be able to loose the weight after the baby’s born. I woke up 2 days ago to my tv talking about Winsor Pilates and how well it works. I have become extremely lazy and was already lazy before I got pregnant. My starting weight was 140 now I am around 165. I am thinking about ordering Winsor Pilates for a workout after the baby’s born but I am not sure I’ll stick to it. Hopefully it will be fun and I’ll stick to it.

October 22, 2006 at 7:54 pm
(54) Leslie says:

I need to lose 15lbs by Thanksgiving!! I am dedicated to going to the gym and doing cardio…is this possible and will Pilates expedite the process??? What the heck, I am going to try it and I will report back with any progress.

October 23, 2006 at 10:36 pm
(55) Brittney says:

Hello everyone well i am about 15 and a half years old today and i love to do soccer and stay fit but i feel like i am ot in the best of shape in my abs area. You all know what i am talking about. That extra flab hanging around will someone please tell me if winsor pilates will target and eliminate the fat in that are????

October 25, 2006 at 9:26 am
(56) Christine says:

Hello all- I promised to post back with my results… I have not really lost any weight per say (but I have not been watching what I eat either), HOWEVER… I have found that my problem areas are getting toned!!! :-) The DVD’s are awsome and I actually have fun doing them! I will post back in a few weeks to give an update. Talk to you all soon!

October 29, 2006 at 11:11 am
(57) Patti says:

I ordered Pilates today. About 10 years ago I was enrolled in a dance class that included 3 nights classes of a “dancer’s workout”. That was back in the 90′s when the fashion was leggings that fit tight. I was standing around one day and a woman commented on the toning of my legs. I looked down and you could see all the muscle cuts showing through the leggins. I felt so good! My stomach was flat and when I went to work outs I wore all those tight body suites in bright colors. I was a size 6 back then. Today I am a size 14-16 and I don’t like going to the swimming pool unless it is dark outside.
I have found out the the Winsor Pilates is similar to the “dancer’s workout” I was doing 10 years ago. I juiced some carrots and apples today for breakfast and I’m going to start a cleaning program too. I would love to drop to a size 10 or 12 by Christmas. I’m tired of being over weight! I want to feel healthy again! I’m turning 40 in December and I am single. Wouldn’t it be wonderful if I could look great for my 40th!

November 6, 2006 at 11:49 pm
(58) Kajlug says:

I’m use to weight 120 pounds like, 3 months ago. I’ve gone from a size 3 to a size 5 and on the verge of a size 7. Also, I’m short and asian, which means a lot of RICE! Does Pilates actually work? Especially for someone with my background? I also want to be lean…not really muscular, just tone. I don’t want like a six pack I want a flat tummy…also, I have pretty big breasts unfortunately…does pilates help in a sense “reduce” them as well?

November 7, 2006 at 8:14 pm
(59) Kate says:

I’m 19 and used to play sports in high school… now that I am in college I didn’t want to gain weight. I have been doing the Winsor pilates tape for 2 weeks now, 3 or 4 days a week, and I already notice differences and feel so good when I’m done. I feel more flexible, my posture is better, and I see more definition in my abs and my thighs! It’s the best :)

November 15, 2006 at 7:59 pm
(60) Carene says:

Hi everyone- a lot of these may sound like infomercials, but Pilates does work. I am 22 and have been off and on with Pilates for about 3 years- I absolutely love it, and if you stick to it 2-3 a week, you will notice a big difference. I do the ‘buns and thighs’ video(my problems areas) and after a few weeks my husband told me my legs looked great- I felt great when he said that. Now I am pregnant, just 2 months and a afraid to get giant legs, so I’m going to start up again. I definitely recommend pilates to anyone. It’s the only workout I enjoy and I definitely feel the burn at times. It’s easy and quick. I really love it!

November 24, 2006 at 7:52 pm
(61) Jess says:

I ordered winsor pilates about 3 weeks ago, and it came promptly about a week later. I’ve been using it now for a little over 2 weeks and i’m already seeing a small different. When I walk, my inner thighs don’t rub so close together, i’m taller, leaner in my abs area, and i have a lot more energy. i suggest that if you want to drop a few pounds, you should do pilates 3x a week, and run 3x a week, and then walk once a week. that’s what i’ve been doing and i’m already wearing my old jeans that i haven’t put on in a year. it’s amazing, and i was skeptical at first. but pilates really does help.

November 26, 2006 at 9:24 pm
(62) keara says:

I have only been doing pilates for two days now. I had previously done yoga and that was helpful but so slow. The winsor pilates circle series has made me feel a difference in my ab area after only two sessions. My stomach muscles are much tighter.

December 2, 2006 at 8:01 pm
(63) Karen says:

I’m dedicating December to getting ready for 2007! I am counting on Windsor Pilates to help with that. Of course, I’m going to modify my diet and stick to cardio. I am 140 right now so I will tell you for sure at the end of the month if this stuff works. THIS IS NOT A GIMMICK either. I’m really going to try this out.

December 2, 2006 at 9:27 pm
(64) F.W. says:

I started using Windsor Pilates September 2003, so it’s been a little over three years now. I memorized the 20 minute routine and combined it with the bun and thigh workout for a 30 minute routine, 5 days a week. I get up around 6 am and put on the tv on the shows I like, do the routine while my water for tea is boiling. When I started the pilates, my weight was about 145 pounds, inching towards 150 pounds. I was starting to wear a size 14. Now I weigh 120 pounds and hardly have any cellulite. I wear sizes 5/6. In addition to the pilates, I gave up regular soda and most junk foods. I also usually don’t eat after 8 pm and have switched to lower calorie/lower fat foods when practical. Last year my cholesterol was getting high, so I’ve tried to replace trans/bad fats with good fats, like olive oil.

December 5, 2006 at 3:30 pm
(65) Sandi says:

I have used Winsor Pilates in the past (when I was deployed in the Marines and needed to work out in my tent where there wasn’t much space) and it made me look great!! Well, I just had a baby and still have 40 lbs to lose! I just ordered the new $80 package and am excited to try out these new DVD’s. I’m not so good at watching what I eat, and although I go to the gym often, in the winter some days I don’t feel like leaving my house. I’ll let you know how it goes!

December 7, 2006 at 6:11 pm
(66) Cindy says:

Well, after reading all of these comments I am encouraged to begin using the pilates system diligently. I have been struggling with my weight for about four years now. I am hoping to find a system that keeps me motivated and encouraged. I used the pilates system today and feel it in my tummy and thighs. I will post my results in about three weeks. I wiegh about 166 and am 5’8. My goal is to get my wright back down to 126

December 7, 2006 at 10:06 pm
(67) Jen says:

I used my roomate’s Winsor Pilates video, and I have really felt the burn in my butt, thigh and stomach muscles. It works. I already look better, using it only 5 times!

December 10, 2006 at 4:07 pm
(68) Ani says:

Hi, I’m a small figured girl, but not tight. Will this help me become tight?

December 14, 2006 at 1:10 pm
(69) Lucy says:

I bought Pilates a couple of years ago and when I am consistent with it I can really see results, but I’m lazy when it comes to working out on a regular basis. I just stumbled upon this cite and now I’m ready to start Pilates all over again!!! =)
Ani-you want to get “tight” Pilates is what you want

December 14, 2006 at 11:26 pm
(70) liz says:

I just purchased Windsor Pilates. Im very tall and definately not fat – but i do have small love handles, slightly wobbly thighs and few tummy rolls. i know that with work i could have a models body – but I AM VERY LAZY – im really only going to have time to do Pilates max 3 times a week – do u think this will work for me?

December 17, 2006 at 8:59 pm
(71) lauren says:

I think it’ll work for you, even if you only have time for three times a week. I’m home for winter break right now and I am going to get back into the habit of using it again…because I used my dvds consistently over the summer, and although I was running some too and watching what I ate, I had a 6-pack for the first time ever! It was amazing! But 3 days a week would probably be enough, as long as you watch what you eat and try to fit small amounts of exercise in here and there (by that, I mean taking the stairs instead of the elevator, parking farther from places so that you have to walk more, etc.)

December 18, 2006 at 2:11 pm
(72) Erica says:

I just purchased Winsor Pilates, and like Liz, I am also very lazy. But I have decided to commit myself to pilates and work out at least four times a week. I am home for winter break also, and there is now 4 weeks until classes start again. Does anyone know if I could lose up to 15 pounds in that amount of time?

December 20, 2006 at 2:26 am
(73) nayt says:

as everyone says it works! I’m overweight and I can stil do the tapes and feel great about em! and with the low moderation one and it still did wonders….for the time I used it I lost 20 pounds…then I quit using it and I’m gunna start em again! so to anyone who hasent tried it yet…..its worth every penny to purchase it! believe me! if I can do it and I’m a heavyset person then you can do it!

December 21, 2006 at 5:59 pm
(74) cassie says:

i bought this probably a year or so ago. i used it off and on since then and am now going to stick to it. ive gone to the gym,ive looked up stuff online, and pilates is the only thing that really works my muscles. the first day i ever did it my muscles were sore and even in places i didnt think possible! definately works if you keep to it!
also, i get bored easily so the cardio burn series she has is good too.

December 25, 2006 at 11:44 am
(75) Sandy says:

I bought the original Winsor Pilates back in 2000 or 2001. I have used them off and on and do believe in them. I think if you are wanting Pilates, these are the best way to go. I work at a fitness center, so I have to say that I don’t think this should be used to substitute other exercise (cardio and strength training) but if you don’t have much time or other reasons, I think this is a great way to go. I really like these for the core training, for the flexibility and I think they are great about making sure you don’t put your back/neck at risk for injury. I have heard that the newest series isn’t as good as the original because now they make them to where you have to buy one after another, and the ones I have are a basic, a 20 min and an advanced (60 min). I love them, but my last piece of advice is HAVE PATIENCE. Pilates is a form of exercise that can give you toning results, but it may take awhile. Some Pilates instructors have said at least 6 weeks to 3 months to see any kind of results. Good luck!

December 26, 2006 at 12:13 pm
(76) Patricia says:

Christine, I enjoyed your postings…hows it going? I just started today. I’m 47, 4 children 19-10 yrs in age. My mom died in October, my husband left 7 days later and I’ve gained 20 lbs in 2 months! YIKES! I have a new perspective on life today and I began my 1st workout. Am looking to buy the “circle” workout but will measure my committment over the next 7 days. LIFE is GOOD and I must get about LIVING!

December 26, 2006 at 4:33 pm
(77) Paula says:

I just recieved my winsor pilates today. Will let you know how my results are coming along in a couple of weeks. I am 28 160 lbs and 5’1 . I have 4 children ages 9 , 7,6,and 3.

December 26, 2006 at 9:38 pm
(78) Patricia says:

Erica, Thanks for the tip….i went to Big Lots here in Amarillo and found the $79.95 (online) set for $2.99 (dvd)!!! i’m so excited….
:D

December 29, 2006 at 7:00 pm
(79) Jennifer says:

I started with the 20 minute circle workout yesterday and did the 10 minute sculpting blast today. Just let me say I can feel it in every major muscle in my body and it feels great :)

January 1, 2007 at 3:05 pm
(80) Christel says:

I’mj starting tomorrow and can’t wait…

January 1, 2007 at 10:41 pm
(81) KB says:

I am so encouraged reading all these comments. I am 39 years old, 5’7″ and weigh 165. My worst areas are my tummy, hips and butt so I am really hoping this will work. The thing I was excited about is that I don’t have to stand. I have a terrible case of plantar faciitis in both feet and literally any exercise that I have to use my feet leaves me in extreme pain and I find myself having to crawl around the house. I have tried so many different exercise machines and programs and all leave me in pain so I am really hoping this will work for me. I have used it two times now and can really feel it in my tummy. I got mine at Target. Thanks for the encouragement.

January 2, 2007 at 10:58 pm
(82) LR says:

I got Winsor Pilates when it first came out and did it about 3-4 times a week. I have to say that even though I went to the gym 3-4 a week, the Pilates program really gave me lean muscle benefits without bulking me up. I’m 5’3 and 122 lbd but have hit a plateau so I’m definitely blowing the dust off of the Winsor dvd’s. I’m excited to get that lean look again that I used to have. Winsor Pilates does work QUICKLY and encourages you to make better choices towards your fitness goals. It’s also a great stress reliever!

January 3, 2007 at 4:10 pm
(83) mija says:

hay!I started it yesterday, but I have a question:).Can I eat normaly, or do I have too eat less, and can I do winsor pilates more than 3 times a week??

January 3, 2007 at 4:34 pm
(84) Chaos says:

I just “re-started” the 20 min workouts 2 days ago, i used to do it everyday last school break but i didnt have time to keep going now i’m starting again alternating 1 day AbSculpt next UpperSculpt and BunsSculpt then again Abs
I will let u know my results past this week, im 187 lb i dont look faty but im overweight i hope i can loose the 20 lbs like in past break i used to weight and more if i can, cya

January 3, 2007 at 7:54 pm
(85) Jennifer says:

I saw the infomercial this morning – and have been considering buying it. I’ve purchased others – but my problem is I get bored. I saw that other’s were able to go to their local Big Lots and purchase the whole product their – I’m hoping to do that and save some money. Another problem for me is I have had 3 knee surgery’s and when I use – for example : turbo jams my knee swells and I have to stop for a while. Or Yoga Booty, is just boring after the 3rd week in. I really want something that will help me tone but also have a little cardio without killing my knee in the process.

Here’s hoping that Big Lots has it!

If they do – I’ll update here…

January 6, 2007 at 8:25 pm
(86) Jessi says:

After 1-2 weeks i saw a difrence in my body . i look slimmer; unfortunetly i stoped working after 2-3 month and started to go to a fitness center.
Since i’ve benn there for 1 month already i have lost 7 pounds and built some muscles.

Winsor Pilates works if u buy all the CD’s and stick to it. It was to boaring for me to stay home and do pilates every couple of days.
I hope you reach your goal.

January 6, 2007 at 8:26 pm
(87) Jessi says:

After 1-2 weeks i saw a difrence in my body . i look slimmer; unfortunetly i stoped working after 2-3 month and started to go to a fitness center.
Since i’ve been there for 1 month already i have lost 7 pounds and built some muscles.

Winsor Pilates works if u buy all the CD’s and stick to it. It was to boaring for me to stay home and do pilates every couple of days.
I hope you reach your goal.

January 7, 2007 at 1:40 pm
(88) Kim says:

I ordered the Winsor Pilates today. I am excited and optimistic. The encouraging comments I found here were great. I will post again after I receive my video and get started.

January 8, 2007 at 12:24 pm
(89) Anna says:

I first bought Winsor Pilates DVDs in 2003. Using the DVDs, I lost abour 65 pounds over many months (from about 200 to 135 pounds). For the past year, I only lost another 5 or 6 pounds but dropped more dress sizes.So, I’ve gone from something like a 16/18W to a 6. In order to do this, I ended up doing two 60 minutes workouts back to back with stomach crunches 6 times a week. I could feel results immediately, and it’s the only workout I have ever stuck to. I have got bored with the tapes and don’t really have 2 hours a day right now, however, and don’t really know what I am going to do now. Go for it.

January 8, 2007 at 2:27 pm
(90) Lisa M. says:

Hey all,

I am just about to start Winsor Pilates and would like to know what is the best exercise regimen for someone who is a beginner in pilates and is out of shape using the Winsor pilates?

January 8, 2007 at 4:13 pm
(91) kasi says:

does these winsor pilates dvd work?i have prob with thighs.i need to work on that.will i ever loose those fat on it?and how fast will the result be shown?

January 9, 2007 at 4:09 pm
(92) Chaos says:

first week report: xD
well my weight is exactly the same as when i started so i have not noticed change in that, however i notice my body is a bit slimmer than before, so i will keep doing the workouts and reporting it :D
take in count i dont care what i eat i eat whenever im hungry however i drink a lot of water and i dinner fiber rich cereal with a piece of anything of bread, this keeps the fast food out hehe

January 12, 2007 at 5:55 pm
(93) K. says:

After reading all these comments on Winsor Pilates, I decided to go pick up some DVDs. I found them at Big Lots, I got a whole pack of 5 DVDs (Including the basic fat burning one) for only $2.99!!! So they should be at most Big Lots! I’m so excited to go start, which I plan on doing now. :-)

January 13, 2007 at 1:33 pm
(94) Jennifer says:

Hi. I did Atkins a few years back and lost quite a bit of weight but never got into a consistent exercise program. Since I’m not as diligent about watching carbs anymore some of the weight has crept back. I’m ordering a Winsor Pilates set today and will let you know how it goes. The comments of everyone are very encouraging.

January 15, 2007 at 3:49 pm
(95) Yoley says:

I’ve read each and every comment here and it has help me make my decision on getting the pilates dvd. I just started using it this morning and I must say when I got up this morning the last thing I wanted to do was workout but, I forced myself to do it and I’m so glad I did because I felt so much better aftewards. I will keep you all updated with my results.

January 15, 2007 at 7:40 pm
(96) Chaos says:

second week report: :D
well not much to say but im feeling better each day like with more energy than before, my weight still the same well at least the bascle isnt against me :D , right now i can make the Abs workout each day more easily, i cant say of the Upper Bdy sculpting hehe is still hard for the ending excercises of each stage (using 10 lb weights by the way), and well i guess i will start making the abs and upper workouts together one after the other each day and keep reporting, cya

January 17, 2007 at 6:28 pm
(97) Mark says:

I started doing Windsor Pilates and after only 15 minutes my Aunt Sally was RESURRECTED. I lost 3 pounds just holding the case.

January 18, 2007 at 2:05 am
(98) Courtney says:

Well I am starting again on my palates 58 minute workout maximim burn. I did it a lot before and felt stronger, but I am wondering does these palates honestly work? Because many people say they do, but who are these people? You see I am 14 and I have school and all that, when I do palates, the workouts seem so slow.

January 18, 2007 at 5:21 pm
(99) dfhf says:

dfh

January 21, 2007 at 1:22 pm
(100) Chaos says:

Third Week Report :D
Hi all well i will resume the third report by this…
* No weight loss but not gain either
* Harder, stronger abs, flacid areas retreating hehe
* Arms being shaped a little
So i will keep working everyday on it and report back, by the way I agree with Courtney about workouts feel slow after a while, so i recommend memorize it and do it by yourself so its faster, however i have made a 40 min workout ripping the videos and joining the three 20 min workouts taking out the unnecessary pauses of explanations and just straight work and its nice so im doing the 40 min now :D , and well im a guy doing this workouts i’m 22, i’m from Mexico, i’m a normal student and im just reporting objective as possible u judge if its worth a try winsor pilates, just for answer to Courtney’s question, cya

January 22, 2007 at 10:52 pm
(101) Jennifer says:

I bought Winsor Pilates a few years back. Used them faithfully with a regular gym regiment. It’s not that pilates is the key to successful weight loss, but it is a GREAT start to more energy and feeling good about yourself. I am a mother or 3 children 6, 5, and 4. I have always been active in the gym and aerobics. I was in the Army for years but got out when I started having children. Gained weight, got Pilates, and began to lose it. Added the gym, and BOOM! On a roll again! When you have a good program like this, exercise is addicting. You want to do more. You want to eat right. You want to work out more. At least, that is what it did for me.
So pilates may not be the answer, but it is a great and fun start to get you motivated to do more and be a healthier person.
Good health is never a waste of time or money. Any program will work as long as you work it! Hope this helps!

January 24, 2007 at 4:00 pm
(102) Cryasynth says:

Two and a half years ago I had lower back problems that kept me in constant pain – I had let my body go to crap. I decided enough was enough: I needed to get in shape and lose 40 lbs. Of course, I figured if I just lost the weight that would make me “in shape”, so I wanted that “quick fix” plan because I hate working out. I bought the Winsor Pilates System as a skeptic, but gave it the 30 days trial – without dieting. I never took measurements, and I made sure to not step on a scale until the 30 days were up.

In a weeks time, I started to notice a difference.

By the end of the 30 days, I felt really good about myself. My clothes were loose, my body felt stronger, my back pain and problems went away, and I actually looked forward to my exercise time every day. (That in itself is amazing!)

Three months later, all of my weight was gone and I was fitting into my “skinny” jeans (you know the ones that you keep for years because they were your favorites and “someday” you will get back into them) and I even bought a bikini for the first time since high school! I felt great – I had more energy, I had more strength, I was WAY more flexible, I became more active in everything else, I no longer felt “old”, and the bonus: I liked the way my body looked. I kept doing the pilates.

A little more than a year after I started the 30 day trial, I took a different job that made it inconvenient to schedule an exercise time, and I quit doing it…

Now, a year and a half later, I am on this website because I’m looking to replace the DVD’s I lost during my move so that I can start again. I miss the way I felt when I was doing pilates on a regular basis. It wasn’t just about the weight, it was about feeling good and having energy and never getting sick…losing the weight was almost like a fortunate consequence.

For anyone that is looking for a diet plan…this is not it. For those of you that want to almost “accidentally” lose weight while you are making your body healthier, I say get that pair of skinny jeans out, hang them on your bathroom mirror for motivation, put your scale away, and buy the Winsor Pilates. Give it 30 days and it WILL change the way you look at yourself. I, myself, will be making it a habit again that I won’t give up for the rest of my life.

January 26, 2007 at 12:44 am
(103) jennifer says:

I’m 33, mom of 1. I was not really overweight but everything was soft, especially the lower belly. I have been doing the Windsor pilates 20 minute body slimming tape about 3x per week for about a month. Have dropped a few pounds (now down to my 18-year old weight) but the biggest change is my waist has shrunk! All my pants are hanging loose – this may be expensive cause I’ll have to go shopping, hehe. The program doesn’t really work my arms so I also got a resistance (elastic) band to do bicep and tricep exercises with and it works well.

January 27, 2007 at 5:22 pm
(104) Leah says:

im about 5’3, 110 pounds. i dont need to lose any weight, i just want to tone up my muscles. i haven’t worked out in forever, will windsor pilates be too challenging for me to start with? i want to work my legs, abs, and arms, and my goal is to be toned by spring break. what would be a good windsor pilates workout for me? does the sculpting circle really work well?

January 27, 2007 at 6:06 pm
(105) Michele says:

Just started I am so excited, I will post back with my results

January 28, 2007 at 4:40 pm
(106) Shay says:

Greetings! Mother of two babies 27months(2) and 11months, i look better after having my second child then I did before having children. I get alot of suprised comments when people see I have young children but I do tae bo and pilates so I believe the pilates is good for strecthing the muscles taebo made sore, and it slims I have the basic dvd set!

January 30, 2007 at 1:20 pm
(107) Sarah says:

hey, does anyone know if there are winsor pilates dvds in the big lots in clifton new jersey?

January 31, 2007 at 11:25 am
(108) kasi says:

hi,

i have used continuosly for 2 weeks,and no results yet.i dont see any change in my body?shud i really continue with these tapes?

February 1, 2007 at 3:02 pm
(109) Mindy says:

Hey there,
I’m starting again on my Winsor Pilates program. I had originally bought it when the infomercials were pushing them so hard, but wasn’t able to stay motivated. I’ve since started an AquaFit class, and have started again with the tapes, and let me tell you, the difference is amazing. I’ve lost 6 pounds in less than two weeks, and have never been more motivated. I woke up early (this from a girl who used to sleep in until 4pm) this morning and did the 20 minute workout. I loved it to much, I’m going to do it again on my lunch break! Stick with this, ladies. It’s worth the effort.

February 2, 2007 at 12:25 am
(110) Stacy says:

can u really lose just by doing the 20 minute workout 3 times a week?

February 3, 2007 at 11:15 am
(111) Mallory says:

I’ve been doing the pilates work out everyday for 4 weeks now… and i’ve already started gettin Abs! It’s crazy. I never would have thought it would work. but it does!!!

February 3, 2007 at 5:06 pm
(112) Claire says:

hi… i just bought the windsor pilates over the phone this morning… i am really excited… i hope it works… i can’t wait for spring break now!!! hopefully soon… i will post baack.. with some good news!!

February 5, 2007 at 8:58 am
(113) Chaos says:

1 MONTH & 1 week report!! :D
Hi all, well at least i have reached and past the first month, and now seriously i have seen results, i really look slimmer than the first day i started pilates i haven’t toned up yet my muscles well a little bit my arms but abs not yet just overweight shape going away really, strange is that however i have not loose weight i hope its ’cause changin fat for muscles he, but im sure im going to start toning up soon, so i recommend use pilates for longer than a month to see results, cya for the next month :D

February 5, 2007 at 1:46 pm
(114) LINA says:

HELLO EVERYONE I STARTED WINDSOR PILATES ONE WEEK AGO. I LOST 2 POUNDS 1 INCH FROM MY CHEST AND 1 1/2 INCHES FROM MY WAIST. I’M JUST DOING THE ABS WORKOUT. THIS WEEK I THINK I’LL ALTERNATE FROM BUNS N THIGHS AND ABS. I CANT BELIEVE IT I CAN SEE A DIFFERENCE RIGHT AWAY. AND I DONT DIET I EAT ANYTHING I WANT. I’M SURE IF I DIET I WILL GET BETTER RESULTS STICK TO IT EVERYONE I’LL TRY TO REPORT BACK EVERY WEEK LIKE CHAOS. I AM 22 YRS OLD. FEMALE

February 6, 2007 at 2:06 pm
(115) Ash says:

Pilates works for my body. It takes 8 to 12 weeks for my love handles to shrink and only 2 weeks for my stomach to become flatter. Fortunately, my achievements were from using the 20-minute DVD 5x a week, which is easy to maintain. I didn’t want to get into an effective program that would be hard to keep up with, so by doing 20-minutes of quality stretches, the weight comes off sensibly for my lifestyle.

My Plan:
-No soda, sports drinks, or milk
-No cookies, cake, or pie (if you MUST have some sweets, have enough to satisfy and be done)
-No potato or tortilla chips (the salt really inflates your face and love handles)
-Only one child size serving at any meal (more or less enough food to fill both flat palms)
-My “Magic Foods”: yogurt, cottage cheese, apples, whole wheat bread

***WARNING: doing Pilates and eating better is a lifestyle change that should be taken seriously. I ate better and did Pilates, but discovered that the weight returns about 2 weeks after stopping Pilates, so Pilates DOES work, you just have to be committed to feeling better.

What I Do To Trick My Mind For Better Results:
1) “Is that extra helping worth the feelings you get later?”
2) “You know indulging in those chips will turn your hips into water balloons…”
4) “Don’t wreck all the work you’ve done!”
5) “Would you rather take two steps forward and resist or cave in and take four steps back?”

And the big one, “Do you want to feel lighter and freer in the summer or feel like a beached whale?” (a little harsh, but whatever works!)

February 6, 2007 at 2:23 pm
(116) Jenny says:

My sister is letting me borrow the DVD’s she bought because I wanted to try something new. The tough thing is, I don’t know which workouts to do! She gave me 7 dvds, some are advance do I know not to do those yet. I just want to figure out which work outs to do and when. Would it make sense to do one workout one day like the buns and thighs and then the next day do abs? I’m not exactly sure what to do, but I want to see results! If anyone has feedback about that, please post it! Otherwise I will report back in a couple weeks.

February 7, 2007 at 1:27 pm
(117) Steve says:

I have used Winsor Pilates the twenty minute workout for about 2 1/2 years now first let me say it works, that being said my personal experience is that while the Pilate’s and jump rope (need a cardio) have firmed me up i am 50 years old and I am now hard in the middle but I am convinced my fat reduction was due to my diet and not exercise I have lost over 50 pounds in the last two and half years though 90% was in the first 8 months. I believe that the diet alone would have allowed for the body fat reduction the exercise gave me something tangible each day to continue the effort. Now that I have attained my physic back I will continue the same exercise but change my diet to attempt to keep the body fat a current levels instead of decreasing as it has for the last two years.

February 9, 2007 at 1:05 pm
(118) Leah says:

I just started the workout dvds with the resistance band.. ones just abs and one is a full workout. does anyone use that type or know if it works? please respond.***

February 10, 2007 at 5:01 pm
(119) Jacque says:

I recently received my winsor pilates with the circle and have been using it for two weeks. I am already receiving comments on my weight loss. I usually begin a workout program and only exercise for about a week. I have no problems getting up in the mrnings and working out. I know if I stick to my personal plan, I will have the great results that I have been seeking for years. IT”S GREAT!

February 10, 2007 at 8:34 pm
(120) Lindsey says:

I just got them 2 days ago after reading all the postings, I run and lift at least 2x a week and am tring to get in shape for the summer I am 5′ and 130 and need to lose a lot of inches and 10-15lbs. I will let you know how it is going. I am starting to night.

February 12, 2007 at 10:28 am
(121) depressed says:

i was just wondering what kind of diet you guys were following to lose so much weight within a small amount of time? i just ordered the dvd’s and have been doing some research on what kind of diet to follow to enhance the weight lose? i would appreciate any comments or suggestions! thank you!

February 12, 2007 at 11:18 am
(122) Sunshine says:

I just recieved the dvds along with the circle. i am skeptical, but willing to try ANYTHING! Lets pray it works :)

February 12, 2007 at 3:00 pm
(123) Ki Thao says:

it really does work if you don’t believe it you got to try it…

February 12, 2007 at 6:41 pm
(124) stephanie says:

I am so excited I did what many of you guys did i woke up saturday morning and ordered the winsor pilates with the resistance ball i hope it really works i have a wedding i’ll be a bridsmaid in, Yeah the bride chose strapless dresses, so now i must tone my MAN arms hopefully this is the key.
;)

February 12, 2007 at 7:57 pm
(125) Eddie says:

Does windsor pliates for men too?

February 15, 2007 at 5:21 pm
(126) selma says:

Hi, I’m doing the 20 min fat burning workout for past three days. It’s fun to do the dancing like workout. I felt the energy right away. I did in the evening and the problem is I could not sleep, so I plan to do it in the morning.

February 15, 2007 at 10:49 pm
(127) Tiff says:

Hey Everybody,
I’am a 20 yr old female and Pilates is the best work out for toning up, and loosing weight. I started it two years ago and i’ve seen a major difference in my entire body. Not only was my posture better, but my abs looked fabulous, and my arms and thighs got smaller. However, I’m a sophmore in college now and i’ve become lazy and gained a few pounds. I haven’t done any exercises nor have i gone to the gym. After reading these posts i popped in my dvd and started back up again. For those of you just trying out, you must stay consistant with the workout, and watch what you eat. Like many of you on here, i will post my results in a month (March 15, 2007) Summer is around the corner…Wish me Luck! And good luck to everyone else on here!

February 18, 2007 at 9:23 am
(128) Robert says:

I see alot of women responding, so here’s a man’s opinion. My gf bought Windsor Pilates to tone up and she looks great! So I decided to try them out… I’m a tall guy but over the past 4 years my weight steadily crept up from about 200 to 265 pounds. I had to do something so I started the Windsor 20 minute workout since I’m short on time. In 3 months just doing it 3-4 times a week, I dropped from 265 to 224 pounds, and went from a tight size 42 pants to comfy size 36. My beer gut is gone and I get compliments everywhere I go. It works wonders, even for men too!

February 19, 2007 at 12:08 pm
(129) Jessica S. says:

Hi everyone,
i’ve been doing winsor pliates for about two weeks and watching what i eat i’ve been doing the 55min workout and the 20 min workout and cardio(busting my butt…”)i seen a difference in my body my waist and my inner thighs and i feel like my posture has changed not to mention i have lost about 8 lbs in the two weeks…i love pliates i feel great everyone keep up the great work OH YEAH thanks for the tips about getting them from big lots i bought all of mine from bit lost for $2.99 each but it’s beter than target there 9.99-79.99 THANKTS AGAIN

February 19, 2007 at 1:31 pm
(130) D says:

I’m 5’2 and weigh 145lbs. I recently had a baby and I would like to lose that pooch I now have. well pilates help me with this?

February 20, 2007 at 2:34 pm
(131) Kim Myles-Thompson says:

Ive used windor pilates for 2 years. My body is totaly the bomb. I swear by the results it has given me. My legs are stronger than they have ever been. If you are consistant you will see results.I Promise. I also want to say to those people that have not seen results, you must remember diet and what you eat is everything no matter what excersie you decide to do. Secondly you have to be consistant with you work out in order to see any results. Which make me wonder if you are being honest with your self about why you have not seen results.

February 21, 2007 at 3:26 pm
(132) Joyful says:

Ok…i was very encouraged by all of the comments here, so i ordered the Pilates Circle workout..tv special, lol. I have to wait for it to get here, so i may try Big Lots..I am 36 yrs old, mom of 4 (ages 13-4), i need to lose about 40lbs :P . I will keep you posted!

February 22, 2007 at 7:34 pm
(133) mrs. 30 pound goal says:

I’ve been doing windor pilates for about a month know and i’ve been some results but not enough to keep me motivated. can someone help me on a diet plan or recommend anything. please help

February 23, 2007 at 9:33 am
(134) girly says:

mrs. 30, pilates is great for toning but other excersize is a must if you want to see faster and better results. I do pilates 4 days a week and about an hour of cardio at the gym 5 days a week, all while watching my calorie intake. with this i’ve gotten some good results. good luck and stay motivated :)

February 24, 2007 at 9:53 pm
(135) claire says:

hey… i ordered winsor on feb 3, and i just got the package about 3 days ago. yesterday i did the 20 min workout, but i had to go somewhere… so really i did about 13 mins… anyway, this morning when i woke up my inner thighs and abs where acking in pain. so before i left to go away for the weekend, i did the 20 min workout again… and after i finished it, i was like “this is all i have to do?” it was so easy, but i DEFINITLY could feel the burn…i can’t wait to go to bed tonight to see how i feel in the morning… hopefully i will be able to post again soon with some results!!!! good luck!

February 25, 2007 at 9:14 am
(136) zulu says:

im a guy, and i’ve been using winsor pilates for 2 weeks now.

i dont really see results.
i have been doing the 20min workout everyday and the accelerated body sculpting every saturday and monday.

am i doing it wrong? because, im not seeing any results!

February 25, 2007 at 12:19 pm
(137) Kitty K. says:

I had knee surgery about 3 months ago and wonder if I can use this system. I haven’t exercised in a long time–other than walking.

February 26, 2007 at 12:17 am
(138) Christine V. says:

I’ve been using my friend’s Accelerated Body Sculpting DVD for 2 months (3x per week) and it is in fact reshaping my body. I have lost the same amount of weight in the past but this time my thighs are an inch smaller than they’ve ever been since I’ve tracked my measurements. I feel flexible, limber, strong, energetic and leaner. In the past when I’ve lost weight I didn’t keep it up because my thick areas (thighs, butt) didn’t budge. Now I’m motivated to keep it up. I just ordered the entire set.

For those who are not seeing results, it could be technique. Each time I watch I discover something new in how to hold my body and use the powerhouse. I have other Pilates DVDs from Gaiam that are more descriptive of the proper technique. (Anna Caban) So if you are committed to Pilates try these as well as DVDs by Romana. Netflix is a great way to get many perspectives on Pilates that you can apply to your Winsor Pilates routines. One of the descriptions will click for you.

February 26, 2007 at 12:35 pm
(139) selma says:

Hi, I’m doing only 20 min workout and no diet for past two weeks. I donot see any difference in my weight, but I feel very light, when I walk I get a urge to run. Whenever I’m home and wanted so bad to eat, I’ll start to do the work out for few mins and the food craving comes to a control. I’ll post my results every week.

February 28, 2007 at 1:45 pm
(140) Tiffany says:

TRUTH: I was overweight(170lbs) It is really frustrating in the beginning, you feel like you will never be able to move smoothly like they are teching you…BUT you WILL. Struggle through it for about 5 days in a row and you will not believe how much more flexible you are and how much more control you have over your movements! after 2 weeks of doing this its like second nature! BUT YOU HAVE TO KEEP IT UP to keep the results! even just a couple times a week will keep you flexible. IT WORKS!

March 4, 2007 at 3:16 pm
(141) Someone says:

I have just got pilates 20 min workout
Im 14 and i weight 152 pounds. I cant
enjoy spring or summer in social groups.
If i do this for a month please please
some1 tell me what my results will be
around!

March 4, 2007 at 5:16 pm
(142) Lola says:

I just found a 2 DVD (plus resistance band) set for Windsor Pilates for $9.99 at Big Lots today, plus they were having a 20% off sale. I can’t wait to try it, and I’m happy to read so many good reviews.

March 5, 2007 at 10:49 pm
(143) dreamer says:

well i am 13 and started winsor pilates today. i did it like 8 months ago but didn’t stay with it but now i’m going to stay with it!! i’m going to stick with 1200 calories a day of healthy foods. i want to see results quickly because if i don’t i might get discouraged. i REALLY need to lose these extra 10 er so pounds. it hurts so bad to be like this. i will update where i am weekly!

March 6, 2007 at 12:28 pm
(144) Anna says:

I want to start with the windsor pilates system but I don’t know which package is the most beneficial….can anyone help me out here???

March 6, 2007 at 10:48 pm
(145) Leah says:

I’ve been using the pilates system for beginners for 2 weeks. I hope to move up to advanced soon. I have had back problems, but this does not bother my back at all!

March 7, 2007 at 4:23 pm
(146) Joyful says:

I got the circle workout and fat burning workout on Saturday, yay! It only took about a week to get here. I started it on Monday (3 days of working out). It is pretty tough, esp the aerobic part, but it is fun and challenging, so i am going to keep working on it. :) . I need more balance and control. :p I am also working on eating right…Dr. Phil style,hehe. That is harder than the workout! I’ll keep you posted….so far, so good.

March 7, 2007 at 5:58 pm
(147) les says:

winsor pilates does work. i have been at it for a month now and i have dropped one entire size! :) will just keep at it and eat healthier (oh, i love food! hahaha!) and hopefully lose more weight :) and one more, this is the ONLY exercise program i can stick to because it’s fun and it only takes 20 mins 3-5x a week :) i also ordered the fat burning disks and it should arrive next week! can’t wait to try those!

March 7, 2007 at 8:23 pm
(148) Jenna says:

I started doing Winsor Pilates a month ago and just had my first weigh and measure since starting them. I lost 3 lbs and 9 3/4″ !! Can’t wait to see what this month brings!!

March 8, 2007 at 9:54 am
(149) Darlene says:

Is it true that if you want to have flat abs that you have to first lose the fat in you tummy area and if so what’s the best way on how to do this? I was thinking of powerwalking on the treadmill and also doing pilates for the ab workout, do you think this will work?

March 8, 2007 at 12:43 pm
(150) Cheryl says:

I HATE working out and I LOVE Winsor Pilates. I bought it a couple of years ago and I loved it. It made me feel stronger after only a few workouts. You could see the difference in the way my clothes fit within a few weeks. I stopped using it for a while, but I am about to get started again. And you only need to do the 20 minute workout for results. And 20 mins is NOTHING!

March 9, 2007 at 11:41 pm
(151) Candice says:

I just started the 20 min workout and the 20 min ab workout and I plan on rotating every other day, and I was wondering how fast this works. Will I be able to lose 40-50lbs by may/june?? I want to workout every day. Let me know if it really works and if my goal is possible!

March 10, 2007 at 5:31 am
(152) Kid Sis says:

I started on Feb. 27th with the original 20 minute workout. Did it 6 days in a row, took a day off, and have now moved up to the 55 minute original workout. Already down 1/2 a size and found many areas of my body where I can no longer “pinch an inch.”

March 11, 2007 at 5:11 pm
(153) claite says:

ok… hi… as soon as i got back from my vacation, i started windor then min i got it! i used the 20 min work out almost everyday. I tried the dynamic once along with the fat burner wkout once. after the ten days, i weighed myself and took measurments….i lost 4 pounds!! i also lost 1 inch in my hips, 1 inch on each thigh, and 1 inch on my stomach!!! i also can see my legs look soooo much leaner!!! it really does work!! i have to say that i used NO diet at all…. i think i ate more then i did before…. i am already getting soo many remarks!!! i am so excited to c what happens later!!!

goodluck!!

March 12, 2007 at 1:18 pm
(154) Jill says:

Hey everyone! I’ve just purchased Windsor Pilates and I’m very excited to get started. I’ve seen the infomercial over and over through the years and known a few people who have bought it and loved it so I figured I’d give it a try. I’ll get back to all of you girls and guys to let you all know my progress. Wish me lots of luck!

March 12, 2007 at 3:23 pm
(155) kim says:

For those who aren’t getting results, I’m sure it’s your eating habits. I have lost weight after each of my three babies and consistently get back to a size 4 every time. I do always try to move alot, sometimes not even specific excersize plans but just move, like jumping jacks during commercial breaks, wall sit while blowing your hair, taking the stairs, you get the point. I do believe that food is 90% of the battle though. For me, I eat whatever I want, but not too much of it, or if I do eat too much, like a big treat of ice cream or whatever, I just try to eat light at my next meal, like just veggies and fruit. (and it’s ok, realizing you will eat a normal meal again, just not right now) Also, when I want to loose weight after babies, I conciously choose to not take large portions and really listen to what my body wants. It takes about fifteen minutes for your brain to switch off the “hungry” signal; so not eating too much right from the start helps. Good luck to all, I know pilates works, just be consistent!

March 12, 2007 at 3:29 pm
(156) kim says:

Hi again, I forgot to mention just being aware of calorie content of what you eat too, the average person needs 2,000 calories a day so if you eat a McDonalds Mcflurry, (sm) it has about 630 calories, so just be aware that some things really contain more that you realize. Good luck.

March 13, 2007 at 8:34 am
(157) Joyful says:

Progress…I have been using the Fatburning workout 3x a week, and the 20min circle 2x/week. I have also been watching my diet–esp portion sizes. I have only been doing it since Mar 5, but so far I have lost 3 lbs and 1 3/4″!! I think that is great :D !!
I am the type that wants fast results..and i am really happy with this! The fatburning workout is pretty tough (i’m out of shape!), but i keep telling myself it is good to sweat! hehe I plan on buying a really cute swimsuit this summer!

All of these posts are VERY encouraging! Wow, Jenna, 9+ inches!! I’ll keep u guys updated :) . Happy sweating!

March 18, 2007 at 7:37 pm
(158) Suzanne says:

Has anyone tried winsordiet.com?

March 21, 2007 at 7:21 am
(159) Jenn says:

I’ve used Windsor Pilates, and I enjoy the workout. I’d like to add to what Kim said about 1) being consistent and 2) being careful about diet. I am an exercise physiologist. People come to me all the time complaining that they are working out but not losing weight. If this is your plight, be encouraged. Start paying attention to your overall caloric balance (expenditure vs. intake). In order to lose weight, there has to be a deficit. In other words, you must take in fewer calories than you expend. If you are exercising more, but eating more (enough calories to compensate for what you expend during exercise), weight loss can’t happen. Also, if you are practicing Pilates but not losing weight, you may not be doing enough cardio exercise. The best exercise for weight loss is aerobic exercise because weight loss (specifically fat loss) is acheived through aerobic metabolism. The aerobic work and metabolic demands placed on the body during Pilates are small compared to cardiovascular exercises (e.g. brisk walking, running, swimming, aerobic classes etc.)
In addition to the weight management benefits, remember that exercise is a life saver(literally). Even before weightloss, exercise reduces a person’s risk for heart disease, diabetes, certain types of cancer, osteoporosis…the list goes on. Kim’s advice about being active intermittently throughout the day is also true. There is solid scientific evidence that shows that exercise bouts as short as 10 minutes can provide health benefits. In fact, some of this research showed three 10 min. bouts of exercise to be just as effective as one 30 min session.

One more thing…Darlene, you’re idea of combining cardio and Pilates to see an improvement in your abs is right. We all have a six pack (so to speak), but if the muscle group (rectus abdominus) is covered by a layer of fat, we can’t see the muscles. Combining cardio and Pilates (or other strength/flexibility exercise) will help in leaning a person out and improving muscle tone. Congratulations to all those who have had success, and stay encouraged to those of you who feel like you’re not getting anywhere. Small changes (e.g. 300 fewer calories a day, adding 10 min to your cardio session, working out one extra day a week) could help to give you the results you want.

March 21, 2007 at 2:02 pm
(160) Suzanne says:

How do you know how many calories you are burning in a day?

March 22, 2007 at 10:58 am
(161) Elma says:

I put on alot of weight from birth control because the cravings were ridiculous. I had the tapes for like two years and just two weeks ago started to reuse it. I use the accelerated body sculpting one and trust me…its the BEST ever. I dont have time to go running and I live in an apartment so I cant buy a big treadmill. I use pilates everyday for an hour..and basically Im just eating the light and fit dannon yogurts like three times a day..a healthy choice lunch..and whatever my mom cooks at home but avoiding sweets..i mean dont get me wrong Im not torturing myself..Ill eat out every weekend..fast food or whatever but keep it portioned..(instead of a big mac..eat the nuggets) its been working for me I have lost 12 lbs and 2 inches off of my waste. The BEST part is..I wanted to keep my hips and thighs and just lose upper body weight..and pilates IS THE BEST..because it doesnt make you look built..it makes you look super TONED..and tight..and thats something you cant get from running or weight training. If your bigger you dont wanna lift weights because ull just look EVEN bigger. Windsor pilates also makes your endurance and balance so much better..even in a short matter of a week. When i first started the video I couldnt do the entire stretches..reach my toes…or put my legs up to a 90 degree angle…and now..just after two weeks..Im already doing it like all of her trainers on the video lol! But yea..get this program if you really wanna see results!

March 22, 2007 at 6:20 pm
(162) Alex says:

I just had a baby 5 months ago….I weigh 165ilbs and i bought the tapes while i was preggo….I have been running and going to the gym but i have stopped since the weather here is not very good..always snowing and raining so i decided to give Winsor pilates a try…its been 4 days and i feel leaner and my muscles aching , feels great…..I want to lose 30 to 40 lbs….I will continue with this…..hopefully i see results…..just the flabby stomach after the baby is driving me nuts!!!!
Can someone tell me if there is hope???
I do watch my eating.

March 22, 2007 at 11:09 pm
(163) Ciara says:

I ordered the Windsor Pilates dvds back in 2002 but lacked the commitment to follow any exercise program. I just began doing the 20 min hips & buns workout two nights ago. Of course I will need to give it a good two week run but my energy level is already beginning to go up. I’m currently 175 and a size 14 in pants. I’m going to clean up my diet with it to speed up the results. Thank you to everyone for your motivational posts. I can’t wait to motivate someone else with mine !!!!

March 23, 2007 at 10:57 am
(164) Ellen says:

I always thought I was too busy to exercise. Not anymore!!!! I’ve finally found something I can stick with forever. I’ve been doing Windsor Pilates for five months and it’s great for strenth, endurance, flexibility, and the breathing makes you feel great. Just turning 55, I have to watch what I eat, but my muscles are toned and I can keep my weight in check. I have the elastic band DVD, the ball DVD, the 20 minute and accelerated DVDs, the buns & abs DVD, and the fat burning DVD, so I can do different ones everyday and not get bored. WINDSOR PILATES RULES!!!!!

March 23, 2007 at 12:42 pm
(165) Kristina says:

Oh my goodness yes! Winsor pilates is the most effective workout I ahve ever done! I lost 35 pounds in two and half months and have kept it off for 2 years just by continuing to do pilates everyday. I’m a size 2!!! Never have been under a 8 in my life!

March 25, 2007 at 5:01 pm
(166) Brittany says:

I met the man of my dreams about a year and a half ago. What I didnt expect were the few extra pounds that came with being so madly in love. I’ve always been skinny, never really had to work out, so it was hard for me to realize the size small shirts I used to be able to wear no longer looked so great on me. I dreaded going to the gym and running always takes a toll on my knees.
I bought the Windsor Pilates kit about 2 weeks ago, and I have never been so pleasantly surprised! I havent lost any weight, but already my jeans feel more loose, and I have gotten a few compliments at work! I’ve been doing the workouts for about an hour a day, 4-5 days a week and throwing some speed walking (30-40 mins.) in for good measure. I cant wait to see what the next few months hold…nor can I wait to go shopping for some new clothes!!!! I keep you posted….

March 25, 2007 at 8:23 pm
(167) M. says:

Hi
My mom bought the 20 minutes workout windsor pilates…i’m 14 and i started to use it today…i’m not really skinny so i want to lose weight…Can i lose weight just by using the 20 minute workouts??

March 26, 2007 at 6:10 pm
(168) cindy says:

I am on day 17 of the 20 minute workout. I do the workout everyday,plus 30 minutes of fast walking. I eat a sensible diet of no junk food,sweets of soda. I lost three pounds the first week but since then the scale has not budged,nor do my clothes fit any differently. What am I doing wrong???

March 26, 2007 at 6:15 pm
(169) cindy says:

I have used the 20 minute circle everyday plus 30 minutes of fast walking everyday for over two weeks now. I eat a sensible diet of no junk food,sweets or soda. The first week I lost 3 lbs. but the scale has not budged since,nor do my clothes fit any differently. What am I doing wrong???

March 30, 2007 at 12:22 am
(170) Lauren says:

Does anyone know which Winsor Pilates is the best? I have the circle one but haven’t tried it that much and am not sure if it is as effective as the older ones.

March 31, 2007 at 2:22 am
(171) Reah says:

The key thing that gets the results is keeping the stomach pulled in all throughout the workout. That’s the thing that makes the difference. If you don’t do that, then it’s like every other normal workout that won’t give you these results. I had a small puch in my stomach 1 and 1/2 week ago, now it’s gone. Winsor Pilates works for everyone.

April 2, 2007 at 5:08 pm
(172) claire says:

i have been using winsor for about a month… but lately i haven’t been very consistant… but i still have kept off all of the weight..i currently have lost about 5 pounds… i no if i continue using it everyday like i used to i will c more of a change.. but my body looks sooo much better… dont be frustrated with the lack of weight change.. i now have the beginnigns of abs i have lost 3 inches in my stomach and 1 inch off of each thigh… my hamsrings r really strong now… my legs have become more lean and i feel great…. i truley beleive in winsor and will continue doing it forever…

April 4, 2007 at 11:49 am
(173) Ciara says:

I started doing the buns/thigh workout on March 20th. I’ve been doing it 3 days a week. My starting weight was 175 and today’s weight is 173.6. Not much weight change but my thighs and but feel firmer. These next two weeks I’m going to see if I get better results using the 20 min circle workout. I’ve heard that it’s training the core that really get’s the fat burning going. I am so inspired by everyone’s posts. I hope that I can mimick your results. I miss my size 4….I’ll update in two more weeks. Good luck everyone

April 4, 2007 at 4:58 pm
(174) Gina says:

I have been using the Pilates DVD’s for about 3 weeks now and have lost 5lbs and am fitting into old clothes again! If you stick to the workouts and really push yourself, you will see results. I absolutely love Winsor Pilates!

April 4, 2007 at 10:42 pm
(175) Loretta says:

I was inspired by what I read here, so I started the 20 min Circle workout 4 days ago. Have managed to do it everyday and I really feel like I already have better posture – and some of the pooch going away. My arms feel stronger, too. I’m going to keep going!!

April 8, 2007 at 11:54 pm
(176) Kimberly says:

I’ve ordered the Winsor pilates from the official site on the Internet last week. I am suuuper excited to try it out when it arrives and hopefully, I’ll see some results. I’ve never done pilates before so this is my first time. And judging from everyone’s comments, it seems like Winsor’s Pilates works.
Thank you so much for your positive feedback on Winsor Pilates. It has greatly motivated me to try out the system.

April 9, 2007 at 12:23 am
(177) teresa says:

is there any specific equipment needed to do winsor pilates? such as weights?

April 10, 2007 at 11:57 am
(178) Mary says:

I tried the origional Windsor pilates
2 years ago and have never had a better
body. I was 35 years old and wore a size 8 after using the pilates workout 3-4x per week for 2 months I went down to a loose size 6 and
had an extremeley toned and fit body, It looked like I was working out at the gym for hours a day. I loaned my favorite DVD
to a friend and her daughter lost it, I have not done the workout since they do not sell the origional work-out anymore, I have looked everywhere. I am now 37 years old and wear a loose size 8 and would like to be a loose 6 again. I ordered the Pilates circle and have used it about 7x I have not noticed much of a difference, I remember with the original pilates I noticed a big difference in a week so, We will see what happens.I will be in touch to let you know.
Take care all!

April 10, 2007 at 1:55 pm
(179) Krissy says:

I absolutly love how easy Windsor Pilates is and yes it does work. I never believe anything until I try it, but trust me this system does work!! I’m a person not concerened with weight but how I look and feel, and with these work outs I always feel refreshed, toned, and taller (which at 5’2″ feeling taller is amazing). It really does give you the “dancer” body and there’s no other workout like this anywhere. I used to spend 60 minutes on the eliptical machines at my gym 5 times a week and now I spend 20 minutes 3 – 4 times a week from the comforts of my living room doing Windsor Pilates and I feel better than ever! I highly recommend this to everyone and anyone!!!

April 10, 2007 at 6:47 pm
(180) bridget says:

If you’re lloking for the original winsor pilates you might want to try ebay or craigslist.org I have 17 winsor pilates DVDs and i love the workout. I do the buns and thigh sculting every time and i alternate the other videos. I’m 35 5’2 and because of winsor pilates i can easily maintain a size 2. Winsor pilates really works.

April 11, 2007 at 1:28 pm
(181) Kara says:

wow, you guys have given me some real motivation and encouragement. I started WP about a month and a half ago, but only did it for about a week. I’m excited about starting up again, in that one week I could already feel my thigh muscles really working. I’m excited aboutg slimming down my thighs and stomach. Thanks for all the encoragement guys! :)

April 12, 2007 at 1:38 am
(182) Lauren says:

Mary, do you know what the one you used was called? And does anyone have any good results from the new one with the circle?

April 12, 2007 at 3:54 pm
(183) bridget says:

Hey Guys, I just found a website that has 21 different winsor pilates videos including a body ball video that i’ve never seen before. It’s http://www.collagevideo.com it even lets you see a sample of the video. Good luck everyone.

April 15, 2007 at 3:43 am
(184) ashley says:

I have had the tapes for about three years now. But I was in high school .. taking AP and Honors classes and never rele had the time for it. I’m one of the laziest people EVERR. I’d do it for a week or two .. quit .. start up again .. quit. But I have always seen results after about a week.

NOW .. with beach season just a couple months away .. I’m determined. My little cousin is gorgeous, she’s got the washboard abs .. thin legs .. everything .. we went to the beach a couple weeks ago .. she’s only 16 and SHE got all the looks .. compliments .. not to mention phone numbers. Something has to change. Haha.

so i started with the videos again. I just do the accelerated sculpting video every other day .. throw the 20 minute routine in there every now and then .. avoid high amounts of junk food, avoid soda, drink ALOT of water, and walk about an hour everynight.

It’s alot easier than i thought it was. It doesnt take that much time out of your day.

after about 2 weeks .. im thrilled .. for about the 20th time(haha) with my results .. my jeans already fit a bit looser .. my shirts dont cling as much to my little “pooch.” and people keep asking me what im doing.

I suppose i will check out big lots for the other dvds. i think incorporating a fat burning one in with the other two would probably help boost my results ..

if i keep my pilates up this time .. i will do like everyone else and leave updates.

(sorry for the novel) lol

April 19, 2007 at 2:13 pm
(185) Marcia says:

Wow!! You ladies have really inspired me. I saw the new WP infomercials on TV (circle) and thought I should give it a try. I’ve ordered it today and cannot wait to get it home to try it. I need to get in shape for the summer and have been exercising and eating well but not feeling the results, even though I’ve lost 10 pounds (started at 180 lbs). I will keep you posted on my progress. Hang in there ladies!!

April 24, 2007 at 1:42 am
(186) Kimberly says:

Hello again everyone!
I’ve just started my Winsor Pilates workout and it is GREAT! After the first two tries, I felt real energetic, as if I could tackle anything.
Winsor Pilates is awesome and I can’t wait to see the results!

April 24, 2007 at 6:06 pm
(187) holly says:

hello- thanks to all that have written their own personal stories! they have been extremely helpful. i took the advise and went to my local big lots to look for some of the videos, but only found the 2 dvd set including the power sculpting w/ resistance and power sculpting for abs, it also includes the resistance band. i am only on my 2nd day of using these two. does anyone have any option(s) on which video(s) works the best? i am new to winsor pilates but i need to get toned-up and loose some weight and am hopeful that the pilates combined with some cardio and a healthy diet will get me to my goal! i am thinking of possibly ordering some more and would really enjoy some input on which videos have the best results. thanks again.

April 27, 2007 at 9:01 am
(188) Leanne says:

I STARTED GETTING THE DVD’S ABOUT A YEAR AGO AND HAVE ONLY JUST STARTED THEM REGULARLY A WEEK AGO. I FEEL A BIT BETTER THAT I’M FINALLY DOING SOMETHING BUT HAVEN’T NOTICED ANY PHYSICAL CHANGES YET. MY 4 YR OLD SON LOVES IT TOO,AND DOES THE “SEAL” AND ROLL UP WITH ME, I DO RECOMMEND THESE DVD’S TO EVERYONE.GOOD LUCK.

April 28, 2007 at 6:22 am
(189) Chris says:

I have been using the Windsor Pilates DVD’s on and off for about 2 years now. I have been working out for 33 years and there is nothing like Windsor Pilates! The Bun and Thigh DVD with the resistance band is the bomb! You will notice a definite improvement in your legs and your butt will be noticeably higher in 3 weeks! For beginners I would suggest the DVD’s that do not use either the circle or the band, but once you have it down, go ahead and use either the circle or the band and you will feel stronger and look leaner. I know exercise and if you don’t have the time or money to join a gym or get a trainer, Mari Windsor is one of the best trainers on the market. Her technique really does work! Just be consistent, 3 times a week is all you need.

April 29, 2007 at 9:47 am
(190) Daria says:

Just started Winsor Pilates, and man…how I feel it!

Just a question; I have lumbar lordoses and an uneven pelvis, which all causes quite some lower back pain.

I feel that with all the rolling up and down on the back, I get very sore just above and around the tailbone. Anyone else who experiences that? Does that fade away over time, with every time you exercise, or does it mean that I cannot do these things???

If someone could answer me this, I’d be very happy!

May 4, 2007 at 3:21 am
(191) Kristen says:

I’m very lazy when it comes to working out. My daughter was born 3 months ago and I’m 2 pounds away from my pre-pregnancy weight. I LOVE Winsor Pilates. It is easy to to and fun. I actually enjoy my workout and this is coming from someone who HATES working out.

May 4, 2007 at 4:20 pm
(192) Patrice says:

I have just ordered the Winsor Pilates circle system. I had a baby 15 months ago. I am dying to go back to my pre-baby weight of 145. I gained about 65 lbs while pregnant and even after. I have tried many different things to lose weight and nothing has worked. I am praying the Windsor Pilates work – even if I do not lose weight right off I just want to see that I am toning and making progress. I have always been small and been able to eat what I want the problem for me is changing my mind set that I will have to change the way I eat as well. I have not got the program yet but I am excited to get it and get started. I will check back in with my progress.

May 6, 2007 at 9:05 am
(193) Sally says:

I ordered the circle winsor pilates yesterday.
Since the birth of my children I have became a bit flabby, especially the butt, thigh and tummy area. I have lost alot of weight (4 dress sizes) and just need to tighten myself up a bit.
After reading alll the comments on here I am eager to start and see results!
I hear it is also good for stress which is also a bonus.
I will keep you all posted on my progress when I start the program.
Good luck to everybody out there!

May 7, 2007 at 12:58 pm
(194) Lori says:

I have been trying to lose weight for a long time and I have never been able to see results or stick with a diet. I started dieting again 12 days ago and up until 5 days ago had not lost one pound. Five days ago I recieved my Pilates kit and began the vidoes. I alternate the 20 minute circle and the 50 minute fat burning DVDs. I also take walks at night, watch what I eat and drink tons of water. I have lost 6 pounds! I am so excited and have never lost 6 pounds in less than a week! I give all of the credit to Windsor Pilates Circle Work Out! I can’t waint to see what my results will be a couple of more weeks! I will keep you posted! Good Luck!!

May 8, 2007 at 2:54 pm
(195) Cassandra says:

Daria, are you doing the modified positions that they show on the videos for people with back and joint troubles? If not, you should be doing those. If you are, and they are still making you sore, you should consult your doctor before you continue!

May 8, 2007 at 3:00 pm
(196) miranda says:

i love this workout i have arthritis so all other workouts KILL my knees this is the only workout i can stick to IT WORKS!

May 12, 2007 at 3:36 pm
(197) Nicole says:

I absolutely LOVE Winsor Pilates. I do the resistance work outs, the Abs & the Buns & Thighs, with the resistance band & I can see a difference already. I lost 3 pounds the first week. I am getting married in October & need to lose 40 pounds to fit back into my Wedding dress. If you haven’t tried Winsor, trust me…it is worth the money. Also, if you don’t want to spend a lot of money, check out Ebay, they have tons of Winsor Pilates videos & even some that come with the band. That is where I got mine. So, good luck everyone! I will be sure to keep you updated on the weight loss!

May 14, 2007 at 11:10 am
(198) Betty says:

I have been using winsor pilates since a heart attak last year. Yes it works amzingly even for someone with health issues like me.

I can’t use the aerobic or keep exactly to her workout oplan but i have a 4 pack not quite a 6 pack yet and it’s all from using her pilates with a modified cardio program!

May 15, 2007 at 7:02 am
(199) Crystal says:

What’s the best Winsor Pilates DVD if I want to get back in shape and loose my extra pounds faster? Thank you!!

May 16, 2007 at 1:00 pm
(200) Gardengirl says:

I use to hurt my lower back working in the garden and now since I’ve been doing pilates, my abs are so much stronger and support my back muscles. I stand taller and my tummy is flatter which is nice! I love this work out so much cuz she doesn’t kill you will 40 reps of the same motion. She mixes it up and it doesn’t hurt or burn and yet you still get a great workout. Yahoo Marie~!

May 22, 2007 at 9:32 pm
(201) Mya says:

the accelerated body sculpting video… does it help you gain the results at the same rate of the 2o minute workout? or does the body sculpting video show results faster? thanks to anyone who can answer this for me! =]

May 23, 2007 at 7:14 am
(202) ely says:

how often do you do the winsor pilates?every day?please answer thanks

May 24, 2007 at 3:16 am
(203) rachel says:

Hey guys, Yes it does work. I’ve been doing it for awhile now and all I can say is its GREAT. If anyone really wants to see results email me at rachelernst@gmail.com and I would be gladto show you the before and after pictures!! Oh yea let me add I don’t diet or watch my calories. But then again I dont drink sodas either.

May 25, 2007 at 2:24 am
(204) Kimberly says:

Marie Winsor is THE best! Her Winsor Pilates system is, in my opinion, the greatest and easiest workout out there. I am just a beginner in the Pilates program but let me tell ya, it works! In just 3 weeks, my flabby stomach has been getting tighter and tighter. Not to mention my buns and thighs…amazing!
I know this may sound too good to be true but Winsor Pilates really does work and it really is worth the money and the wait.

May 25, 2007 at 10:07 am
(205) nikki says:

I am a mother of four small children ages 2, 3, 4, and 7. I don’t have time for a workout that’s goig to leave me exhausted and looking for sleep the rest of the day while my kids need me. The Pilates workout are exactly the opposite. I get up and get my daughter,7, ready for school, get her on the bus and do my workout. I feel enegized when I’m done and usually do 2 more before my boys wake up. The dvd I have has where you can choose one for stretches, abdominals, posture, or total body. I have always been small but since the kids I had gained a little flab. I also had back pain after my last child. No more. I am toned, energized, and I feel and look good. I am always getting compliments on how good I look to have 4 kids. Most people usually think I’m sitting until they hear one of my kids say “Mommy”!If you haven’t tried pilates……you need to. You’ll even notice that you sleep a whole lot better!

May 25, 2007 at 1:32 pm
(206) Mya says:

ely, i do winsor pilates everyday =]but u will still get great results if u do 3 times a week =D i hope this helps u out!

May 28, 2007 at 12:44 am
(207) Jason says:

Hmmm.. Glad to see no -guys- have posted >.> (or, at least, I missed their’s) So, might as well post something.

This year, during Basketball season, I cracked my kneecap and gave myself a knee effusion.. Took me out for the rest of the season. The injury took so long to heal, in fact, that I missed Track as well :/ My knee was stuck in an immobolizer for 10 weeks, and, as you can imagine, is amazingly stiff and weak. Now that school has wrapped up, and finals are over, I was looking for something to help.. (I’m not exactly the most in-shape person to begin with..)

An infomercial-holic, I saw some Winsor Pilates.. umm.. infommercials.. and thought “Ehhh, why not?” [Face it: who amongst can resist the lure of long, lean, sexy muscles, hmm?] So, on a trip to town, I stopped into Wal-Mart and found the 20min. workout in a discount bin. Umm, Huzzah? So, of course, I cracked it out and did the workout…

It felt Really good. (Not like the hell our coach put us through with 4-mile runs and whatnot for Basketball :P ) I have to admit, though, an exercise or two in there was quite challanging. I wasn’t expecting that.. but was pleasantly surprised.

So it’s the next day. I actually looked forward to doing the tape again. I also have a wonderful burn in my stomach, which makes me think things are happening.. Give me some time though to see how it all turns out though.

June 5, 2007 at 3:55 pm
(208) joanna says:

i just started to use this.. hopefully it works!!

June 5, 2007 at 4:00 pm
(209) simone says:

wow! i’ve been doing pilates for a week now and i noticed that i lost one size. i’m so happy

June 11, 2007 at 12:23 am
(210) cameron says:

First I want to say that after reading everybodies comments i am super excited! I just bought my pilates today at half price books. I am 14 and at the beginning of the school year i was an agreeable 130lbs and a sqeeze into size 4. but throughout the year i slowly but surly gained and gained. now I am pushing 146lbs and none of my clothes fit! talk about depressing!! the problem is how i think. I willnot even be hungry, but i just go and snack. not even a little snack! i will eat a pop tart(400 calories!) and then move onto a lunchables, some pizza from the previous night.i tell myself no! i don’t need it! but i just can’t help it! can someone give me some advice?

June 13, 2007 at 4:17 pm
(211) Darlene says:

To Cameron : I understand what you are saying. Most of my life I had been skinny. I am about 28 lbs overweight. I also saw the Pilates on tv and went to call and order ,BUT when I did they told me that every month thereafter it would be like 20.00 for new videos etc until I cancelled. That turned me off real quick!!! I would try it but I am not buying from them.Also you asked a question about how to stop eating junk. Ok here we go. Before you eat that stuff ask your self WHY do you want it? And wait 5 minutes before you eat it and think about it. Drink water and stop all sodas even diet soda’s.water will make you feel fuller anyway. I know it is hard. Try some of the Jello-Brand Sugar free puddings. They are delicicous but not packed with all the bad stuff. Also try some vanilla yogurt with blueberries or strawberries to eat. Let me know how the Pilates work : )

June 14, 2007 at 6:12 pm
(212) ADRIANA says:

Hi, everyone, well i have read most of all of your posts, but I am kind of skeptical about pilates. I mean, I have 2 videos (VHS), that I bought YEARS ago, and its a 20 min workout and accelerated body sculpting 57 min. I am trying to loose weight while toning as well. I have lost 20+ lbs, but need to loose inches, ultimatly thats what I want to do, I dont care about the lbs anymore really. So, I began by today: (running, walking 1 mile) then I tried the 57 min workout(accelerated sculpt), but those excercises are so heavy on me :( , I mean, I feel like my legs are realllyyyy heavy for me, and feel like I will never be able to do the excerise right. I m jsut wondering if anyone felt like that when they initially began winsor pilates?? Well, I’ll keep trying it. Although I m just wondering too if I should buy the new set thats out there, with the circle and all?? Or just use those 2 video that I have? Im wondering if there any different? Does anyone know????Email me if you do please. chica_travieza_@hotmail.com

June 14, 2007 at 11:33 pm
(213) cameron says:

To: Darlene, thank you for your advice! I will be sure to start following it. As for the pilates, I have done it for four days, and yes I have already seen results! My tummy is firmer and I have lost 4lbs.! I haven’t seen any leg results, but I think I will start running. I have done better on the not eating so much thing also. I will be sure to keep updating!

June 17, 2007 at 5:31 pm
(214) Brooke says:

i ordered WP awhile ago, and i did if for 2 weeks, i lost close to 5 pounds. Then i got sick (flu) and lost the will to start up again. I haven’t used WP in like 2 months and yet i have continued to keep off all of the weight. I am so proud of everyone here, and now that summer is here, i promise to work out at least 4 times a week and post my progress!!! good luck everyone!

June 22, 2007 at 11:08 am
(215) Lissa says:

Hey everyone…okay, i bought my WP DVD’s a year ago and by the time they came in, i wasn’t inspired anymore. After reading everyone’s comments, i will go home today and start using them!!!

June 23, 2007 at 4:34 pm
(216) brad says:

I have been doing pilates for about 3 weeks lost about 2 inches off the waist and 6 lbs down. I do an hour walk a day also. I like pilates, will continue to do it since I like it.

June 25, 2007 at 11:13 am
(217) Mya says:

ADRIANA: do you feel like you cant hold your legs up as long as the people in the video?i felt like that at frist..your body will get stronger if you do WP.. at frist its hard to do the workouts and keep up with the video but you will start getting use to it and you’ll be fine!i think its common to feel like…so dont worry and just do the best you can =}.Mya

July 1, 2007 at 3:45 pm
(218) Shari says:

I remember doing this 2 yrs ago (20 min basic only) and dropping a lot of weight pretty fast. I don’t know why i ever stopped, considering it’s just 15 mins/day, but I just started it up again yesterday. Current stats: ht 5’7″, wt 148. Will keep you posted!

July 2, 2007 at 7:10 pm
(219) Gregory says:

I started doing the Winsor Pilates Advance Slimming workout (15 min) about 6 months ago and I have never seen results this quickly. I am an addict now! I love that I feel so much stronger… but the teaser still gets me everytime! It’s really a great program for anyone who is willing to truly stick it out. For those people that are just starting and have a lot of weight to lose, DONT QUIT. It is going to be hard to hold your legs up and do the movement at first. If you practice and stay focused and committed, you’ll get stronger and ultimately shed the pounds.

July 4, 2007 at 10:29 pm
(220) catrina says:

Im 13 years old, im about 125 pounds..
i really dont know you call that overweight or not. well I look a little over average. Summer is starting and I hate looking at myself in a bikini. all my friends are tiny and i get sooooo jelouse. I want to be skinny like them too but not muscular and manly!

I bought winsor pilates today,

I am going on vacation tomorow to florida for a weeek. I am going to eat mainly healthy and do alot of pilates, I will tell you how it is going so far when i get back.

every day I am going to do an abs , a buns and thighs, and a total body sculpting video. I will keep track of my measurments and weighings. i am totally commited.

I have big thighs and stomache, my arms could use some trimming.

I am hoping that if i do this the whole summer I will look like my friends for the new school year.

I would like some pointers and I would like to know if this will actually work !! thanks ; )

July 6, 2007 at 1:24 am
(221) Lori says:

THANKS FOR ALL THE GREAT REMINDERS OF HOW WELL WP WORKS. I GOT IT 2 YRS AGO, USED IT ALL THE TIME, THEN STARTED WORKING AT NIGHT. NOW 1 YR LATER, I LOOK TERRIBLE AND FEEL EVEN WORSE. VACATION IN 15 DAYS. I’M STARTING AGAIN RIGHT NOW (12:21 AM). I WILL NOT WEAR THESE SIZE 16 SHORTS ON MY VACATION!!!
THANKS AGAIN FOR GETTING ME BACK TO IT.

July 6, 2007 at 6:56 pm
(222) Danielle says:

I’ve started using Pilates 3 weeks ago. My arms have muscles now, and my thighs are starting to lose some cellulite, but I doubt that I’ve lost an inch in dress size. Its okay though, because it wont discourage me. Im going to continue to workout. A a little difference is better than no difference at all.

July 6, 2007 at 7:15 pm
(223) lauren says:

Winsor Pilates is absolutely amazing! It is so fun, in fact, when I first tried the Accelerated Fat Burning Workout, I felt like I was having FUN – not working out!!!! The answer is: YES it works!!!

July 10, 2007 at 11:05 am
(224) help says:

all of those who have mentioned above that they’ve lost so much weight in a couple of months (i.e. 70 lbs in 3 months, etc), i was just wondering exactly what you were doing? pilates everyday and your diet? like what exactly are you eating— what is your routine? please let me know because i would really like to start losing weight at a faster rate than i am currently… thank you so much!

currently i am doing cardio for about an hour or more everyday and not eating as much and have lost about 8 lbs in the past month… but i think that starting pilates will help accelerate the loss… so just let me know so i can get started and know what to expect…

THANK YOU!

July 10, 2007 at 11:14 pm
(225) mary says:

Hey “help”, I have always been on the heavy side, and I was also doing an hour of cardio like you and then weight training on top of that. I did not lose a single pound. I started doing Winsor pilates instead because I was very discouraged (just the 20 mins). The weight has melted off of me so quickly. As far as diet goes, I am a pretty healthy eater regularly, but I think that the secret weapon is dinner. I try not to eat after 6pm, and I do my best to not eat any carbs at dinner, just protein and veggies. I haven’t reduced carbs, I just reorganized them in my day. Hope this helps.

July 14, 2007 at 12:17 pm
(226) stacey says:

WP really does work. the only problem is that people are too lazy to use it. If you do the workouts 3-5 times a week. YOU WILL SEE RESULTS. The workouts are easy and fun. But the first couple of times are weird because you do not know if you r doing it correctly. Within the first week, my “core” felt stronger and my thighs looked leaner. Here is a tip. do NOT weigh yourself so often! weigh yourself once every 2 weeks. This way, you workout more so you see a big change in 2 weeks. and it keeps you guessing! i LOVE using the sculpting ball!! i can really feel the overall workout in my body! just remember while you r doing the workouts, keep you stomach pulled in, i no it is hard at first, but it gets EASIER! at first when she would mention to pull the stomach in, i was like… no… its hard enough not rolling all over the place, but once you get used to the moves, holden your stomach in is sooo much easier! and you feel it twice as much! i love windsor and i can’t wait to look out for everyones results!!!GOOD LUCK!

July 14, 2007 at 12:43 pm
(227) catrina says:

hey, it has been a week and a half and i have done pilates about three or four times, and also i havent been eating to healthy and i was eating alot! .. that was definetly not what i was planning and i lost track from being on vacation and now i am back and i am going to stick to everything, .. anyways i gained 2 piounds but look skinnier and loss inches .. ill coment back in about a week… reply back please

July 14, 2007 at 12:46 pm
(228) catrina says:

i was also wondering if any of them will slim out my arms alot .. or even a little : ) thanks

July 17, 2007 at 12:26 am
(229) Evie says:

Ok, I just started pilates today and I start school in a month or so and I have been wanting to lose my flabby tummy. I’m not fat but I have a pudge.
I also have a big butt and It’s not Toned and It embarrases me so much that I hate walking around. Let’s hope That pilates really does work for me and tones me up. It was a little hard for me but I’m hoping it’ll get better every session. I’m very optimistic about this. I will let you guys know.

July 17, 2007 at 2:09 am
(230) Jessica says:

I started doing pilates again exactly a week ago. I set a goal of doing 40 videos in 6 weeks, so far I’ve only done 5 videos BUT I’ve already lost a total of ten inches. I stopped drinking regular soda and started drinking diet, crystal lite, and a ton of water but that’s the only thing I’ve changed.

I’ve lost:
2inches-L&R arm.
2inches-Stomach.
2inches-L&R Thighs.
4inches-L&R Calves.

Good Luck!

July 17, 2007 at 4:32 am
(231) Ready to exercise!! says:

Okay, I’ve read ALL of the responses and am ready to start again. I am a real person…(I know, some of these do sound like infomercial responses). I have tried every program there is, spent hundreds of dollars on infomercial workout products. I am about 6’0 feet tall and about 190 lbs. (maybe more, I haven’t weighed myself lately). I am recently married and have moved to a foreign country. You can imagine how impossible it is to shop here at my weight and height. I wasn’t really interested in a Pilates tapes, but about a year ago, I picked up the Advance Body Sculpting DVD in Target. (I think at that point, I was just addicted to buying tapes that I was not going to use….so sad). That is the only one I have. I know that when I do the workout, the next day, my muscles hurt!! But I haven’t noticed if it is actually working my buns and thighs (which are horribly flabby). Does anyone know? (You know, sometimes you don’t feel it, but it is working….I would like to know if anyone has used this DVD..and if it works that area). I will post back on this blog to keep you advised of my progress. I am really determined to work out faithfully after reading all of your comments (especially since I want to go to the beach and I will probably look like a whale out there next to all the skinnier people).
I was thinking too for the people who want to accelerate weight loss (and I’m just basing this on what I have read), the Leslie Sansone “Walk Away the Pounds” videos are good for those who can’t get outside, or want an easier cardio workout. I use that and it’s pretty easy, you do sweat alot though.

July 17, 2007 at 3:40 pm
(232) Penny says:

Okay, I’m a real person, I promise. I started WP on 5 days ago, and my boyfriend told me just yesterday that I look taller to him! I feel taller and more elegant as well.

I was sore after the first day, but then you get used to it and I actually look forward to the workouts because of the results.

July 17, 2007 at 3:46 pm
(233) Patrica says:

Hello!!
I was just wondeing if you should loose most of your weight first?, than use winsor pilates to tone up when u have your last 10 lbs? i have 65 lbs to loose.So should i loose 55lbs first than do winsor pilates?

July 17, 2007 at 3:51 pm
(234) patrica says:

???????????

July 17, 2007 at 5:37 pm
(235) Marie says:

I immediately became more flexible, toned, and lost weight as soon as I started using it. It’s difficult enough to where you feel like you’re getting a good workout, but easy enough to stick to. I find myself looking forward to it everyday! I have 7 of the winsor pilates workouts, so I can switch it up all the time. I find that when first learning a new exercise I don’t always do it correctly so I don’t get the maximum benefits, but after several tries I learn how to balance and breathe and then I can really concentrate on working the muscle groups that are involved. It really helps if you are focused, but don’t get discouraged if you can’t do it right away. I recommend it to anyone!

July 17, 2007 at 9:30 pm
(236) Diana says:

I am a 14 year old female, and i am rather short, 4’10”. I currently weigh 128 lbs. since im short it makes me look thicker because the fat accumalates more since it doesnt have more room to stretch out to.and extremely unsatisfied with the way i look especially in a bikini. I have Windsor Pilates and i really want to start doing them tomarrow ESP. since im starting High School in about a month(aug. 20) so i want to look slim by then. I would love to lose 20 pounds thats my goal so i would need to loose about 4 pounds each week….doing aerobics maybe before doing the pilates might work and with a healthy diet. i will keep you all informed as time goes by and hopefully ill stay commited this time because im always depressed with the way i look and i also want to do it for my health iam always tiredd and lazyy and thats not good so i will deff keep you all informed. =]

July 18, 2007 at 2:50 am
(237) kristi says:

Can someone help me out with a “schedule” to know which DVDs to watch and how often? I own:

AB SCULPTING
BUN AND THIGH SCULPTING
UPPER BODY SCULPTING
ADVANCED BODY SCULPTING
BASIC 3 DVD WORKOUT SET (BASICS-STEP BY STEP, 20 MIN WORKOUT, ACCELERATED BODY SCULPTING)

I love the abs and the bun and thigh. I would like to do them every day for the fastest results. Is that too much? I would also like to add an overall video too, but the accelerated is 55 min long and that would be too long 6 days/week. Any suggestions?
Thanks!

July 18, 2007 at 4:36 am
(238) Reay to Exercise! says:

Gregory, first of all, I want to congratulate you on your progress!!
Since you did the Advance Body Slimming (the only DVD I have), did you workout everyday or three days a week? Men do burn fat faster than women, but I want to know what your workout consisted of.

Thank you!

July 18, 2007 at 10:47 am
(239) Sophie says:

Hi everyone. I know how hard it is to diet, exercise and feel good about yourself. I have struggled with my weight since entering my 30′s seven years ago. The old metabolism isn’t what it use to be.
I ordered the dvd set over 3 years ago and off and on would use it. About 2 years ago, I did Atkins and pilates 20 minute basic five times a week. I dropped about 15 pounds in 2 months when all I was aiming for was 7. The weight just melted. But, I got lazy, went on a carb splurge and gained it all back.
This past April was my wedding. In February, I was 137 pounds. I started low carb and no eating after 6:15 p.m.. I was doing the gym 5 nights a week, 45 cardio, plus 30 mintues weight routine every other day. I got a bit toned but that was about it. A month before the wedding, I kept the gym up but started pilates 20 minute basic five times a week after the gym. However, I didn’t feel like there were dramatic results. So, two weeks before the wedding, I did only pilates 20 minute six days a week and cut out the gym. I remember way back someone saying just 14 20 minute sessions and you would see results. So, by the time the wedding rolled around, I had done it consistently 18 times. When I weighed myself the day of the wedding, I had lost 10 pounds and my jeans were very loose. At the wedding, I was lean and toned. Everyone kept asking what I had done to transform my body. Please note that my arms and shoulders were really the only things exposed and my arms were so flabby beginning this whole workout thing. I truly believe that pilates is the answer to toning and firming. I went on a binge after the wedding (will i ever learn!?) and this morning weighed myself at 137.5. I began pilates last night and low carb. I will check back in with you in two weeks to give results in terms of weight, definition and clothes fit.

I will say that I think that pilates is an amazing work out and even if we aren’t as small as we want to be, does it matter if you are toned and tight? What I mean is when I started dieting for the wedding, I was a 10 and wanted so badly to be a 6 at least. But, for the wedding I was an 8, not a six, but a toned 8. And, it was good and ok! So, maybe, give yourself a realistic goal and if you achieve it, fantastic! If you do more, then wonderful. Just remember, our size does not define us. Our health, our ability to be kind and compassionate and our ability to find joy no matter what, should define us. Not our size.

Be well everyone!

July 18, 2007 at 4:51 pm
(240) patrica says:

hello everyone!!

Still wondering if i should lose most of the weight by doing cardio and slim down when i have the last 10 pounds to go?
I doin’t want to bulk up with pilates..

Chow for now!!

July 18, 2007 at 4:53 pm
(241) catrina says:

jessica, i think what you are doing is such a good idea.. good luck by the way.

i see you lost 4 inches off of your left and right calves , HOW DID YOU DO THAT ?! mine are huge.. anything special like an extra excercise and what videos are you using to do that ?! please answer !! thank you

July 18, 2007 at 10:19 pm
(242) kristi says:

Patricia,

I think you should do the pilates in conjuction with cardio for the best results. You will NOT bulk up from doing pilates, yet increase in muscle tone, allowing you to burn more fat and increase your metabolism.

Hope that helps!
Kristi

July 19, 2007 at 1:41 pm
(243) patica says:

Kristi

Thank you for your reply. I’m going to your advise and start my pilates today!!

thanks, i will let everyone know how i’m doing every week!!

July 19, 2007 at 4:28 pm
(244) catrina says:

diana,

that sounds alot like me..im 13 and im always depresed about how my body looks.. i just want to say good luck.. i have been doing to pilates for about 3 weeks and i love the way its working .. just dont over work your self(ive dont that, it doesnt work) and stick to it.. you WILL see results : )

July 19, 2007 at 5:10 pm
(245) Holly says:

Hey Everyone!
First of all, congrats to everyone that has lost weight with this system- I’m so happy this has worked for you-I’m hoping for the same…
I’m 17 5’5 and a whopping 162 pounds. I don’t look fat,but I totally feel that way…especially around all of my 0-5 size friends.I know I need to loose weight to be healthy and happy.
I found the Windsor Pilates DVDs online at Amazon. I purchased the Power Sculpting w/ Resistance band & Sculpting for Abs.Is this good to begin with?Am I REALLY going to see results?
I work out at gym and I do pilates on a machine about 3 times a week, plus I have a Bowflex machine so I can tone whatever else is needed.I’m also doing Quick Weight Loss to keep a balanced diet.
Any feed back would be great!Thank you and good luck to everyone!!
Holli

July 20, 2007 at 8:50 am
(246) Alisa says:

Hey everyone,

I’ve started doing winsor pilates a couple of weeks ago, and I absolutely love it! The best thing about it is that you feel the change day in day out. I haven’t measured any inches or anything like that, but I feel the muscles being formed, I feel that my posture is better, and everything feels tighter. I also like noticing every day the progress I make in the workout. I’m also becoming more flexible because of all the stretching during the workout. And finally, I like the breathing technique, it is relaxing if I use it also during other times of the day.

My routine is doing the accelerated sculpting dvd three times a week, and the 20 minutes workout the other days. I haven’t changed my diet, but I eat healthy: slow food, fruit in between and lot’s of water.
I read above that some of you are trying to diet, the ones with low carbs: be ware, because it’s been scientifically proven that those kind of diets lead to binging. It’s not your weakness that leads to the binging after a few weeks, it’s your body protesting. Just keep it balanced, cook every day, use fresh ingredients and enjoy your meals, and that should be enough.

good luck everybody, and thanks for your comments, they are very motivating.

July 20, 2007 at 4:01 pm
(247) Sophie says:

Hi Alisa! Thanks so much for sharing your story and the thoughts of low carb dieting. I have had success before but I do believe this time around that my body just doesn’t want it again. I do not eat meat or dairy so I am very limited on Atkins. I love fruit and obvioiusly, low carb teaches us to beware of fruit. Fruit to me is the best food because it is so good for us.

I have been doing my 20 minutes pilates every day and do already see a difference in the feel of my muscles, so I know this is something fantastic. I just realize that if I want to eat fruit, I need to add the 1 hour cardio every day since I will be eating the sugar.

By the way, if any of you want to read a really fantastic book, go to Amazon and order Skinny Bitch. It is a wonderful book on diet, exercise, what is in our food that is bad for us, etc. It is written like you are sitting down with your girlfriends and it is fabulous! Just wanted to share the joy of it and remind us all that knowledge is power, so go buy it and check out what it teaches you about labels on food and what THEY don’t tell us we are putting in our bodies.

Good luck to everyone on the pilates and I will check in next week to see how everyone is.

Be well!

July 21, 2007 at 4:49 am
(248) tonya says:

Can you lose 60 pounds with out bulking up? i’m in my early 30ies and would love to get down to a size 7-8 again!! has anyone conquer this feat with winsor pilates and exercise?

i would like to hear about any success stories,

thank’s for listening, good luck!!

July 22, 2007 at 1:29 pm
(249) jessica says:

i just tried the 20 min. workout today EXCELLENT:) im going to the store to find more noww!! i feel taller and i feel i have a better posture…love!

July 23, 2007 at 3:05 pm
(250) Sophie says:

Hi Tonya. I am no expert but I do work with a man who is fit as can be, much older and got that way through a personal trainer who is a former Mr. Olympia. These are the keys he shared with me which when I was following them, worked very well indeed.

Drink lots of water. At least 64 oz a day. That fat you will be burning needs to go somewhere so flush it out. Also, cardio burns calories but strength training LIKE PILATES and weights burns fat. I was complaining to him that I spend 35 minutes on the treadmill at a 3 incline running at 4.5 and not only felt like I was dying but saw little difference in my body. He said this is a huge misconception that people have that they need to lose their breath and sweat like crazy in order to burn fat. Not so. He said the first 20 minutes of exercise is burning carbs, not calories and not fat. So, he said, do 20 minutes cardio at a nice pace, like 3.5 on the tread mill with an incline or not. Then do 30 minutes of weights then finish up with 40 more minutes of cardio. When I switched to this method AND combined it with 20 minutes of pilates 6 days a week, I lost massive inches. Massive. I did not see change until I took his advice, stuck to low carb (simple carbs I did away with that is) and drank water. I did cardio 5 to 6 times a week, at least 45 minutes if not an hour, weight workout 3 – 4 times a week, and pilates 6 times a week and I went from a almost 12 to an 8 in 2 months.

Just remember, read labels on food. Cut meat out if you can. It is so bad for you. If you can’t, then do free range. Do organic veggies and fruits. Get the book Skinny Bitch and read it. It will teach you so much. Go to Dailyplate.com and keep track of what you eat and exercise every day as well as following the caloric guideline it gives you. Take charge of your body! It will love you for it.

Good luck!

July 24, 2007 at 3:13 am
(251) tonya says:

Sophie

Thank you for your reply, it is very much appreciated. I will defentialy take your advise.

Thank you soooo much

July 24, 2007 at 7:51 pm
(252) liz says:

Hi, reading the post people have left I’m really motivated to do the workout. I ordered a set and cant wait to start! I’m 5’3 130 pounds and i have always been skinny but over the past 3 years i gained some weight. It’s hard to cope with it because it changed drastically. I hope to lose 15-10 pounds. i just wish i could see fast results!!! i have tried running, aerobics and watch what i eat. what can i do to get better results?

July 24, 2007 at 11:35 pm
(253) alex says:

hi. i work out hard core at least five days a week. on days i do weights i do at least 30 mins cardio with abs and 60 mins of weights and on off days i do 60 mins cardio with a TON of abs. i am toned and in good shape and everybody tells me i like good. i dont see the same. i still have some pudge on my stomach and love handles (that i guess only i can see). i eat very healthy and want the perfect body (like jessica biel for example). will windsor pilates work those targed areas?

July 25, 2007 at 10:04 am
(254) Sophie says:

Alex, pilates is the way to go if you want to target your stomach and love handle area. Plus, it will tone all the other muscles as well. Just be sure to really practice the movement as she shows you and the breathing is key. Very important.
Liz, you do not have much to lose at all if you are 130 and 5’3. That makes you what size, an 8? Just add pilates to your cardio and eat healthy and I think you will get to where you want to be. Celebrate your body because you are a good size for your height and certainly not considered overweight. But, if a six is what you want, then do the cardio, pilates, weights which burn more fat than cardio and go from there. Read my entry above to Tonya and follow that guide. It worked wonders for me and I am your height as well.

The bottom line is pilates is a great exercise for lengthening the muscles and toning. It will help you create longer, leaner muscle which will make your clothes fit better and your body feel better too.

Good luck!

July 25, 2007 at 5:52 pm
(255) zemog says:

I have a set of windsor pilates dvd’s that I never used until one day when my back was really sore and I tried to do some of the stretches and my back felt so much better immediately. I am now doing pilates 6 days a week because I love it! I started to notice a difference right away and I have also noticed that I have better posture now. I love that it only takes 20 minutes a day, I don’t get sweaty, and I feel so refreshed after I finish my workout. Pilates is a great workout for people who don’t like to workout or have not worked out in a long time!

July 26, 2007 at 2:12 am
(256) Rosiella says:

Hi,
I need to lose about 45 pounds to get back to my normal size.
If anybody could please help me with my confusion I’d so much appreciate it.
I am confused to what you are all referring to as the circle workout and the 20 minute workout??

I have the:
fat burning workout (aerobics)
bun & thigh workout
thigh workout.
Maximum burn 20 minute series
Maximum burn advanced series
and 20 minute workout.

Please help me if you can to see which ones to do. Can I alternate between them? And which one above is the 20 minute workout you are all referring to?

Thanks so very much in advance. I am desperate to lose weight and your response will be so helpful!!

Regards, Rosiella

July 26, 2007 at 2:14 am
(257) Rosiella says:

Sorry I wrote the word “thigh” twice. I meant one of them to be the “abs” series.

July 26, 2007 at 3:01 pm
(258) Renelle says:

Pilates is the best thing that ever happened to me. I’ve lost over 100 Pounds and it’s been three years now. I’ve never been in shape and i’m blown away of how well pilates is easy and it does work…. Believe me it does.

July 26, 2007 at 9:06 pm
(259) patticake says:

Hello everyone;

I am 54 years young and walk 25 minutes twice daily to and from work. I have just ordered Winsor Pilates and look forward to letting the more “mature” women here know how it goes. I am a retired chef and do not have a weight “problem” but find that now I do not have the heavy kitchen work lifting, plus the huge kitchen stress, I am getting flabby in the arms and look about five months pregnant instead of the size 4 jeans I wore two summers past, and yes I did wear a bikini that year too!

I HATE the stomach – plus I am large-breasted which always encouraged bad posture and round-shoulders because I don’t want to look as if “the girls” are STUCK OUT THERE! (Advice to young large-breasted women – NEVER take off your bra unless someone takes it off for you – you need the support 24/7 and trust me – I won a wet t-shirt contest just last year at 53 yrs. old!)

Will report back on the progress. When I was not lazy I used to do 100 sit-ups every night, not all at once but 20 in one commercial, 20 in the next etc. I lack inspiration but live in a city of extremely beautiful and fit young women which is shaming me into… making the effort – feeling better! Good luck older gals!

July 29, 2007 at 3:07 am
(260) Carrie says:

If you order, watch out that you aren’t signed up to get DVDs every month if you don’t want them. They’ll automatically send them to you and charge you for them. Apparently you can only do a one-time order by phone and not by the internet.

July 30, 2007 at 3:53 am
(261) jessicaaa says:

what happened to chaos!?!?! did they end up losing any weight?!!?!?!

July 30, 2007 at 10:23 pm
(262) Rika Fleming says:

I bought a windsor pilates exercise ring and tape from a TV ad. a few months later I received an unsolicited pair of videos and my credit card was automatically charged 46.85. I called in to their customer service number and was told that I had been enrolled in a club and would automatically be receiving more tapes and billings. I know I wasn’t informed of this on the phone. the system is a good one, they don’t need to bilk people out of more money. I am disgusted with their business practices.

July 31, 2007 at 1:18 am
(263) Heather says:

I used Pilates for Weightloss about a year ago and lost 3 inches off my waist. Then I got depressed and just didn’t care anymore, now i’m 23 yrs old 5 6 and I weigh 230. I started my pilates for weightloss a week ago and I love doing it. Its not only refreshing but relaxing! My lil cuzin which is 11 told me today that my legs looked smaller as well as my face and neck. I will repost in about a month, Wp is def. worth buying!!! Goodluck to everyone. Email me at Drinkerdown21@aol.com if anyone would like to share your success stories…so you know i’m real lol

July 31, 2007 at 5:09 pm
(264) chelsea says:

I looked at their website and I see that they have the circle routine. What I don’t understand is when you click to order it, it says that you will be billed $19.99 + S&H for each program that is sent every 2 weeks. How many programs are there that come with the circle routine? because I don’t want to have to pay for something that I don’t want.

August 2, 2007 at 2:21 pm
(265) Julie says:

I tried this pilates program and got a bit bored with it. I then switched to Moira Stott pilates and love her methods better and have seen better results!

August 3, 2007 at 6:52 am
(266) Ready to exercise!! says:

Okay, so I’m back after some time and I have to say…Pilates really does work. I have also added Leslie Sansone’s walk away the pounds (I do the 30 and 45 minutes). I do the Winsor Pilates every other day, but I have been trying to add the Walking Tape and Pilates…It’s too much for me to do the whole thing, so I stop after the scissor kicks (on the Advance Slimming workout)…I have to admit, I am slimming down and my stomach has more definition, I can see a six pack in the making…my glutes have slimmed down tremendously and no longer do I wear a girdle. I say, do what you can, drink lots of water, eat right and you will see results immediately. I think that I will look great on the beach this August!!!

August 3, 2007 at 6:00 pm
(267) PLEASE HELP! says:

i have winsor pilates for about a month now, i love it and the inches have just melted away..

but now my bulkiness has gone away and i look leaner, but i have all of this extra fat everywhere.. and i know people who have very little fat and there bodies and hard not jiggly like mine.

so i have a new plan… im going to eat only salade and an activia yogurt for breakfast (to flush everything out)
and i am going to drink only water. i am going to do a fat burning winsor pilates and a thigh sculpting winsor pilates. i am going to do extra excersizes like swimming for the arms and a little walking for the calves.

all for one month

does this sound like it will take all the extra fat off my body.. PLEASE RESPOND/WRITE BACK ASAP : )

August 4, 2007 at 7:17 am
(268) Sarah says:

I have my set on the way -looking forward to it. However, after reading the posts here about being signed up automatically for extra dvds, i phoned them up and gave them a bit of a talking to. I was told i was ‘automatically’ signed up to recieve 2 dvds every 60 days. I made it very clear that it is NEVER ok for guthy renker to take money out of my credit card without consulting me first. I advise you to do the same.

August 4, 2007 at 4:00 pm
(269) Eve says:

I don’t know about this Pilates, but I have the Zone Pilates and I love it!!! it does work.after all what do you have to loose?

August 5, 2007 at 9:13 pm
(270) Tiffany says:

Please Help!! Don’t be so drastic!!! This is something that you can not possibly keep up with. Eat well to be healthy. Do your regular routine. If you do something crazy for a month and then stop, you will put weight back on. Make this a normal part of your life.

Tiffany

August 6, 2007 at 2:55 pm
(271) PLEASE HELP!! says:

thank you tiffany, i will do what you said, but do you have any good tips on how to reduce my body fat, (alot) ?!

if anyone at all could give me some : ) !!!

August 6, 2007 at 3:03 pm
(272) PLEASE HELP!! says:

ALSO: TIFFANY IS THIS A GOOD STEADY PLAN LIKE YOU WERE TALKING ABOUT?!?!?

NORMAL DIET PLAN:

EAT:

breakfast: yogurt for breakfast
lunch: something small like a popsicle
dinner: a small portion of whatever healthy were having for dinner

EXCERSIZE:

pilates: abs and thighs / fat burning disk

extra excersizes: side bends on chair, swimming, arm circles, running on treadmill for 3-5
minutes a day, stretching out calves, ect ect.

August 6, 2007 at 3:55 pm
(273) PLEASE HELP!! says:

wow, sorry i didnt mean popsicle i was just thinking about popsicles to go eat one ; P , i ment something small like a salade .. SORRY wasnt thinking : )

August 6, 2007 at 3:57 pm
(274) loulou says:

ANSWERS PLEASE:

hey i just bought winsor pilates accelerated fat burning dvd, and i was wondering if it will burn fat and make my calves and arms leaner and skinnier?

thanks if you answer..

August 6, 2007 at 4:34 pm
(275) Jana says:

YES YES YES!! It works. After a knee surgery, I had ballooned to 190 pounds. With the help of Winsor Pilates I have lost and kept off 50 pounds over the past 2-3 years. I lost 10 pounds within the first month of using it.
YES! YES! YES!

August 8, 2007 at 3:10 am
(276) Karelle says:

Being a college student and the stress that comes with it drove me to gain about 40 lbs.
I started receiving the DVDs about a year ago…but laziness got the best of me and avoided them, until yesterday, i decided to give them a try. I have been using them for 2 days and can already feel a lot more energy. I absolutely love the accelerated fat burn, its so fun!
Will keep you posted on my results!

August 8, 2007 at 8:05 am
(277) Jelena says:

Hey everyone!

I started with the program last year around march and by december (and doing 20 min. every day) I was looking better than ever, and feeling fabulous. I sort of let it go for a while there, but for the last month I’ve been doing the exercises again and they are as fantastic as I remember. But it helps to see all the great messages here, and to know there are people out there going through the same thing as me. Thanks for being so great and keep up the good work.

August 9, 2007 at 1:52 am
(278) kristi says:

I am still hoping someone will answer my previous question on post #237. I also noticed that Rosielle had a similar question on post #256. It would be greatly appreciated if everyone could share how many minutes they work out per day, how many days a week and which videos. So if you are reading this – Please Respond!
Thanks!

August 9, 2007 at 11:35 pm
(279) Ashley says:

Windsor Pilates is Great! I alternate between the Accelerated workout and the workout with the band. I do pilates and run every day. Running is great but I have been a runner since I was 13 years old and it’s doing more bad than good. Windsor Pilates helps to keep me flexible and keeps any discomfort caused by running at bay. I highly reccomend the Windsor Pilates.

August 10, 2007 at 9:57 am
(280) Lexi says:

ok i just got the winsor pilates…and im wondering what one is better for me to lose weight faster….nothing has worked for me but diet im sure will also help.
i have:
Ab sculpting
bun and thing sculpting
max burn basics and fat burning
and also body sculpting
so are these good ones to do??? just someone please help me in which one is better for me. i want to lose 20lbs in about a month…
thank you for anyone that can help me and guide me to doing it faster…:)

August 10, 2007 at 3:51 pm
(281) Katherine says:

Just got the DVDs. I did the 20-minute circle workout plus the 10-minute sculpting session, but I hardly broke a sweat. This seemed really easy. I mean, on some of the exercises she only does 3 reps. Most others are 8-10. How can people possibly be losing weight with this????

August 11, 2007 at 12:10 am
(282) Jacquie says:

So I’ve bought pilates a while back and have not really been using it consistently for more than a week and I have recently just got a new job that has left me with little time to be motivated to use it. BUT I finally have my motivation back and plan to start pilates tonight and will post up the results in 2 weeks time!

August 13, 2007 at 1:46 am
(283) Jenny says:

Hi, I’m 17 and am currently at the weight of 133.5Ib at the height of 5″3. =(
I’m short for my age, so I think a thin body would really improve my look.

This summer I had set a goal to lose 20-30 Ib before school started again, to change my whole image, becaue I’m the heaviest in my group of friends…
But so far, I had only lost 10 Ib during the first month of summer and regained 3.5 Ibs.

I just bought the Winsor Pilatesģ Sculpting Circle. I wouldn’t be getting it in another 2-3 weeks, and by then school would have started and my work load added on.
Hearing so many comments say it works, and 2/3 believing it will myself, I wander if there is anything I should know about how often I need to excersize and what to expect in a period of time.
For example, will I see results around my waist and thies in 2 weeks?

But I’m very glad to hear so many people confirm how well this progrem works. It really gives me the motivation I need to stick to this workout, unlike most of my other unsuccessful excersize plans…^^;

August 13, 2007 at 3:50 am
(284) Karen says:

I have had the winsor 20 minute workout for several years, but it didn’t hold my interest for very long. I recently bought the Beginner Pilates by Ana Caban and it is very good. I can tell a difference in how my clothes feel. I’m not trying to lose weight, just firm things up a bit. I lost all the weight I was trying to lose with Weight Watchers (42 pounds)

August 13, 2007 at 9:54 pm
(285) Crystal says:

Hi everyone,

I got winsor pilates circle routine last week and i really am amazed. I have used it 5times and i am aleady walking taller and more flexible. I didnt think such a easy, relaxing exercise routine could do anything but it really does work.

Its so great to actually get something off the tv that actually comes through with its promises. I have had 3knee operations so cant do alot of impact exercise but this makes me feel great and wanting more.

You have to try it, its the best thing i have ever bought.

Good luck everyone :-)

August 14, 2007 at 8:59 am
(286) lexi says:

can someone answer post 70?????
im leaving for college and want to know whats the fastest way to lose….with the dvds i have. :)
thanks.

August 15, 2007 at 10:46 am
(287) cathie says:

dear jenny, i think i can help you to lose weight. just follow this…

i need you to look up the diet , the sacred heart diet. A page should come up of what to do. you may be thinking oh that wont work! but YES IT WILL ,i think the same thing , it will make you lose about 5-10 pounds in the first three days , and 15-17 pounds in one week.

if you get tired of that diet or you just CANT follow it , then this is what i did,

just eat plain old fruits and vegetables and drink water, all day everyday , (with butter on veggies if wanted) , i lose about 4-5 pounds every two days .. it may work different for you ..

i suggest do your sculpting circle as much as you cann!!!! and you will start to see big results in your thighs, abs, waist, and hips!!

comment bak if you have anymore questions:)

August 15, 2007 at 12:35 pm
(288) Mia says:

The sacred heart diet is a fad diet. I understand we all want to look our best but the problem with this diet is it is a quick fix. YOu will lose mostly water weight just like on Atkins. The minute you start eating a bit more carb, protein, etc, you will put the weight on again. This fad diet is not the answer. Like Dr. Peeke says, ‘you have to move the weight to remove the weight’. I don’t know about you girls, but I want to lose weight and in two years still have it off because I have learned to exercise on a daily basis but that I have learned to eat right. Fad diets are destructive. Why do you think you hear tons of people who did Atkins or South Beach and gained all the weight back?
Good book to buy is Dr. Peeke where she will instruct you on how a WOMAN’S body reacts to life. Her diet and exercise plan is geared towards the woman’s system and lifestyle. It will teach you how to eat in moderation yet never feel hungry and it will motivate you to get off your butt and stop looking for an easy way out.

You can do it, just love yourself enough to finally do it right!

August 15, 2007 at 5:15 pm
(289) Debbie says:

I have used Windsor Pilates for a couple of years now. I get lazy and quit and can feel the difference. I love it and it does work if you work it.

August 15, 2007 at 7:10 pm
(290) Karen says:

I agree with Mia. You have to eat a healthy diet. Your body needs protein and some carbs. Also needs calcium. Eating a too restrictive diet causes you to lose both muscle and bone density leading to osteoporosis. You want to lose weight, but fat, not muscle or bone.

August 15, 2007 at 11:09 pm
(291) Jenny says:

Thank you Cathie. I wasn’t expecting an answer this soon, so thanks. ^-^

Thanks for the diet suggestions, but threw this summer I have tried similar diets like that. It’s called, apple/milk twice a week. It’s a diet where during a week, you eat only apple and nothing else one day, and milk and nothing else the next day.
It’s effective, but very, very hard! I find myself able to do it in the morning, but once it reachs 7 pm, I will start to get very hungry and often can’t control my urge to monch on something. >.>’

And thank you Mia. I understand your point. I’m currently listening to Dr. Phil McGraw’s audio book on weight lose. He talks about these points too.
I understand excersize is the key to weight lose, but I think persistence is more of a problem for me.
I often have false expectations, and will lose intrest in diets or excersizes when I don’t see the result I thought I can get from them. (I’m slowly breaking threw this habit, so don’t worry)
That’s why I wander how soon, and what kind of expectation i should set for this progrem.
But no matter what, I will still stick to the excersizes. I’m very motivated to present the best of myself to everyone. ^-^

August 15, 2007 at 11:22 pm
(292) Jenny says:

Hi Lexi,

I believe your question was answered by others last year. But just to recap.
If it’s time that you are worried about, the best workout to do is the 20 min routine.

And maybe once a week, do a intence workout from the other DVDs. Namely:
Ab sculpting
Bun and thing sculpting
Max burn basics and Fat burning
and also Body sculpting(I believe this one lasts up to an hour, and might be the best to do once a week.)

As far as weither it will work, I would like to believe so. But since its muscle toning you want, I’m sure it will work more quickly for you than for someone who wants to lose a bit of fat first.

Good luck! =3

August 15, 2007 at 11:32 pm
(293) Jenny says:

Lexi,
And here is something more to answer you question.

http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tMIpXYIL8yc

August 16, 2007 at 11:26 am
(294) Mia says:

Congrats Jenny on a great mindset! You are on the way to really doing right by yourself. Know that I will be cheering you on! I want us all to be healthy and fit for ourselves and not for some lame reason like society telling us a size 10 or above is fat. If you are a size 14 or up but firm, fit and healthy, who is to say that it isn’t beautiful?
Also, keep in mind that ‘delay of gratification’. When we start a new diet or exercise plan, we want results quick and with little effort. But, when you truly get smart and exercise daily and eat healthy daily, your body will change and start shedding fat, but it won’t be quick like a fad diet. It will be slow and steady but TRUE fat loss. Be willing to delay gratification as your body adjust to being starved through fad diets and suddenly eating healthy. It may even freak out and gain a bit while you start exercising and eating healthy, DO NOT GIVE UP. I have been doing this method for 3 weeks now. The weight has not fallen yet but I am more toned and I look more solid as opposed to flabby. It is slow progress but it is okay because this time FINALLY I love myself enough to not cheat myself but rather celebrate myself. Once you love your body as is and the mind follows, the fat will shed. So, all take a breath, read on nutrition for women like Dr. Pamela Peeke and the Skinny Bitch book and educate yourselves. It will not only change your outside but change your inside and THAT LADIES IS THE KEY. I know it is hard but remember,I am cheering for each and everyone of you! Be well and BE HAPPY.

August 25, 2007 at 2:08 pm
(295) Emily says:

I am 26 years old.
I was just wondering,
I bought the first(I think) Windsor Pilates dvd set. I like it, but to be honest I haven’t used it enough to get any sort of possible results. The dvd got a scratch on it pretty much right away and skips through about 5 minutes of the workout. I am thinking of buying the new “circle” enhanced one. But really want a workout that incorporates arms, as well. Does anyone know if the new one shapes arms too? I don’t think the old one I have does ANYTHING for flabby upper arms.
Good luck ladies!

August 25, 2007 at 10:50 pm
(296) Jenny says:

Thanks, Mia. It really means a lot to know that even though I don’t know any of you, everyone is so willing to believe in me. It’s quiet the motivation I need.

Emily,
I just recieve my Winsor Circle today. I was really excited, and watched the introl for the DVD, and did the excersizes.
It does tone your arms too!(I have yet to see results, of course. But you do feel your muscles workingout.)
If you buy the set from her site, it’s only $16.96 with tax.
The set of things you recieve are:
A Winsor Circle
A Scolpting plan with food plan included
A DVD with bonus features such as a 10 minute blast, a 50 minutes fat burning excersize, and a 20 minute workout.
You will get more information when you go to her site.

August 26, 2007 at 1:50 pm
(297) Jessica says:

I have just recently ordered the winsor pilates set. I can’t wait to get it, but I was wondering if it really thins the thigh muscles, because I have bulky muscles and I am hoping this will help to get rid of the bulk. Can anyone tell me if it will?

August 27, 2007 at 9:48 pm
(298) Monica says:

Hi
I’m 14 years old.And my mom allowed me to buy the Winsor Pilates circles series. She gave me her card so I can go on internet to buy it on the website. But after ordering it, i saw this in small letters:

WDTCA – Winsor Pilates Basic Sculpting Circle Series on DVD – only $9.95 plus $6.95 S&H. By ordering now youíll enjoy the hassle-free convenience of receiving 2 new Winsor programs about every other month, your credit card will be billed $19.95 for each program (plus $6.95 S&H) for each shipment. If you wish to order this product by telephone, call…
1 800 395-6384

Does that mean they’ll send me programs every months and take off money from my mom’s credit card? Because my mom doesn’t know about that and She will be mad if that happens. What should i do so they don’t send me those programs?? I’ve sended an e-mail to Guthy-Renker but I don’t know if that will work… Can someone help me??

August 27, 2007 at 9:48 pm
(299) Emily says:

Hey Jenny,
Thank you for that message. Unfortunately I couldn’t wait any longer and I went on Ebay and bought it for 41.00(shipping and all you said in above message). I cannot wait to try it out. I am excited to work out ALL my body. I think we will get good results IF WE KEEP at it. I don’t have weight to lose really (maybe 5 lbs if I really wanted to.) I just want to tone up. Im too young to start being flabby. Hasn’t happened yet, but I see potential ;) . Anyway, I will write again after I try it out. Happy exercising! (If thats possible ;) )

August 29, 2007 at 8:51 am
(300) Elly says:

It works only if you have the courage to hold on

August 29, 2007 at 1:53 pm
(301) Oana says:

i just got winsor pilates and i wanted to see what others say about it.. and the truth is that 90% of the persons who tried it and left their opinion here are satisfied.. i have to try it too but if i stop after a while, will the belly return?:-?.. i`ll just have to wait and see..:P

August 29, 2007 at 4:17 pm
(302) Ali Ramos says:

OMG! I’ve been using it for two weeks and i’ve already lost TEN lbs! I’m going to look great for my wedding! Thanks Winsor Pilates!

August 29, 2007 at 10:18 pm
(303) Jenny says:

Hi Monica,
haha, that had me worried at first too, and I called them to make sure that’s not how it’s going to work…my mom would kill if it did work that way…^^;
But don’t worry, that’s not how it works.
This membership is only if you want it, and remember that you can cancel at anytime. So just ask your mom to call them asap and cancel the membership. (I need to do that too.)

Emily,
are you sure it cost 41 dollars for just the things I said above? O.o
haha, that sounds like a ripe off. But no mutter. I believe it will work as long as we keep on doing it.
I have been working out with Winsor Pilates for the past 5 days. I don’t know if I lost any weight, no scale, and I don’t see the result just yet. But I will keep it going.

Oana,
working out is essential, so I don’t think you should stop. Besides, if you are anything like me, who really want to slim down, then you probably wouldn’t quit so easily.
You have to remember, Winsor Pilates isn’t something magical that if you use it once you don’t have to workout ever again. (Sarcasm)

Ali Ramos,
That’s amazing!
What else did you do other than using Winsor Pilates??
And what type of her workout did you use??
How often??

August 30, 2007 at 12:39 pm
(304) Liz says:

I bought winsor pilates awhile ago and i started to use them but then got lazy and stopped. I’m about 5’2 and i USED to weigh about 115-120 lbs. I now weigh 150 lbs. College and its stresses have helped me to pack on the pounds and now none of my clothes fit and i am fed up with my body. So i have now started a new routine of eating 3 meals a day and two snacks, never surpassing more than 1500 calories a day and i drink only water and milk. i also hit the gym Mon-Fri with 30 mins of cardio followed by weights. i alternate upper and lower body weights every other day and i do 3 reps of 15 on 6 different machines. I then do about 15 – 20 minutes of ab work and lunges. I also am starting to incorporate the abs pilates and buns/thighs pilates every mon, wed, and fri. can anyone PLEASE tell me if this is a solid workout? Will this help me shed pounds and inches? If anyone has ANY suggestions or changes i should make please let me know =)
Good luck to everyone else working hard out there. don’t give up!
-Liz

August 30, 2007 at 6:59 pm
(305) Me in AZ says:

I just ordered the Pilates pkg. I am very over weight 295lbs. I want to know if there are any women or men that are using pilates and if it is actually working for them. Please let me know. Thanks!!

August 31, 2007 at 4:42 am
(306) Fiona says:

I recently gave birth to my beautiful daughter, Indiana, and am desperate to shed some kg’s… As well as running and boxing with my husband i started using windsor pilates dvds a friend gave me. Its a bit early to tell but i do love the way i feel after the 20 mins and its so easy to follow. Hope it works….

August 31, 2007 at 11:25 pm
(307) Chris says:

I had my daughter almost 12 years ago. I was 148 (I’m 5″9) before I got pregnant. After my daughter was born I found out I had a Thyroid problem and was put on meds. My weight was about 175, months after I delivered her. I tried many things, I was at the gym 3 to 4 days a week. Doing cardio and lifting weights (I HATED IT!!! I felt tired after, How people enjoy it is beyond me!!). No real help!! My weight really went up and down between 155 to 170. Even with working out, what was the point. I weighted 160 when I got pregnant for my son 3 years ago. I was tired of struggling with my weight, and bought Windsor Pilates, I followed the win in 10 meal plan for 10 days, and did a pilates workout 3 to 4 days a week. I measured my self and in 6 months time I lost 28 3/4 inches from my thighs, calves, stomach and arms. After 6 months I weighed 140 pounds!!! It was amazing. I actually like doing them!! I felt better than ever and was more toned and more flexible than ever. I have been lazy for about the last year and quite doing pilates, though my weight stayed fairly consistent I am flabbier than I was before and not as flexible. I am back at doing pilates and LOVING it!! My whole body feels better when I am doing pilates!!

August 31, 2007 at 11:30 pm
(308) Monica says:

Hi Jenny,
2 days after i’ve sended a e-mial to Guthy-Renker they reply saying that they canceled my account. So I though that my order was gone and i had to order again. So i told my mom my account was canceled so I decided to call instead to reorder and tell them. It turned out that they didn’t cancel my account they just cancel for the new programs every 2 months and taking off 19.95$ from the credit card!lol I can’t wait to get it! But it takes 2-3 weeks…it’s very long but I think it’s worth to wait! =)

September 1, 2007 at 1:44 am
(309) Kathe says:

I bought Winsor Pilates in 2004 about a year after my 2nd child was born. I only did it a couple of times when I found out I was pregnant for the 3rd time. Now 2 and a half years later, I’m finally working out at a gym doing cardio and strength training. I’ve just dug out my WP again. I tried the basic workout tonight, but really noticed that my big, poochy baby gut was in the way. How do you deal with this? Also, I some of the moves like the Roll Up seem nearly impossible. How long would you say it takes to master some of these moves? For those who have experienced major weight loss and inch reduction, how did you find the progress? Did you start with the modifiers shown? How long until you progressed to the more advanced moves? Thanks!!!

September 1, 2007 at 1:37 pm
(310) sarah says:

I’m 17 years old and i weigh about 210 and im about 5 2 im pretty lazy but i do walk everyday i have been wanting to lose weight for so long i recenly got the courage to tell a guy that i liked him and he refused becuz im fat im going to try this pilates thing and ill post back with my results just like everyone else i hope it dose so i can get my guy XD

September 2, 2007 at 8:32 pm
(311) M. says:

Hi.
Im a really person too. A lot of time i don’t feel like working out so I what i do is i write how it felt good after that so the next day, i read and I do it to motivate myself.

September 3, 2007 at 1:51 am
(312) Jenny says:

Hi sarah,
I’m 17 too. I’m 5’3 and weight 129Ib now! ^_^
I had been working out with the winsor circle for the past week. IT REALLY WORKS!!
I had my doubts about how well this worked, but my mom’s been telling me how well I look now. Don’t get the wrong idea. It doesn’t give you quick results. But it have really made my legs firmer and thinner, and my abs firmer, too. But the muscle hasn’t build yet, because there are still a few Ibs of fat around them…
Anyways. Keep doing it everyday, and trust me, you plan your day well school work shouldn’t be a problem. ^_^
Good Luck!

Monica,
don’t worry, it will come. ^_^ Depending on where you live. It might even come in sooner than 2 weeks.
I got it exactly 2 weeks later.
And good news. It really works.
As I have told Sarah, I really do notice results. And not the fast result other product promise and you never see.
It will come slowly, I suppose. But it really works. =3

September 3, 2007 at 5:24 pm
(313) Monica says:

Hi Jenny,
I live in Canada so it might take more time to come but i’m willing to wait! lol =) But I saw on TV that you can lose an inch after 10 days or something…is it true? Which DVD you use? Because when i bought mine on the website, they said i will get 2 or 3 DVDs like a 20 minutes,55 minutes and a 10 minutes one. Which one is better?

September 6, 2007 at 5:02 pm
(314) sara says:

I use to do WP everyday along with a five mile run. I was at my best shape ever at that time. I now weigh more then I have every weiged in my life. Im 26 and tired of complaining about my weight everyday. My goal is to lose 10lbs. I hooked up the DVD player last night. I will begin my first session tonight. I really excited because WP is the only thing that works for me. Good Luck Ladies, I will check in with you guys in a few weeks.

September 6, 2007 at 5:53 pm
(315) Joanna says:

Due to my son’s figure skating schedule and the fact that we live 40min away from the arena, I find myself hitting the alarm clock at 4.30am M-F. Usually I would force myself to go for the walk by the lake at 6.30 before going to the office, but most times I was simply sleepy and tired. After picking my son after school & practice and coming home around 5, 6,sometimes 7pm, I am too exhausted to exercise. Today, however I tried something new. I did Windsor Pilates 10 min circle workout at 4.30am. WOW! After getting to the arena, I had energy to walk fast for 30 minutes, went through my normal work day, came home at 5.00pm and still can do a 20 min band workout. This is remarkable. Couple of years ago, when I did the original WP, almost right away people commented on how great I looked, then I stopped. I’m 5’9″, big boned with heavier chest and arms, I don’t look like I’m 200lb, but that’s how heavy I am. Have been on the LA weight loss since January and lost… 12lb. (probably because I refused to use the nutrition bars that cost an arm & a leg). Now I have hope again, because I know WP works and with added energy, I will be able to do it and keep it up. Good Luck to all.

September 10, 2007 at 11:35 am
(316) Fabio says:

Pilates is a terrific form of exercise. as I have gotten older I have been trying to incorporate more and more Pilates principles into my weight training. I don’t think I will ever give up weight training. But, I do think I have a better core as a result of incorporating some Pilates principles in my routine. I’m even thinking about doing Pilates exclusively for one or two days a week.

September 12, 2007 at 9:24 am
(317) monkeychick says:

i need to know if pilates is good for bad knees

September 13, 2007 at 12:51 am
(318) L.S says:

Does anyone using pilatis ever get bored? That’s my problem. I get bored after a while?

September 13, 2007 at 2:30 am
(319) Annabelle says:

not really unless you do the 20-minute workout. the advanced ones are good

September 15, 2007 at 11:03 pm
(320) M. says:

Hi
Is it me or like i jsute got the circle series and i did the 20 minute workout and i felt that i didn’t worked as hard as the old one i got…

September 22, 2007 at 1:47 pm
(321) lehua says:

i have used pilates in the past and found that is does work if you are consistent. i don’t think i will invest in the new circle series thing, i find the older wp videos are just fine.

September 23, 2007 at 1:33 pm
(322) Kayll says:

Ladies, if you want to go to a great forum that is FULL of supportive people, check out http://www.motivationtomove.com.

A friend gave me her windsor pilates DVDs because she didn’t really like them. She prefers The Firm and has had great success with that system.

I intend to log my progress with Windsor Pilates in my 100 Day challenge on the Motivation to Move forum. It’s really awesome and I wanted to recommend it. :)

All my best.

September 25, 2007 at 1:55 am
(323) flowerswife says:

I Have done Winsor Pilates for 2 years. At first I did it every once in awhile. I was not consistent. I lost a little weight like 10 pounds. But even with that I felt stronger. I found my posture improved greatly.

Heres the thing. 8 months ago I started doing it three times a week. The original tapes. I weighed 250 pounds. My stomach was in the way when I started. The exercises were harder. I did the modified version. As I got stronger I started doing the regular exercises. In 7 months I went from 250 size 24 to 175 size 18.

I got the new circle series last month and I lost 15 pounds to 160 and also dropped another 2 dress sizes and am now at a size 14 in one month.

Does it work. YES IT DOES. you do it 3 times a week and you will see results.

September 25, 2007 at 6:04 pm
(324) Patrica says:

ATTENTION: FLOWERSWIFE.
First i want to congradulate you on your success!!!I was just wondering if you did the 20min workout three times a week, to loose 75 lbs at first? What were your eating habbits? Did you do any other cardio? I would really appreciate a response.

thanks

September 29, 2007 at 7:52 am
(325) Elisha says:

The program will probably work for me once I get it. I paid for rush delivery and was delivered a blank beginners and a working advanced cd. I do the advanced but I wish I had the beginners to start with. I have been doing other things for exercise like walking, core work outs with the ball, etc. The customer service dept. is horrible. I have been waiting 2 weeks for my new cd. Mari Winsor needs to check her customer service dept. because whether this works for me or not I will never order again through Gunthy Renker’s staff.

E.

October 4, 2007 at 5:34 pm
(326) adriana says:

I just received the basic circle set, whichis like $10 on the website. I was just wondering if any of you who are loosing the inches, just do the 20minute workot 3 times a week, or should i try and do it eveyday, and take 1 day off?? Im also trying to do 40 minute walk, about 3 miles. 2-3 times a week. I really need to get rid of this huge stomach, Does anyone know if this is a good routine?? 3x or 6xweek? I also have the accelerated one that came with it, but it seems like all she does is “dance”, and I have a zumba cd that I enjoy more, so I dont know if I neecd to use the accelerated one too.

October 5, 2007 at 11:06 pm
(327) Natalie says:

I have been up and down with weight for years. I am currently on edge of size 16. I find I loose it easily when I am dedicated to a program, but I put it all back on and more. I briefly tried a few other pilates videos and fit ball and felt them too boring and uninspiring. So I didn’t stick to it.

i bought the windsor pilates circle and did the 20min program 3 times a week for two weeks. I also started eating healthier at the same time. As well as pilates, I used the elliptical bike a few times a week for 30min. My husband said my butt was looking better, adn someone at work noticed my butt was smaller. Unfortunately I didn’t keep doing it and went back to my old eating habits and piled it all back on in 3 weeks.

I have started again this last week, and have worked my way to the advanced session. I find this session much more stimulating, challenging and more of a burn. However, unlike the gym, you don’t feel it after you finish. I think my legs and butt and stomach are toning up. My husband said he could notice, but I don’t trust him to be truthful :-) Too soon to tell, but I know I am going to stick it out.

October 6, 2007 at 9:04 pm
(328) Kimberly says:

Winsor pilates has kept its promise to instantly shed off inches off your waist, butt, thighs, and arms. It’s worked for me!
And I’m more flexible and feel A LOT stronger, than I’ve felt in years!
3 times a week and 2 times of cardio and I’ve finally noticed results.
My stomach is finally, after sooo many years, toned!
So yes, Winsor Pilates definitely works

October 7, 2007 at 12:32 am
(329) Ana M Hodgson says:

I am thinking of purchasing the Windsor Pilates with the ring, mom of four boys pregnancy pounds lingering, I have seen the commercials and am still skeptical. After reading the comments I am starting to become a bit less skeptical, is it worth the 16.90? I am so needing to get into shape for me. I don’t care if I lose a ton of weight, although it would be nice, I am more interested in getting tone.Muscle weighs more that fat so again if the scale doesn’t move that’s fine. I would like to hear what any of you have to say. Thanks

October 7, 2007 at 10:20 pm
(330) miranda says:

i find that it really tones your back, lower and upper. i just recently stopped doing it and my back doesnt seemed as toned as it was when i was doing winsor pilates. i would recommend it to anyone looking to do something convenient that really works

October 8, 2007 at 5:23 am
(331) jojo says:

hi all
i just started doing wp last wednesday i weighed 201 and after 3 days i lost 4lbs! yay me!so im going to start the south beach diet this week with wp and hopefully it’ll help a lil more i’ll keep everyone informed! bye and good luck to EVERYONE!!!

October 9, 2007 at 6:26 pm
(332) Lisee says:

So, I’m gonna ask my mom to buy windsor pilates circle for me. I’m 15, 5”9 and Weigh a whopping 225 POUNDS!
I’m gonna go for it, i hope it works…..

October 10, 2007 at 1:13 pm
(333) Farmgirl says:

WP really really WORKS!! I first found out about it when I saw that my cousin lost all of her weight and I didn’t believe her that she only worked out for 20 min three times a week. So my mom bought it and never used it so, I asked her to borrow it because I didn’t want to invest in it before trying it. Well, after my first child I did the 20 minute workout so that I could fit into my wedding dress and it worked within a month of only doing it three days a week. Then after the wedding I wanted to lose even more, so I did the ab workout and lost the rest of my weight and then some. I did that one at least three times a week, if not everyday and I had never ever been that thin or lean in my life! I love it. Actually I was almost too thin (below a size 0), so I don’t think I will get that skinny again but the point is I lost at least 40 lbs. within a month or two. Then I got pregnant with my second child and packed on the pounds again and this time I bought the whole set with the cirlce included and decided to try the circle workout and can I tell you IT’S A-M-A-Z-I-N-G!! My abs hurt when I laugh, which is a great thing and I can already see and feel my love handles disappearing and its only been a week. I would DEFINITELY recommend this considering I have been doing WP for the last 3 1/2 years, and I seriously swear by it. Honestly, everyone who compliments me I tell them about WP, I think I need to be employed by Mari because I am giving her lots of business.

October 10, 2007 at 9:55 pm
(334) K says:

YES YES YES—-It works–BUT YOU DO HAVE TO DO THEM :)
They are amazing esp after you have a baby——–After my 2nd baby hit 10months I started the pilates and 2 months later I was in a two piece for a cruise with my husband. We had our 3 baby 13 months ago—and Have started back on pilates and it is just melting off AGAIN!!! I just ordered the NEW pilates —Can’t wait for them to come in. By the way I HATE TO EXCERSISE!!!
Pilates work if you do them!!!!!!!

October 11, 2007 at 12:59 pm
(335) angelic says:

I LOVE my piltes (Winsor Pilates) workout! I swear by it! I worhout everyday & went from a size 12 to a size 4! Can you beleive it, a 4!!!! Long live Winsor Pilates!

October 11, 2007 at 9:11 pm
(336) Lisee says:

K, i just put in my order…as skeptical as i am, this site has helped alot. And if it’s worth it… i’ll keep ya posted!!!

October 13, 2007 at 1:48 pm
(337) srishti says:

i want to learn abt the diet and exercise which can help in breast enhancement.i am really worried and suffering from deppression.kindly help…

October 13, 2007 at 3:42 pm
(338) katie says:

hi everyone. i am 16, 5’8” and weigh about 157 lbs. i have been a size 12 forever it seems and really just want to buy jeans in the single digits. i asked my dad to buy me the circle series for my 17th birthday at the end of the month because i really want to tone everything, especially my butt!! lol. i hope it works as good as everyone says it does, and ill keep everyone posted on how it goes. good luck to all!!!

October 14, 2007 at 7:54 pm
(339) Jenny says:

I have been using Winsor Pilates for years and have recently gone back to them ten days ago and I use them everyday. I have been using the 20 minute circle and buns and thigh one. Which ones do most people do and how often?

October 14, 2007 at 8:43 pm
(340) jessica says:

I have already lost 50 lbs with diet and excercise but i have gotten tired of the same old routine in excercising. I bought pilates today and my first workout was really rough but inspiring.I hope this gives me the motivation I need to lose the next 50lbs. Good luck to everyone!

October 15, 2007 at 7:09 pm
(341) Kristy says:

It is the best workout i have ever done. its easy, doesn’t take long and you get great results!
After a week of combining healthy eating, walk 3 times a week, for 40mins, and pilates 4 times a week (it’s addictive, because it makes you feel so great) i have lost approx 8lb and a good 2.5inches from waist and a nice 3inches from hips. it does work.
My Husband loves the results so much he wants to start himself!
Anyone about to start this routine remember to keep it consistent, it is always hard the first couple of times but it doesn’t take long to get the hang of it…don’t give up!
I have seen few negative reviews on this exercise but it appears they are doing it wrong…
See I just cant Rave enough about it!

October 18, 2007 at 9:20 pm
(342) Heather says:

I bought the basic circle series in July. I had already lost about 40 lbs after my second child by eating healthily and walking 40 minutes everyday. I wanted to tone up and lose more inches. Doing the basic 20 minute routine at least 3 times a week, walking the 40 minutes daily, and eating healthy(whole grains, fresh fruits and vegetables, lean protien, healthy fats, and lots of fiber as per the great doctors of The Owner’s Manual Diet)I have lost about 7 more pounds and almost 3 inches off of my waist. I can really see a difference with the sculpting circle. The resistance really tones you. I have done many exercise tapes over the years, and I have lost weight before, but I have never toned up like this before. I can see a difference in my arms and legs, and especially the core. I still have a lot of work to do, but I’m really happy with how well this works. I also like that it stretches and tones, but doesn’t make you look bulky at all. It really does get easier as you get used to it, but you do have to make a conscience effort to follow Mari’s instructions closely, do the breathing correctly, and try to challenge yourself. I definitely recommend it.

October 24, 2007 at 5:36 pm
(343) Liz J says:

I did my first work out today, I am 5, 5″ tall, and I weigh 150 I am a size 6-8 depending on the pants. I want to get to a size 3/4 and down to 125. I am 35 years old, I have 4 children. I lost 36 pounds already over the last 4 months, soo I am anxious to get the last 25 off as soon as possiable!!! Wish me luck!!!

October 28, 2007 at 12:48 pm
(344) Charlotte says:

I’m from the UK and brought the circle series today- saw it advertised on tv (I don’t think it’s taken off in UK just yet but seems big in USA) Can’t wait for it to come! I just hope it works for me. Good Luck everyone!

October 30, 2007 at 1:26 am
(345) abby says:

pilates does work..at first i was sceptical, but i have only been doing it for a week and a half and i have noticed huge changes, i am more toned, thinner and leaner looking and i have lost five kilos and inches from all over my body. Ive been doing the 20 min workout everyday, but i havent even changed my diet, so im still enjoying my potato chips.

November 1, 2007 at 12:24 pm
(346) Flowerswife says:

Patrica,

yes I do and did the 20 minute routine 3 times a week. I also eat healthy,
meats, veggies and rice. I do not eat just a little I just eat a lot of the good things. I also drink tons of Water and eat 6 small meals a day.

November 3, 2007 at 1:24 pm
(347) readii says:

Hi, I’m Fourteen and i’ve weighed around 135-140 for about three years now. I really want to get down from a size 10 to a 3/4 which i’ve heard is the normal size for kids my age and height. I can’t wait until my set comes in the mail, i bought the “Best Value Workout” and i’m ready to start working out. After reading some of these peoples stories i’m getting more and more excited. I also want to drop down another 20 lbs. and maybe weigh about 115-118. I felt like this system would help give me the push i needed to suceed. My fifteenth b-day is comin up fairly soon and i wanna be able to fit into these jeans from my favorite store so i can get them as a treat for me! I hope everything works out okay for everyone and i check back soon to turn in my results. :]

November 4, 2007 at 3:21 am
(348) amy says:

hi,

to all those that have had success with winsor pilates, any tips? what schedule did you use/ how many times a week did you do pilates? did you change your eating plans? did you add and cardio or fat burning exercises? what time of the day did you use it? i have been using it for about 2 weeks now and seen no results at all! a week ago i even added 30 – 40 mins of cardio and light resistance training from hip hop abs. thanks!

November 4, 2007 at 7:57 pm
(349) Tamara says:

Well I use to do pilates when I was in high school, now that I’m out of high school i became lazy. I’m definetly going back to pilates because it really helped me before its trustworthing and you’ll see results, so I’m back on it again and sticking to it!

November 8, 2007 at 7:47 pm
(350) Alyssa says:

I LOVE Winsor Pilates, and pilates in general. If you’re wondering how well it works, Google Joseph Pilates, and look at photos of him in his 80′s. He’s very strong, fit and healthy. Or look up Real Isacovitz, another master teacher. He is 69, and looks about 45. Pilates will keep you healthy for life and help prevent injury, as well as some of the difficulties of aging.

November 9, 2007 at 1:48 pm
(351) Crystal says:

I want to get back in shape. I gained 22 pounds since I got married and I want to get back the body I used to have. Where do I start with Winsor Pilates? What kind of series is the best?
Thanks a lot!!!!

November 12, 2007 at 5:31 pm
(352) Sally says:

Hello everyone, I have had the Windsor Pilates for over 5 years now. I have to say YES YES YES, it honestly works. I know how hard it is to believe what you hear & read, but please believe me. It works. I stopped using it, just because I have been lazy, I look back at old pics and I can really see a BIG difference, so now I have to start again. You can see your abs,butt,things toning after 2wks. I really saw the inches coming off my hipps. So for the ladies that are looking for those results, this is for you. The key is just to stay motivted and consistent, and you will see a BIG improvemnet.

November 22, 2007 at 3:31 am
(353) miranda says:

i have a trick first u eat really healthy that day and then drink 2 tbsp of coconut oil that night with some water and then drink some oolong tea (u can find it at organic grocery store)u can lose like 2 lbs. i kno drinking oil sounds gross but believe me it works

November 22, 2007 at 3:34 am
(354) miranda says:

drink 2 tbsp of coconut oil (walmart) with some water and then drink a cup of oolong tea (look for at organice grocery store) and u’ll lose like two lbs PLUS the weight u lose with winsor pilates

November 22, 2007 at 8:05 pm
(355) ArizonaDi says:

I am a Weight Watcher who has lost 50 pounds over the past four years. I walk 1.3 miles every day.

29 days ago I quit smoking!!! I put nine pounds on almost overnight from a slow metabolism. Now, counting points and walking aren’t doing a thing for me. I feel awful with this extra weight on.

Please wish me luck as I log off now to put my pilates tape in the VCR. Yes, I’m still a VCR person. Guess how old I am! lol

I’ll be back with results…Happy Turkey Day!
Di

November 26, 2007 at 1:57 am
(356) Melody says:

I hear about Pilates all the time and also saw the infomercial. I ordered it and it should arrive tomorrow. I use tae bo and yoga now and in a month haven’t seen any weight loss, just a few pounds. I’m ECSTATIC to start Pilates tomorrow. I have 4 weeks to lose 15 pounds and I am confident that I can lose it after reading all of these encouraging comments. I am 19 years old and weigh 155 pounds, I wear a size 9-10. I hope to be 140 and a size 6-7 in 4 weeks. I’m really anxious to lose inches in my waist, arms and thighs. Will update after a week.

November 28, 2007 at 12:51 am
(357) allison says:

soo i have had winsor pilates for a while now but i just havent used it…i liked how it felt but i would just get lazy…so yesterday i started the 20 minute workout the one with the “seal” at the end…these videos are on vhs and are kind of old …can anyone tell me if this particular video works? im curious b/c im 16 and i have always been pretty thin with a good body because i did gymnastics..so my core was pretty tight but this summer i didnt exercise at all was a lazy bum and quit tumbling for a while ..sooo if anybody has used this particular video can you tell if you have seen results and how fast?
also how long does it take before the fat from your face comes off?

December 1, 2007 at 2:23 am
(358) Melody says:

I have been doing Pilates now for 5 days and the results are amazing. I started a new job the same day I started Pilates, and I had to buy pants for work. Now,5 days later, the pants are huge. I’ve already lost 2 inches in my abs. My body is strong and my posture has improved tremendously. I highly reccommend to anyone looking to drop weight fast.

December 1, 2007 at 9:46 pm
(359) Tina says:

I just restarted winsor pilates after a two year hiatus and I have to say I love it. Ive only been doing it for three days and have already lost 3 lbs! Ive combined he accelerated body scupting with a 20 minute workout. Usually after doing he 20 minute I have energy to do more! I also teach and pracice yoga. I’m hoping to slim down my waste with pilates. I’ll keep you posted! All of your post have been really encouraging! Keep up the great work

December 2, 2007 at 11:38 am
(360) allison says:

hey tina
i was just wondering do how many days do you do the accelerated workout and how many days the 20 minute workout…also do you do any cardio?

December 2, 2007 at 7:11 pm
(361) Tina says:

Hey allison in answer to your question. I did the accelerated body sculpting and the 20 minute dvd everyday. I aslo changed my eating habits just a bit. Incorporating more fruits and veggies. I didn’t do cardio, but I teach and practice yoga, so I took a yoga class yesterday. I also walked a bit today as well. oh and I did the tapes for just three days so far.
Hope this helps!

December 3, 2007 at 10:13 pm
(362) allison says:

awww goood luckk tinaa!
and thanks for the advice
i wish i had time to exercise more but high school is tooo hectice blahhh lol and too many hard classes…but i have been doing the 20 minute workout the one with the seal at the end and it feels like it works but not enough…maybe b/c i used to do gymnastics and my muscles are still tight soo..hmm i dont know i guess i ll try the accelerated workout

December 4, 2007 at 9:48 pm
(363) tina says:

Hey allison!
thats ok . I had to take a day off today myself it’s just life. you do the best you can my abs are really sore from it hough so i know its working. the accelerated work out is really awesome. its a good all over stretch

December 6, 2007 at 11:41 pm
(364) annemarie says:

winsor pilates is the BEST. it totally works, as soon as one week into it at 20min a day i noticed a huge difference in how i felt. weight loss is easy with winsor pilates.

December 10, 2007 at 10:44 pm
(365) Melody says:

So far I’ve been doing Pilates for 2 weeks and I’ve only lost 3 pounds but I’ve lost 2 inches in my waist and my whole body is a lot slimmer. I love it.

December 13, 2007 at 11:22 pm
(366) Tiffany M. says:

Hey, I’m downloading Winsor Pilates right now. I’m going to try it tonight. I’ll post back in a week to post progress ^-^

December 13, 2007 at 11:49 pm
(367) Sheila says:

I am just getting back into WP. I have been using the circle series that I’ve been holding on to for several months. It is wonderful because already it is improving my flexibility. I have frequent musclular-skelital pain and on many days, exercise is the last thing I want to do. I am proud to say that today, I fought past the pain in my body and made myself do the 20-min circle workout. I was ecstatic with the way that the workout stretched me out and eased my pain. I will continue so that I can get the full results of Windsor Pilates

December 22, 2007 at 8:06 am
(368) Tiffany M. says:

This is a very simple workout to do. I really enjoy doing it. I’ve lost 5 pounds in the past 9 days by doing this every night before I go to bed. I may have lost more if I actually watched my diet. I’m going to start watching it after the holiday passes. I’ll keep letting you know how it goes ^-^

December 24, 2007 at 11:57 am
(369) Melody says:

I’ve been doing Pilates for a month now and for some reason I haven’t gotten the results I expected. I don’t eat junk food, I eat healthy foods only. I exercise almost every day, and I do the poses correctly. Can anyone tell me what I’m doing wrong?? Help!

December 31, 2007 at 9:38 am
(370) Joan says:

This is the only workout that has ever worked for me! I did it faithfully three years ago and went from a size 10 to a 4 without really losing much weight –the major difference was in how my weight shifted — I had a waist for the first time in years. I slacked off for a while and don’t weigh much more, but really feel out of shape. Just yesterday pulled out my videos — New Year’s resolution! I’m 45 and recommend it for anyone wanting toned abs –

January 2, 2008 at 12:18 am
(371) Jenny says:

Hey new and old users of Winsor Pilates,
I had writen here a few times at the start of my senior year Aug. 2007. I’m 17 going on 18 in March. And let me tell you, Pilates does work. During the time I used it. I went from size 4 to almost, haha, a size 2. However, due to school, and stress. I stopped using Pilates, and stopped my eating habits, if habits were to eat less…
I can barely fit into my size 4 jeans now. It’s a squeeze and I feel pretty bad about it.
I had lost so much weight and gained it all back….TT_TT
The good news is I’m starting back on course. It’s a new year and my resolution is to lose to a pant size 2 and from 139 to 109 in half a year.
This is reasonable right??

But my questions is, how can you be committed to it even when you are stressed out? What’s the best way to stay on course and not over eat due to emotion?
For some of you, I read things that’s so great. But I wander if I can do it too. And how I could do it.
Please help me. I would like to go to college with a fresh look. =3 And fit into a great prom dress. =D

January 2, 2008 at 8:52 pm
(372) BillNZ says:

Okay, been a week into the 20 minute workout. No changes yet, but the exercises are getting easier.

45 years old, male, 6 foot, 230 pounds. I really want to see my 3 kids grow up, and I guess am in danger of a heart attack before 55.

Aiming for 185 pounds. Can’t run due to surgery. Therefore, daily walking, weights 3x a week, and daily Pilates.

I have 42 days until school starts (I’m a teacher), so figure I can maintain this for 42 days, and see what results…

January 9, 2008 at 6:21 pm
(373) Annie says:

I been working out with winsor pilates last year and i loved it i could really see diffirence!! i stoped becose i got lazy haha and now i m about to start again with 20 min work out, and i thought has anyone tryed to combinate the Buns and thigh scuplting with 20 min work out?

January 9, 2008 at 10:09 pm
(374) Jerry says:

Hello Everyone! I never used winsor pilates before but I did purchase Pilates tone specific areas for the arms but thighs and legs…..and let me tell EVERYONE!!!!! I lost so much weight in one month and a half…..I started the summer of my sophmore year in college and all I did was do the Pilates DVD one hour for 5 days……and by the time I went back to school everyones faces were dropped! literally…..I’m estimating I lost 35-40 pounds but the best thing is my whole body transformed into this slender proportioned body. I graduated from college this past May…..and I fell off like over a year ago….But I’m going to buy Winsor Pilates because I’m pretty bored with the first one…….and I want to try something new….But I want to let everyone know that Pilates works….It gets rid of aches and pains and its a great technique for the mind and body…You’ll feel better when you get up in the morning and you will feel satisfied in the end….so to everyone who is thinking of doing it…..DO IT! and to everyone who started it……KEEP IT UP!…..and for those who are still using it…..NEVER STOP!

So stop wasting weeks or months trying to find success stories on how much ppl loose and get up off the chair from the computer and do it……you’ll be so thankful you did in the longrun…..I thank everyone for reading my “TRUE” comment…….

January 11, 2008 at 9:54 am
(375) christine says:

i bought winsor circle pilates from telsell in Belgium but now they are broke.
Can anyone tell me where i can purchase this workout dvd + circle please?

kind regards

January 12, 2008 at 9:47 pm
(376) Jenny says:

Christine, just search Winsor Pilates on Google, and go to her official web. Her offers will include the work out circle. Best of luck to you. ^_^

January 14, 2008 at 10:59 am
(377) Amanda says:

I started this with the basic, then when i was ready switched to the 20 minute, then accelerated. Only did it 2-3 times a week and had lost 15 lbs in one month. I seen muscles in my abdomin i didn’t even know existed and my butt and thighs looked great. After thousands of dollars in gym memberships and playing sports this workout topped it all. Good luck hope you receive the same results!

January 15, 2008 at 2:02 am
(378) Addy says:

I have just ordered Winsor pilates today, and I’m very excited to recieve it. All the feedback is very positive. As I am only 15 I am hoping to really tone up from the program ( I ordered the circle one). I actually don’t really need to lose any weight as I weigh 52 kgs and am 165 cms. But I would love to tone up. Will I have to change my diet drastically? Because I am a big junk eater and I don’t eat salad. I am also worried that I will get bored with the program?? Any feedback or guidance?

January 15, 2008 at 9:09 pm
(379) Melody says:

Addy, you don’t have to change your diet drastically with Winsor Pilates. I started it about a month and a half ago and my body is truly looking amazing. However, cutting out junk food is good for you because not only will it accelerate your toning up, it will make you feel better. trust me, eat better and work out and you’ll feel great. i know it’s something young people dont like to accept…im only 19!!! but i feel great, so please take my advice. you’ll be glad you did.

January 16, 2008 at 12:49 pm
(380) Donna says:

I am a runner and began using windsor pilates to add in stretching. I already had fit abs when I began the program. I thought the exercises were very easy and no way did people get the results as claimed. I stuck to the program because I loved the stretching and much to my surprise my abs were more cut in six weeks than they have ever been. I also think the pilates help me with balance and improve my running and tennis.

January 16, 2008 at 2:44 pm
(381) Mandi says:

I’ve had the Circle workout DVD (20 minute, 10 minute blast, and 50 minute advanced burning) for a while and finally started using it. I did the 20 minute circle workout today. I’ll be using it 3x a week and doing 10 min on a stationary bike (15mph) those days. 2x a week, I will do 30 min stationary bike (15mph). So, I will be working out M-F and resting on Sat & Sun. I am 20, female, 5’3 and 202 lbs. I am wanting to get to 135 or smaller, depending on how I feel. I wear a size 18 and want to get to a size 9 or smaller. I will post weekly and let you know how it goes. Just to let you know, my waist is 45.75″, hips are 47.5″, arms are 14.75″, upper thighs are 27.5″ and my mid thighs are 24″. I’ll weigh in weekly on Fridays & take measurements weekly. Good luck to you all & remember, you CAN do it!

January 17, 2008 at 10:48 pm
(382) hopeful in 2008 says:

I was so inspired by your stories that I just placed my order. I am very excited. I used to be a 7/8 (and chunky with heavy thighs) but over the past 6 years I have gone up to an 11/12. I am 5’5 and 178lbs. I would really love to get into a 4/5 by April/May and I hope this helps.
I have recently modified my diet and signed up for a cardio class (meets 2 days a week) at the gym. I hope that the pilates workout will give me the results that I want.
I’ll be 35 this year and I really want to feel like I am in control of my body and my life.
I will post again once I get it.
keep writing your stories – they are inspiring to people who just need the extra push to get started.
thank you all.

January 18, 2008 at 6:40 pm
(383) Erika Ornelas says:

Of course it works. Anytime you control what you’re putting in and exercise, you will lose weight and inches. Winsor Pilates isn’t a pill you take that claims to magically alter your body. I did this and I lost a lot of weight. If I had followed the menu suggestions I probably would have lost even more. The good thing about pilates though is that besides the aerobic workout, there’s a part where you use weights and start to build lean muscle. Lean muscle is good because it helps you burn calories even when you’re sitting. I’m sure any form of calorie control and exercise will help. From personal experience I can say it works. It isn’t easy necessarily, but you have to stick to something if you want results. It does get easier with time. When you see your body looking better it motivates you more. also I noticed when I started working out everyday that I had more energy.

January 19, 2008 at 8:51 pm
(384) billnz says:

Almost 5 weeks into this. Pilates every day (20min workout), better eating, walking every day (60 minutes) and weights 3x a week. So far have lost 15lbs.

Almost fell off the wagon last week. I put on 1 lb in week 4, with my wife not able to tell I’d lost any weight at all. After three blah/down days, back into it again. That would usually be the time I’d quit, so I’m happy to have pushed through this time.

31 pounds to go, to a much healthier me. Also happy for this much weight loss to take me six months. If the going gets tough, push through (take a rest day, or light exercise)

January 20, 2008 at 6:48 pm
(385) Addy says:

Melody, thanks very much for your advice!! I’ll try my very best to take it, thanks for taking the time to write it up for me!

Regards,
Addy.

January 21, 2008 at 5:53 pm
(386) Melody says:

You’re welcome Addy. And also to Hopeful in 2008, I know exactly how you feel about the inspirational comments. That’s how I felt 2 months ago when I first purchased Winsor Pilates, and now I am so glad I found this site because just when you’re ready to give up, it’s nice to know that others feel your pain. Everyone needs support and this is a stellar way to give and receive it. And remember, everyone..your body is capable of more than you give it credit for. You can do it, and you will. Believe in yourself and just think of how amazing you’ll look in the end.

January 21, 2008 at 11:02 pm
(387) hopeful in 2008 says:

Thanks Melody. Can’t wait to get my package so I can start the workout. Will check in then.

January 22, 2008 at 7:49 pm
(388) Sara says:

I just received my kit in the mail yesterday -after 4 WEEKS!!! :( I’ve only done one complete workout. I did the 20 minute video, the bun & thight video, the ab video and the arm video (about 80 mins total) and let me tell you I can still feel all of those worked muscles today. I would like to think that anything that makes you that sore the day after HAS to work! *fingers crossed*

January 23, 2008 at 12:31 am
(389) Project LILA says:

I have the oldest version of Widor Pilates. I have had it for almost 3 years and have watched it stare me down and laugh in my face for attempting and failing. Today I decided to start doing it, really doing it. 3 times a week, for 20 minutes. I read all these stories about success… LOVE IT!!! I hope to be as fortunate. Any suggestions for a beginer???

January 23, 2008 at 12:43 am
(390) Project LILA says:

I am reading a lot about WP with a circle?? What is this circle and will I benefit from adding it to the routine?? I want to have the best chance I can. I see the new basic system is only about 10 dollars, should I invest in it?

January 23, 2008 at 12:48 am
(391) Melody says:

Project Lila,
I have the Sculpting Circle, and yes it is beneficial to have the added resistance. You get faster results and more of a workout. I got the 20 minute circle dvd and the advanced slimming circle dvd on ebay for a low price. To everyone, ebay has everything you need for winsor pilates and its much cheaper than the winsor pilates website. And you never wait 4 weeks for shipping, just a few days. I was so eager to order my dvds and only waited about 4 days. Trust me, ebay is the way to go.
Hope I helped!

January 23, 2008 at 5:42 am
(392) Billnz says:

Project Lila,

I have the old version too. Seems to work fine. I do the 20 minute workout. Sometimes new gadgets are just a gimmick (I still have an Abflex under my bed, and sold the Power Rider a few years ago…)

Tried the advanced workout last week. I couldn’t breathe with the rollover splits, so stopped. Was actually quite funny.

Have decided to slowly work up to be able to manage 2 x 20 minute sessions.

Also read yesterday that going for a walk immediately after Pilates is very beneficial.

January 24, 2008 at 12:10 am
(393) Project LILA says:

Thanks for the info. I will start with what I have and purchase the sculpting circle and other DVDs when I start to see results, and need more of a challenge, and addition to my routine. Thanks again!!

January 26, 2008 at 4:45 pm
(394) Susan says:

I work out at a gym regularly.. and last night instead of hitting the gym I did the 20 minute basic pilates workout after not using it for quite a while… today my abs, butt and thighs are sore and feel tighter… so I know it’s working! I sweated more with this, then I do when I run for 30 minutes on the treadmill or elliptical… I love it!

January 26, 2008 at 7:46 pm
(395) nisreen says:

hi all!

i have the accelerated workout video only, (50 minutes long), i wanted to know if it has the same effect as the 20 minute workout? does anyone know? thanks alottt!
oh, i’ve only done it 2x, but my stomach is sore, so i guess that’s a good sign! :)

January 27, 2008 at 1:09 pm
(396) Lauren says:

i was using pilates over the summer (about a month and a half) and i lost about 20 lbs but once school started up again i got lazy and stopped using the pilates. i gained back all the weight i had lost and i now weigh 239 (im 16) i dont look like how much i weigh but i still would like to loose a lot of wieght before the summer. im starting winsor pilates again ive been doing it for about a week now and you can deffinetly tell there is a difference in my posture, flexability, and i look slimmer then before i started. this time im not going to give up. its easy and fun but it can get pretty boring. i wish all of you who are using winsor pilates the best of luck =] YAY PILATES!

January 30, 2008 at 3:43 pm
(397) Theresa says:

Yes, it really does work if you do it a few times a week, watch the junk food, drink water instead of soda, and get some other cardio and weight training. A few years ago I was really working out with it that way and had really good results. I slacked off and now have even more to lose. If I get back on that routine I know I will see results and feel better.

February 2, 2008 at 11:03 am
(398) hopeful in 2008 says:

I got my package yesterday and I was so excited. I used the buns & thigh workout this morning. It was hard and I am sore BUT happy! I am going to give this 100% and see what happens. Thanks again Melody.

February 2, 2008 at 2:29 pm
(399) Melody says:

Hopeful in 2008, I’m glad to hear you got your package. I have the buns and thighs and have been doing it for about a month and have really, really good results so far. It is hard but will get easier and more fun. Good luck, and again, if you want more videos (and you will), try ebay. Everything is cheap, and the shipping is weeks faster than the Pilates website.

February 3, 2008 at 2:23 am
(400) Steph says:

pilaties rocks!! been doing it for 2 months and seen great results!! ps is anyone else here australian?? coz i am :)

February 3, 2008 at 9:00 pm
(401) Minttu says:

I’m from Finland and I got my Pilates 3 pack dvd a few years ago. Then I got interested in going to the gym and I worked out really hard there doing gym, spinning, body pump etc. so at my best I was working out 6-7 times a week and being around 143 lbs. and 5’9 tall. Then I had my final exams at high school and it was very stressful so I kinda stopped working out totally. It was great going to the gym and well now even if I’d have time to go there I feel like it takes too much time when I have a possibility to work out at home. I’m still 5’9 but now after not working out and eating junk food I weigh 176 which is terrible. I’m thinking about maybe entering a beauty pageant next year cause my friends and family have told me I should do it but now with the extra weight I feel insecure and all. I’d like to lose like 40 lbs. What do you think, is it possible? I still have the Windsor Pilates 3 pack DVD at home. I was thinking about maybe using the 1 hour accelerated workout to get faster results but I wanna lose it a healthy way and not too fast. But to also be in a good physical condition I thought I’d do some walking also. I want honest opinions. What do you think? Can I lose the weight and fit in my old clothes again anytime soon? Of course I need to make major changes in my diet. I got this gorgeous pair of Seven jeans in LA that are like 2-3 sizes smaller than what I wear now and I haven’t fitted in them in a couple of years..I’m at a business school now and everyone else looks so nice and slim. I don’t wanna do this for others but for myself..what should I do?? Help me ladies :) thank you!!

February 10, 2008 at 3:16 pm
(402) Brandy says:

I have used Windsor Pilates and I do enjoy it. The only problem is that I don’t feel anything in my stomach muscles during or after I use the tape. My husband has used it with me and he feels everything. What am I doing wrong?

February 11, 2008 at 2:06 pm
(403) Depechgrl says:

I bought winsor pilates about 3 years ago and I lost 10lbs within a few months of using it. It really works! Then I got lazy and gained it back but Im back on it again and I bought some more dvds off ebay!Just 3 times a week and watching your calories is all you need! Plus cardio helps too if u need to lose extra fat.

Brandy: Everytime I use it my abs are sore, u might not be using your powerhouse enough, you need to “pull your belly button into your spine” like Mari says and really focus on your core the whole time you are doing the exercises.
Good luck everyone!

February 11, 2008 at 7:32 pm
(404) kristin says:

I was sort of cautious about ordering the pilates dvd set but after reading everyone’s positive response and success stories I purchased it right off the bat from ebay. I’m so bloody miserable! I’m the heaviest I’ve ever been in my entire life–> 210 lbs and I’m only 21 *sigh*. Does anyone have any words of advice or tips on how often I should use each dvd?

February 13, 2008 at 2:15 pm
(405) Jenn says:

Just wanted to add…I used Windsor pilates a while back, i had borrowed it from a friend and OMG let me say, it was one of the best workouts I’ve ever had. It also made me feel more energetic. I also have back problems amd i have to say, i don’t now if it was the work out or the strechting but my back felt better as well.
I also seen results quickly.
So know i am so excited to say, i just purchased my own set of pilates dvds and a can’t wait for them to get to me.

February 15, 2008 at 5:53 pm
(406) Kimla says:

Which Winsor Pilates DVD is offers the best results? Plus, are you guys referring to Reformer Pilates (with those strange machines) or is this a workout I can do in my apartment on my own time?

February 26, 2008 at 2:42 pm
(407) Jerry says:

Ok so I’m going to see if Winsor Pilates works……..I believe this comment number will be 407. I bought the advanced package with everything in it……..I’m 5’8 currently 248 pounds……..size 18 at that……..I will post my results when I reach my midpoint goal which is 200 and then my final goal of 165-170……so to everyone wish me luck and I thank you for the support…….

February 26, 2008 at 2:55 pm
(408) Adri says:

Hi everyone

I was just wondering if there is anyone out there trying to use pilates to get rid of the belly after having a baby right after another, and if it really works. You see, I have lost about 18 pounds, and am walking/jogging, for 1/2 to 1hr. almost 5 days a week. I also do some excercise like lounges, hand weihgts squats, etcc. I also was doing pilates the 20 minute part for about 1 week and a half and I feel like my stomach is just not going back together. I have 4 children, not far apart and I am wondering if my flabby stomach is going to disappear anytime, or am I supposed to do the 20 minute pilates maybe 2x a day?? Someone please HELP! I need some advice before giving up on this.

February 26, 2008 at 10:58 pm
(409) Melody says:

Hi everyone..first off, to Brandy, you have to focus really hard on pulling your stomach in as much as possible, otherwise you will build your abs out, instead of in and flat. To those that say they are heavy and want to start, consider losing more weight first before considering Pilates because it is difficult, and it might make you feel like you aren’t doing it right. Pilates is perfect for tightening up the extra flab you may have, but I don’t want anyone to feel discouraged because of the difficulty level. If you still want to do it, try walking right after Pilates, it really helps. If anyone wants extra motivation or anything else, please email me. We all need help staying motivated. Like me, Im 3 months in and Im trying hard to get it done every night but I know how good it feels when I finish, and I feel accomplished.
mrs_peter_parker2003@yahoo.com

February 27, 2008 at 10:14 pm
(410) Desiree says:

Hi all! I bought pilates about 3 years again and when I started it (about 3 times a week and watching calories) I would say within 2 weeks I could tell that all my pants were loose. I have recently gained all my weight back after getting married and I am about to try it again. Hopefully I will see results fast!

February 29, 2008 at 3:18 am
(411) Emily says:

Im from downunder, and it seriously does work. Enough said

March 2, 2008 at 11:15 pm
(412) sky says:

Ok, everyone I am thirty years old and I weight 128 and I am 5’5. I want to lose ten pounds. According to the advertising all you have to do is do WP three times and week and you’ll lose weight. Well I want to know if this is true???? Please help I am getting married in October.

March 5, 2008 at 2:47 pm
(413) Maggie says:

I just bought the Winsor Pilates Basics Step by Step (still sealed) and the 20 Minute Workout (like new) on VHS tapes at a Goodwill thrift store for 94 cents total.

What can it hurt to try it? I am already doing Weight Watchers and walking a mile and one-half at least
6 days a week.

I don’t anything about Pilates but I’ll find out when I put the tapes on tonight.

March 9, 2008 at 10:46 pm
(414) Steph says:

hey im only 14 but i decided to start pilates coz i wonted to get fitter and healthier i used to weigh 52 kgs and now i only weigh 47 :) i am very happy with the results except my legs and hips still arent as skinny as id like :( have u got any sugestions on how i can get my thighs abd hips skinnier?? any suggestions would be greatly appreciated :) thanks .

March 10, 2008 at 5:04 pm
(415) gwen says:

Winsor pilates are great, simple, and effective. they will sculpt your body the way you want them to. It makes your body look more feminine, and if you are a guy using it, it makes you look more flexible and lean.

March 10, 2008 at 8:29 pm
(416) Jessica says:

Yes Winsor Pilates is a challenge workout but it really works…I lost 60 pounds with using it in a month…After 10 days of using it I noticed that my body was toning up and by day 30 I lost half my weight and went down from a size 14 to a size 6 then kept losing the weight…I never felt better or looked better…If you stick with it then you will see the results…It’s amazing!

March 12, 2008 at 10:44 pm
(417) Tamara says:

I’ve been using pilates since the first of the year. I have toned up, but have not lost alot weight. We have cut out just about any and all snacks, eat mostly grilled/broiled meats, steamed veggies, etc. I just still have the pouchie little belly, HOW in the world do you get rid of it? My ‘baby’ will be 20 this year and I still have it! However, on a positive note, I’m noticing a big difference in my thighs and the ‘fat pocket’ I had on the inside / above the knee has practacially gone away. I’ve been using the Advanced Pilates workout about 38 minutes with the circle and then the 20 minute session as well. It’s just now getting nice enough to add a brisk walk outside to my routines. I guess basically, I just want you to know, YES, it is working, I still have the weight to lose, but I’m thinking that the muscle I’m gaining is why I’ve not actually lost weight. One more thing, I do mine 1st thing of a morning, it gives me much more energy throughout the day. Try It, Use It, You’ll Fall In Love With It!

March 14, 2008 at 1:33 am
(418) Andrea says:

When I was in highschool I had always taken any Pilates/Yoga classes available. I was very trim and tone then. Then, I got out of the routine. While in college I was in one Oral Comm class, and a professor’s assistant talked to us about how she was getting married soon, and decided to ‘once again’ buy something off an infomercial. She told everyone that it truly worked. I knew she was right because I also saw that. I’m about to graduate now, and have decided to start exercising again. I have a busy life, but like most can fit 20 min. I don’t doubt that it will work, but it may take a bit longer since I have been out of routine and am getting a bit older. I am 5’4” and 110 lbs, but still want toner areas. I think it should work for that definitely, but I can’t speak for anyone trying to lose weight from it. Probably the diet is a bigger factor in that case. Good luck to all.

March 20, 2008 at 3:12 pm
(419) tobi says:

i found out about winsor pilates when i was channel surfing around 2am on a saturday night. it was love at first sight and i immediately saw it as an answer to my prayers.i have since ordered it and i cant wait to start and get toned for the summer, by the way, does it help in eliminating stretch marks also? i have a bit on my back and the back of my knees.

March 21, 2008 at 8:51 am
(420) big al says:

hi everyone, i have ordered my pilates ring from guthie renker over 10 days ago and am still waiting for it to arrive. I don’t need to loose much weight and eat healthy on a regular basis but like some I have spent years upon years doing weight programms, running programms, body pump etc to no avail. Please reinsure me that this does give results!!!

March 24, 2008 at 12:05 am
(421) Miss O says:

Hello All,

I’ve had the Maximum Burn Basics & Fat Burning for about two or three years now. I started it, but my schedule at the time couldn’t handle an extra 20 minutes.

I’m 34, 5’7 and about 240 wearing a size 22/24. Sometimes a 20 when I wear my “Spanx”. When I got married, ten years ago, I was 165 and a size 14. I don’t really need to be 165, I just want to be a size 14/16. Long ago I was a ballerina. No I wasn’t one of the rail thin ones, I was tall and thick. After ballet, I went on to play basketball. A injury to both of my knees have made it almost impossible to to a lot of the high impact aerobics.

I’ve also had a lot of back problems (even during my dancing days). Seven years ago, while attempting to do the 8 minute TaeBo work out, my back went out. Well, I haven’t been able to do it since. So Pilates is now my only hope. I’m a big girl lol… I am trying to also avoid knee surgery. Wish me luck.

March 24, 2008 at 5:52 am
(422) Morganne says:

Hey all!
k so im not a big gurl or anything.. im from NZ an i weigh about 60kg… i just really want to tone my body, especially my hips THIGHS an ass! i think im going to order pilates 2mo, any ideas wat would b best for me?
also… the faty area on my bak.. when i wear tight jeans they make it flop over th top! its frustr8ing! whats best for that??
thanx :)

March 27, 2008 at 12:21 am
(423) lazygirl667 says:

I’ve started the pilates 30 session chalenge. I’ll be tracking my progress at:

http://lazygirl667.blogspot.com/

March 30, 2008 at 7:28 pm
(424) Katie Jean says:

I did Winsor Pilates 4 yrs. ago, watched what I ate and lost 22 lbs.and felt great! Then, I went back to my bad eating habits and the weight came back on. Recently, my Naturopath told me that I should concentrate on Pilates and yoga for my work-outs, and NOT to try any high impact aerobics. So, I’m getting back to Winsor Pilates this week AND getting back to watching what I eat. I’ll be alternating the 60 min. work out and the 20 min. work out. Anyone out there have a work out routine with Wp that you’ve found works well for you? I’d love to hear it! Thank you! I’ll check back to let you know how it’s going.

April 2, 2008 at 7:00 am
(425) Shannon says:

I ordered the Windsor Pilates to see if doing pilates would help with strengthening my lower back. I will tell you that was the best decision I ever made. I haven’t had the problems with back spasms like I used to and the best part of it is that I lost 4 inches in the first two weeks of using it. I am very happy with using Windsor Pilates instead of wasting my time going to physical therapy.

April 4, 2008 at 3:05 am
(426) Rach says:

I’m 25 and have 3 kids. I thought that the only way i would get back to my pre pregnancy body would be to get surgical help but after reading all these comments i am definently going to try windsor pilates. i do have one question though. do any of the workout improve the bust???? It would be great if i could have a perky looking bust again without having to have surgical intervention.

April 10, 2008 at 12:20 am
(427) dan says:

any guys do pilates?

April 14, 2008 at 1:37 pm
(428) Maha says:

Hi, Can someone please list which winsor series they have been using. I have been using the Maximum Burn Cardio for the last three weeks and i have not lost any weight or notice any difference I have been doing that upto 4 days a week. Please recommend.

April 14, 2008 at 4:07 pm
(429) Tina says:

I saw an ad on TV this morning for Windsor Pilates using some sort of circle. I was really impressed by the testimonials and thought about trying it. I must admit, I’ve been a bit tentative but after reading all these testimonials, I’m going to go for it! I am an extremely busy mother of 3 and would love to find something that works for me. This sounds like it. I’ll keep you posted………….

April 18, 2008 at 3:05 am
(430) Kammi says:

Hi! All of you that have lost alot of weight in short a time, have you been on any special kind of diet or do you only watch what you eat?
I’ve been doing pilates for a week now and watch what I eat, but I’m not on any special diet. Can I hope to get good results ( I weigh about 180pounds)

April 21, 2008 at 11:46 am
(431) Tara says:

I bought Windsor Pilates a few years ago. I am not one to stick to a workout routine!! But I love working out with this now! I do not have the circle thing…I bought it when you got the stretch band routine.
I do not know of any guys that do Pilates, though. I did get my husband to try it once because he told me that it looked so easy and it probably doesn’t work. Boy was he wrong! He quit. He has not given me any grief since.
I actually am 9 months pregnant right now. (I stopped when I got pregnant.) I cannot wait to start up again and look like I did before I got pregnant!

April 22, 2008 at 2:12 pm
(432) Laura says:

Hi Everyone :) Im 17 years old, and just started winsor pilates with the sculpting circle, and 50 min workout one week ago. I already feel the affects, and have lost 4lbs! deffinatley carrying on with it, and this website has just motivated me even more

April 22, 2008 at 3:03 pm
(433) Kendal says:

Hey, i just started WP a week ago and have already lost 4lbs! i love the workouts, but find it hard to stay motivated, and keep the calories down. Does anyone have any tips to help me? 5ft4″, 130lb, size 10-12 (England)

Thanks, K

April 26, 2008 at 3:25 am
(434) billnz says:

GUYS CAN DO PILATES TOO…

I have lost 35lbs since November (6 months).
28lbs was with walking and Pilates.

The last 3 months I stopped Pilates but kept the walking. Not nearly as much weight loss, but am still pretty happy as I’m near 200lbs, and didn’t put any back on.

So…
Back to daily Pilates from today (until the end of May). Will post how the weight goes…

April 28, 2008 at 1:52 pm
(435) Vickie says:

OMG… I guess I will have to start doing this. I have had the Windsor Pilates complete set for over a year now and never opened one video! I AM THAT LAZY!!
You all have inspired me to give it a go… I’ll keep you all posted!

April 30, 2008 at 9:46 am
(436) Kae says:

I’ve had the Winsor pilates with circle for a while, and like many other people on here, have not been consistent. This week (Monday) I started a program that seems to be working for me. Every other day I do the 20 minute workout with circle and then power walk for 40 minutes. On the opposite days, I do the 10 minute workout (off the mat) and power walk for 50 minutes. So far, its the walking that’s killing me! I’d like to incorporate the 50 minute workout in there somewhere… its been so long, I’ve lost the book, and don’t remember what it recommended! However, reading all of these posts have encouraged me to continue past today, and continue into tomorrow! Good luck to everyone!

May 1, 2008 at 11:00 am
(437) Regan says:

I did Winsor pilates pretty regularly several summers ago (I was 20), and I was in the best shape of my life. My abs, thighs, and butt have never looked better. Then I went back to school and stopped working out. It’s been about 4 years now of pure laziness, and my body has changed a lot.

I recently ordered the cheapest DVD they have (the 20 minute circle exercise and the accelerated fat burn) and I’ve alternated between then for the past 4 days. These workouts seem very different from the one I did that summer, but I feel a dull ache in a lot of my muscles, so I know it’s working. No results yet, but it’s way too early. I’m combining pilates with cardio and a little weight lifting. I think pilates really rounds out anyone’s workout routine!

May 2, 2008 at 9:57 pm
(438) Melody says:

I agree with Regan, Pilates really does round out your workout. I came to this site back in November which is when I first started Pilates, and my body has completely transformed. I’m in love with the muscles in my legs and arms and my stomach is getting flatter by the day. I have only about 2 inches everywhere until I have my perfect body. I’ve started to incorporate pilates with walking every other day to make sure I tone up the last few areas. Good luck to you all, and just remember that pilates WILL work as long as you are consistent. You’ll be truly amazed after a month.

May 3, 2008 at 10:25 am
(439) Stacy says:

I love Windsor Pilates. I’ve had it for awhile but always struggled finding the time to do it. Recently I decided to try it again and I’m addicted. It works every part of your body and the Accelerated Fat Burning DVD is so much fun that the 45 minutes flies by. Trust me, your heart rate is up there during that entire work out. LOVE IT! After three days the back of my thighs are already tighter. I’d give this product 5 stars!

May 4, 2008 at 1:40 am
(440) hannah says:

i am 16 and used to weigh about 123-126. last summer i finally got my weigh down with the help of winsor pilates but then after a few vacations my weight gradually climbed into 130 range and now 140 range that same summer. i have been struggling with my weight ever since. im thinking of going back to pilates because it was the only way i was really able to stay in shape. ive tried about a million different things and i always come back to winsor pilates. id recommend it to anyone. do alternating videos 5 days a week and then some cardio on the weekend, stick to a healthy diet making sure that 50% of each meal you eat is fruit or vegetables,and don’t mix fruit wiht protein.

May 5, 2008 at 2:09 pm
(441) Kaitlin says:

does winsor pilates help tone flabby arms?

May 6, 2008 at 12:03 pm
(442) Laura says:

Hey all, ive been doing winsor pilates for about a month now with the sculpting circle, and the 50 minute fat burning workout, i eat healthier and walk for about an hour a day, in the first 2 weeks i lost 6lbs, however, now i dont seem to be changing or loosing any more … :( if i dont begin to see more changes soon im afraid i will give up. Has anyone else had this? answers much appreciated, thanx x

May 6, 2008 at 2:14 pm
(443) Gwen F says:

Hi Laura, I can kind of relate. I have been doing Winsor Pilates for 4 years now so I have really good ab muscles. It really works. I presently do a 20 minute ab sculpting workout. When I do the circle workout, I can feel it the next day, so I know it is a good one. I gained weight recently, I was too sedentary over winter, and careless with my eating. My present plan is to continue with the pilates workouts, eat according to the meal plan that came with my circle workout, and rev up my metabolism with daily 40 minute walks (I was doing 27 min. treadmill workout once a week), increasing the intensity as much as I can handle. I’m two weeks in to this, and I do see more definition, and I feel more energetic. I am 48, and I notice that at this age, the pounds don’t move too quickly. My advice to you is that you are doing everything right, maybe tweak you diet more. Keep a food journal (when I do that, I find I’v eaten more than I thought), or faithfully follow a balanced eating plan. It realy takes effort, I’ve found, to change my eating habits, but it’s been yummy and satisfying.

May 12, 2008 at 4:38 pm
(444) Gwen F says:

Hi again! Adding increased aerobic activity and eating according to the eating plan that came with my DVD’s is working! I lost 4 lbs in three weeks. I’m 5’2″ and very small boned, so that makes a huge difference! I have 6 lbs to go. Those great abdominal muscles I’ve worked on for so long are really showing. I realize I need to add some hip and thigh work to deal with my inclination to be pear shaped, and what my dear 10 year old son called “jelly legs!” (He didn’t mean it as an insult – he said it innocently)! I think I’ll start with that 20 minute workout that came with the original pkg, it has a good beginner side-kick series. The butt and thigh sculpting CD had me walking in pain the next day! I tried it last week, I must have overdone it.

I feel so encouraged to read all of your stories here. You all really motivate me to stick with it. I think the trick is to stay with it, don’t quit, make it a part of your life. Also eat right, do something active, daily (like a vigorous 40 min. walk), and choose the pilates workouts that meet your unique needs for your body. I think that involves trial and error.

May 14, 2008 at 11:42 am
(445) Amy H says:

I am curious about those who have experienced great success with the Winsor Pilates program. How many times a week do you do Pilates and which tapes are you using? How soon were you able to notice a difference in your body?

I’m looking for the motivation to stick with the program.

May 15, 2008 at 4:45 pm
(446) mildred says:

I’VE TRIED SO MANY exercises that i made up by MYSELF and i’ve suffered 4 a very long time. its been over a year since i looked at m,y reflection n realised i was agly. its been a hard journey n i have gone through depression thoughout this whole journey, i’ve never wanted anything but the body i drean of. i found the winsor pilates and i am tied of trying or these things , am only 15 and i have suffered depression 4 a long time and i just wanna know if Winsor pilate is really going to work for me? or do i still have to suffer everyday with different exercises, i’ve already builded up muscles and i only need the winsor pilate to build my muscles up even more so i feel lighter, more beautiful and all i want and all i’ve dreamt of is 2 b small. to have a small body, small things and stomach with a toned body. IS IT GOING TO WORK 4 ME I’VE ALREADY BUILDED UP MUSCLES? PLEASE ANSWER ME AND HELP ME SHOULD I ORDER IT NOW? SHOULD I ORDER IT NOW? AND IS IT GOING TO WORK 4 ME AND AM I FINALLY GOING TO BE HAPPY WITH WHAT I SEE AND GO BACK TO MY OLD LIFE? PLEASE ANSWER ME ON MY QUESTIONS and i’ll keep you posted on my achievements

May 16, 2008 at 3:17 pm
(447) Gwen F says:

Dear Amy: If you do the workout 3 times a week, you WILL get results. There is that saying about Pilates: if you do the workout 10 times you will feel better, if you do it 20 times you will look better, and if you do it 30 times, you will have a whole new body! I tried that challenge several years ago with the “Accelerated Body Sculpting” workout. It really worked. I stopped that particular workout because we moved and I was very busy, and it is 55 min. long. I was really sorry I did. I think it is the best ever. And it’s easier to maintain than to get in shape! And twice a week would have maintained that fitness level. Even once a week will keep up what you’ve got, in a pinch, but not as well.

Dear Mildred: I feel for you. You sound like I felt when I was fifteen. You can do it. You are worth it. Fitness is a lifetime comittment. We take care of those we love, and we learn to love those we take care of. That includes ourselves. Do it! Your age will work in your favor, because your body will respond to the exercises much more quickly.

May 16, 2008 at 4:42 pm
(448) mildred says:

fanks 4 the comment, my mum just ordered it today, n i ma so happy that i get a chance 2 change my life but i am soo scared if its going to work 4 me , since i am in a dance group and i’ve to perform for the DALAI LAMA, i am so scared about my weight coz i still feel the same but likely i am going to get the chance to try it out 3 days before the day of the perfomance and i hope i can start to feel my muscles building n toning.DO U THINK THIS WILL HAPPEN TO ME?

May 17, 2008 at 6:38 am
(449) Bess says:

I have just bought Winsor Pilates today. I was sucked in by the infomercial. I really hope that it works. I have 2 children aged 2 & 4 and I am heavier now than I was when I was 9 months pregnant with my 2nd. I am done with feeling so gross. So it was inspiring to read all of your success stories. Stay tuned for mine !!! Cheers from the land down under.

May 18, 2008 at 11:31 pm
(450) Humber says:

Hi All,

I hope this will not offend anyone… but I need some advice and this is an issue all of us girls have to deal with. Every time I start exercising and truly get into it, the time comes (once every month…) where Iím dying in bed for few days. Iím not exaggerating here, Iím one of those women who physically suffer through the ďtime of the monthĒ, exercise of any kind is impossible. After few days I slowly get back to normal, but getting back to exercising is a huge challenge. Any thoughts? Any ideas or suggestions? I would be very thankful for any advice. (I do use WP 20 min. circle workout and walk daily for 20-30 minutes)

May 19, 2008 at 3:43 pm
(451) Beth says:

I have been doing the winsor ab sculpting for a month now, every morning faithfully. I have dropped 10 lbs and my waist is shrinking. I love it!Its the only exercise that I don;t get bored of. I am having a really hard time finding her dvd’s in Canada. There isn;t one to be found. I do need some other dvds, any suggestions? It does work , so dont give up. You need to be consistent and you will see results!

May 19, 2008 at 6:07 pm
(452) Kerri says:

For my Canadian friend, you can find the winsor pilates dvds online at shopnorthern.com. That’s where I have been ordering all of mine from, I believe they come from Toronto.

I have been using the accelerated workout, the ball workout, and the 20 minute workout in combination (1 of the videos each day, with two days off a week). I have been at it for 5 weeks now and have lost 10 lbs and an inch or so off everywhere. I haven’t changed my eating habits, nor have I been doing much else on top of that other than walking about 30 mins each day (which I was doing before). I am pretty pleased with the results thus far.

I have ordered more of the winsor pilates dvds and look forward to trying them out! I trust that I’ll enjoy them as much as the ones that I currently have.

May 21, 2008 at 3:13 am
(453) Melody says:

Gwen is right about adding walking to your routine, about 45 minutes a few times a week. Pilates will tone your muscles, walking will shed the extra flab that women tend to carry around the hips, lower abs, and upper thighs..this fat is usually the last to go when losing weight. Walking is a great way to solve that problem, I’m having great results. I’m 19, and when I was 15 or so I was wearing size 18′s. I went to Old Navy today and tried on size six pants that were a little loose. I was very motivated to keep going.
To Amy- I do the Advanced Sculpting Circle dvd as well as the Advanced Power Sculpting dvd. I also incorporate the upper body sculpting, power abs sculpting, and buns and thighs tapes to do some target toning. I have accumulated a sizable collection (through ebay) and it is great to have many choices to alternate between. Stick with it, make it fun, and make it a part of your everyday life. Fitness IS a lifetime commitment. I’m young, and I’m trying very hard to make myself learn that walking and eating well also benefit me in other ways, not just the way I look.

May 21, 2008 at 5:25 pm
(454) beth says:

Hi Kerri,thanks so much. I will try shopnorthern.com. What other dvd’s do you suggest? I am most interested in losing my waist.,.lol Im sure like most of us. I really love pilates, the only exercise that I have stuck too without getting bored. I love seeing the results! thanks beth

May 22, 2008 at 5:28 pm
(455) Kerri says:

Hi Beth. You really can’t go wrong with any of Mari’s dvs I’ve found. My fav so far is the bun & thigh work out but the fat burning dvd is also a lot of fun (although it is more of a cardio workout). You might also like the accelerated workout as it combines a variety of her workouts into one hour-long session. I hope that helps…Best of luck to you!

May 24, 2008 at 12:19 am
(456) confused says:

hi, well um its been like 6 days since ive done the winsor pilates circle, i mean i really do love it and im not THAT fat, im 5’8 snd 147 size 7, wanting to be size 3/4 and 137-5 but i havent seen any improvements, im also a lover of candycandycandy and carbs.

im also in track, but i realy want to loost my stomach, what can i do to speed up the process before victoria’s secret semi annual sale on SWIM SUITS?

May 26, 2008 at 11:55 am
(457) confused says:

oh my goodness! tottally DISREGARD my last question! ive been doin the winsor pilates circle for about a week now, and wow…. i woke up with morning and i COULD NOT stop staring in the mirror, i mean this thing is the SURE THING, i had mcdonalds, bbq, a mc flurry and some of my dads ice cream (i gotta little sweet tooth [; ] and i was sure id be bigger to start with but when i saw i had FLAT stomach i freak out! anyone who HAS NOT gotten it GET IT!, oh and the vitamins made my skin so niice and i have almost TOO much enerygy

THANK YOU MARI!

May 30, 2008 at 2:13 pm
(458) Gwen F says:

Hi again. I’ve stepped up my workout routines for five weeks now. That includes doing the Ab Sculpting workout more than once or twice a week (!) and adding variety that works hips and thighs also, such as the 20 Minute Circle Workout, plus daily (almost) 40 + minutes walks. I have also been following the “win in 10″ eating plan fairly faithfully. The results are quite exciting. Some shorts I bought 3 weeks ago, that I was thrilled to be able to fit in, are now wanting to slide off! I am getting compliments about weight loss, my ‘love handles’ are shrinking, my ‘jelly legs’ are shrinking and I’ve almost lost that pear-shaped look. My tummy is fairly flat. I feel healthy and energetic. I’m not hungry, the eating plan seems to be healthy and satisfying. I’m not doing it all perfectly, but i am trying to be consistent. I think it’s “workin for me!” So far so good!

May 31, 2008 at 6:31 pm
(459) jessica says:

heyy i jsut got the pilates i did the 20 mins n fast burning blast 10 min and the bun n thigh workout for 2 days. i feel tighter. but shoudl i keep doing it. how much will it lose
i need advice email me at cutieblonde_xjk@yahoo.com
i have a month to get leaner. wil lit help ?

June 3, 2008 at 12:54 pm
(460) Melody says:

Jessica, the answer is yes it will get you leaner in a month, definately. But people shouldn’t have such high expectations. I was overweight when I started the program and that was back in November. I saw results very quickly and I still expected to be extra thin in about a month. Obviously this depends on how big you are to start with, but that usually isn’t the case. I’m finally doing my last bit of toning until I’m totally satisfied with my body, but it does take determination if you want to get the results Mari promises.

June 3, 2008 at 6:32 pm
(461) Beth says:

Hi again everyone. I just have a couple of questions. Maybe silly ones, I am having a hard time getting my legs to an 90degree angle, almost there. Any suggestions on what I should do to help. I also cannot do the teaser number 2 on the ab sculpting.Do I just keep at it and I will eventually be able to do it? I have been doing the dvd for a month straight every day faitfully.What am I doing wrong? Thanks beth

June 3, 2008 at 10:12 pm
(462) Melody says:

Beth…listen to EVERYTHING Mari says to do, hold your stomach in and squeeze your butt the ENTIRE TIME that you work out, on any workout. Don’t tense any part of your body, like your shoulders. Relax but be strong..you’ll get stronger. I find that people who worked out before trying pilates have an easier time with it. Is this true for you?

June 4, 2008 at 2:55 pm
(463) Beth says:

Hi Melody, I used to go to the gym but that was awhile ago. I lift free weights 3 to 4 times a week now. My upper body is much stronger than my lower body. Maybe I need to do more exercise do increase my flexibility. I have noticed a huge improvement in my body since I started doing her dvds. Im so happy with the results but I guess I want more . What do you think? Thanks again Beth

June 5, 2008 at 7:32 pm
(464) Jane says:

Hey guys! I just started today, with the circle beginner’s workout. I HARDLY felt anything. I don’t know if I should move on or what (I’ve done pilates before, just not Winsor)

Anyway, I’ll post my results in a week or two. (:

June 7, 2008 at 6:09 pm
(465) lilyx says:

i wanna buy it but there is no such thing in cyprus which is really unfair

June 8, 2008 at 1:35 am
(466) Melody says:

Hi again Beth :)
To strengthen your lower back I would highly recommend buying an ab sculpting pilates workout. Its only about 18 minutes long and it really helps to target your entire body. Also look for the buns and thigh sculpting which is another short easy workout. I got all of my stuff on ebay and they have literally everything you need for pilates- circles, bands, mats, tapes, dvds, and its all cheap. I wouldn’t order through the Winsor websites because I’ve only heard about bad experiences.
Jane, if you have done pilates before and didn’t feel anything from the sculpting circle dvd, you should consider getting a longer, more advanced workout. Trust me, you will DEFINATELY feel those workouts. The workouts with resistance bands are pretty advanced and give you the exact same results as a pilates machine (which is the REAL way to get fast results, by the way). I did yoga for a while before switching to pilates and I also didn’t feel much from the circle workout but I immediately bought something harder and I’m glad I did. The good thing I’ve discovered about Winsor is that no matter how strong you’ll inevitably get, it will still be a challenging workout (especially the resistance band workouts because you can adjust your own resistance).
Anyway…..hope I helped, and good luck to everyone!

June 9, 2008 at 12:55 pm
(467) jessica says:

hey thank you so much Melody for your advice
i weigh 143 and im 15.
i want to get a better body by 3 weeks
i am not ffat or obese jsut a lil chubby in the legs and but.
do i have to do cardio ? or is the 20 min && bun n thigh will work alone if i eat right also?
i lost 3 pounds in a week. but i didnt watch what i eat.
also will the bun && thigh make my butt bigger???
i want my body tighter i feel as if it isnt doing that much work. cua i used ot do weight training n it was harder than this? i just want a longer body n longer leaner legs.

June 9, 2008 at 3:48 pm
(468) Melody says:

Jessica, let me start by saying that what you weigh means NOTHING because when I first started Pilates, I was about 150 (I’m 19, 5’6) and now my body is getting pretty lean, yet I weigh about 154 or 155. Thats only because I’ve built muscle and muscle weighs more than fat. If I cared how much I weighed, I’d be upset! And yes, cardio is definately recommended. I did pilates for about 6 months before I started incorporating daily 45 minute walks and the results are even more amazing. The walking sheds the extra fat that pilates really can’t target, like the lower back. There are no exercises to REMOVE fat from your back and sides- only strengthening exercises. Walking will do it for you, and the great thing about that is that if you do pilates, it kind of speeds up the fat loss. You’ll be amazed if you start walking 4-5 times a week, at least 30 minutes, and doing pilates about 3 or 4 times a week. Eating right is a given because you should do that anyway. The only way fat will stay off of your body is if you don’t put it in…makes sense, right? Obviously you can still enjoy food but portions are very important. Your butt WILL get bigger, trust me. The buns and thighs tightens and lifts and makes a nice, round appearance lol! And I only know this stuff because I’ve experienced it myself. I had no butt, basically. Now i love it. Also, the difference in weight training and pilates is that weight traning gives you big, bulky manly muscles. Pilates will give you a very long, lean sexy look. You’ll be strong but still curvy and feminine. And, weight traning doesn’t improve flexibility, and honestly your core won’t get as strong. Please, take my advice and be very consistent. I’ve lost so much weight and I look and feel great and I owe it mostly to Pilates, and I just want to tell the world and let everyone know it IS possible, you just have to really want it enough to keep going day after day. But soon enough you’ll love your body and be very proud of yourself.
Best of luck to you!!!

June 10, 2008 at 12:11 am
(469) jessica says:

ok thank u Melody. i have a nice butt people say. i dont want it worse tho.
and do u think the pilates will still work if i dont walk ? or do cardio.
how can i make my thighs slimmer too?
wil lthe pilates bun and ‘thighs’ make my legs slimmer.. and longer
.
how much inches and/or weight can i lose within a month or 3 weeks.
i just want to lose maybe 10 pounds but idc bout the weight i want to ‘see’ the results..
i want to lose the inches

June 10, 2008 at 12:10 pm
(470) Jenn says:

Hello everyone….I got the windsor Pilates years ago when the videos first came out …I lost inches but never checked my weight ….well years have passed and inches have come back… I am now a size 14/16.. so I am starting Winsor Pilates I want to see how long it would take to be a solid 14 again and I will report back in two weeks with any progress…

June 11, 2008 at 8:54 am
(471) lacy says:

hey everyone!!
ok well i ordered the wp a few days ago, how long does it usually take to get? and let me tell u, reading ur comments has me so excited, well im turning eighteen this month, and i have gained so so much weight since i havent been working, but what worries me is i really have no way of doing cardio will i still not lose weight?? i am going to watch what i eat, the main thing i want to lose is my tummy everything else is ok i guess, im 5’7 and weigh 160 almost, it has gotten me very depressed im in the double digits now and have never been so depressed my measurements are 45 29 45 but the bottom of my stomach is where all the weight is lol, but i will do the program twice a day if i need too, so can someone please tell me will doing the tapes twice a day and watching what i eat be enough to lose my tummy?? ty!

June 12, 2008 at 6:21 pm
(472) Melody says:

It seems that even though you guys are reading all the comments, you’re still expecting someone to be able to tell you exactly how much weight you’re going to lose in a certain amount of time. No one here can do that….all we can say is what WE did, and how it worked for us. I do pilates about 4 times a week and I do an hour of walking a few times a week as well (people, walking IS cardio…running, biking, kickboxing, whatever makes you sweat and breathe hard!). Doing this routine has worked for me, I have lost tons of weight and lost my belly…it is now flat and my buttocks are firm and well-rounded and lifted, all those good things we want. Now Lacy, as far as what you eat, and what your measurements are…those things don’t determine anything. Again, people have different bodies and none of us are fitness experts, so we can’t tell you exactly what to do. I think this forum is just for people to explain their successes and try to share with others.

June 13, 2008 at 2:03 am
(473) lacy says:

ok thanks well thats basically what i was asking if anyone has the similar situation as me. and i kno what cardio is. well thanks

June 13, 2008 at 9:31 pm
(474) Melody says:

awesome…well i hope you get your package soon and remember- pilates does give you fast results, but for most of us, its still going to take some time to get a “physically perfect” body so whatever happens, just STICK WITH IT and you’ll be glad you did. i can’t stress that enough!!!

June 13, 2008 at 9:51 pm
(475) lacy says:

thanks so much! ya im going to try my hardest to stay motivated i also started taking hydoxycut hardcore and that stuff works!

June 15, 2008 at 1:34 pm
(476) Melody says:

you know, you’re absolutely right about hydroxycut. i took that when i was at my heaviest and lost a lot of bulk fat with that (im just toning now). its the only diet pill ive ever seen that actually works. i tried some stuff a few years ago, i dont remember the name…but it was a diet pill and i took it before work and had to be sent home because of the way it made me feel..i hated it and never took it again. so people, if you want to try a diet pill, try hydroxycut. however, i really wouldnt recommend taking them for too long, just until you lose enough weight and can get into a routine of just working out and eating right.

June 16, 2008 at 12:58 am
(477) jessica says:

Melody. i have a nice butt people say. i dont want it worse tho.
and do u think the pilates will still work if i dont walk ? or do cardio.
how can i make my thighs slimmer too?
wil lthe pilates bun and Ďthighsí make my legs slimmer.. and longer
.
how much inches and/or weight can i lose within a month or 3 weeks.
i just want to lose maybe 10 pounds but idc bout the weight i want to íseeí the results..
i want to lose the inches

June 16, 2008 at 2:35 pm
(478) lacy says:

ya the new hardcore is even better. i still havent got my package :/ should i call and ask u think or should i just wait because it usually take awhile? i ordered it about two weeks ago

June 16, 2008 at 3:37 pm
(479) Melody says:

Depends….did you order the package from the actual Gunthy-Renker company, or through ebay or something? If you ordered through the pilates website (or phone), its going to take a few weeks. I’ve heard people have waited months from that site. I recommend people just go through ebay because it takes just a few days. But there’s no harm in calling and checking up on it.
Jessica, you keep asking me questions I cant answer. Eat right, work out. You will get smaller everywhere. Try the buns and thighs pilates dvd,its pretty good for making thighs slimmer. Again, yes the pilates WILL WORK if you dont do cardio, but you’ll still have leftover fat on your body that can only be removed with cardiovascular exercises.

June 16, 2008 at 4:02 pm
(480) lacy says:

ok thanks so much, ya i did order from the website. i hope it doesnt take months :( lol but thank u

June 18, 2008 at 4:46 pm
(481) Noelle says:

Hello everyone!
I just wanted to add my two-sense! I have just about all of the Winsor Pilates DVDs. When I use them, they WORK! The last year, I’ve become a bit lazy. I’m getting started back up on this tonight. I’ll keep you all posted. But, for those who aren’t 100% sure, just try it. At first it feels like you didn’t do anything, that is until you wake up the next morning and realize all of the muscles that you’ve used. It’s such a great feeling!

June 19, 2008 at 8:59 am
(482) lacy says:

holy cow!! i did half the ab sculpting yesterday and the 20 min circle thing and i was like wat the heck that it? except the ab thing was really hard on my neck. but wow today when i even breath my abs are so so so sore lol which is a good thing, i was planning on doin it everyday but maybe i should wait a day? i may do the buns and thigh one because that part isnt sore. well ill keep posting my results.

June 19, 2008 at 11:41 am
(483) Noelle says:

Lacy,
I alternate the ab sculpting with the buns and thighs. That’s what I did in the past and is what I’m beginning to do again now. It really works. Although the buns and thigh workout doesn’t always make you super-sore, it really, really works! I’d try to alternate between the three of them. You’ll get the best work-out that way.
Good luck!

June 19, 2008 at 3:47 pm
(484) Gwen F says:

Noelle: I think you’re simple workout plan makes sense. I think I will adopt it. You say the buns and thigh workout doesn’t make you super sore..well it does to me!!! But that has made a ‘light go on’ for me. I am probably really weak in that area, which is probably why I always struggle with ‘jelly legs’ and a pear shape (though I am making some progress). And also the reason why I unconscously don’t want to work those areas. Well, I will rise to the challenge and give it a try. I’ll do the pilates challenge: 10 sessions you feel better, 20 sessions you will look better, and 30 sessions you will have a whole new body – in my case – legs, butt and thighs! This may take all summer with my busy life. I’ll try to report back after 30 sessions of the “Bun & Thigh Sculpting” workout. I’ve also thrown in the “Advanced Sculpting Circle.” I’ve added the 20 min. circle workout in the last few weeks, and I’ve been able to move up to the advanced. You really do get stronger! I’ve been taking inspiration from this site and putting in the extra effort for 8 weeks now. Thanks to everyone.

June 19, 2008 at 6:50 pm
(485) Noelle says:

Gwen,
I wish you nothing “butt” the best with the buns and thighs video. I love, love, love that one. It’s over so quickly. I don’t feel it so much when I’m doing it, but I definitely feel it the next day! So, alternating is a must. I hope that that work-out does as much for you as it did for me. It never gets old. I have a hard time breaking the cycle of doing that one. Sometimes if I’m having a rough day, I’ll do that video twice. Good luck!

June 20, 2008 at 4:22 pm
(486) Angie says:

I decided to start using pilates just a week ago. I bought the bun and thigh sculpting video, since that is my problem area and after the first time I did it, I was sore the next day, but haven’t been sore since. I’ve probably done it 5 times in the week. I intend on keeping up with it and also bought the bun and thigh power sculpting video, where you use the resistance band and am going to start doing both videos together. Of course I don’t expect results in a weeks time, but can someone tell me how long it takes to see results? A month or so? Also do most of you feel sore the day after doing the exercise every time you do it? Thanks!!

June 20, 2008 at 5:45 pm
(487) THEY ARE LIARS says:

READ THIS ONE!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

what SHOCKINGLY positive results right? RIGHT! look at the dates that people have replied to this post. i really do not think these videos are SUCH a hot topic that people feel th need to respond to a post like this a couple times a week for over two years. I own these dvds and embarrassed to have supported SUCH A DISHONEST COMPANY.

June 20, 2008 at 6:30 pm
(488) Sally says:

So they didnt work for you THEY ARE LIARS?

June 20, 2008 at 6:34 pm
(489) Jen says:

You know, I’m sure that some of these comments aren’t real. I know companies actually pay people to leave positive comments about their products online. BUT I’m sure NOT all of these are fake, plus, I cannot find one article online that says pilates does not work, or is not beneficial in some way. Unbiased sites at that.

June 21, 2008 at 12:46 pm
(490) Jessica says:

Noelle && Gwen. so u two are saying that the buns && thighs actually CAN make my legs slimmer? because my upper body is fine, just my legs chubby. and it doesnt look good. i have 20 inch thighs i want to get to 18 or 17. how much of the bun & thigh should i do along with the 20 min circle. when should i see results. i get stronger iv done the circle for 2 weeks now

June 23, 2008 at 9:07 pm
(491) beth says:

For the comment you are liars, Im not sure what you are getting at. I am a christian woman and I have been doing winsor pilates since March. If you are consistent and watch your diet , you will see results. I am soo happy with the results and can;t wait to see how I will look in another few months.

June 24, 2008 at 2:19 am
(492) Melody says:

Hi everyone!
To THEY ARE LIARS, I am a real person and I know everyone else is too. The reason we come to this site weekly is to get inspired by the fact that other people across the world share the same issues and I think it’s great that complete strangers can be supportive to one another. I’m sorry that you couldn’t handle pilates which is obviously the reason why you weren’t able to continue, but it isn’t right for you to gather up your bitterness and try to uninspire these people.
And on that note, the buns and thighs workout really is great, lol! Alternating is a really good idea, and you can see results I’d say in about 2 weeks or so. That’s when it will be obviously noticable, you know? I think it does also depend on how strong your legs already are. I think that the weaker you are, the more you lose so that’s actually cool. Good luck again to you all, and to anyone that thinks we aren’t real, you’re an idiot. Trust me, Mari Winsor makes a fortune on her pilates systems. She doesn’t need to pay people to make her stuff sound good. That’s just ridiculous.

June 24, 2008 at 8:50 am
(493) Lori says:

I used the windsor pilates dvd (circle and fat burning), I alternated them everyday and stuck to a low calorie diet and lost 20 pounds in about two months. I weighed 155 then and now I weigh 135. I am using the systmen again in hopes of getting down to 125. Good luck!

June 24, 2008 at 9:14 am
(494) Noelle says:

Let me start by saying that maybe this program won’t work for every single person. Perhaps “THEY ARE LIARS” didn’t have success or may have been doing it wrong. That does NOT mean that it won’t work for the rest of the people who use the Winsor Pilates.

Now, Jessica – I have had great success with the Hips, Buns, & Thighs video. I do it at least 3 times a week. And yes. My butt is looking better, my hips are smoother, and my thighs are slimmer. It doesn’t happen overnight, but it does work. You need to give it at least 2 weeks to start really showing. Good luck with it. If feels so good when someone notices the changes in your body!

June 25, 2008 at 4:36 pm
(495) sarah says:

I bought the dvds about three years ago and have gotten the follow up workouts when they have come out. I started actually using them about a year ago and my boyfriend wanted to know what I was doing to stay in shape. I told him about the dvds and he didnt believe me. I finally convinced hm to try it with me one day and after the first few minutes he was horrified to learn that there were quite a few excercises on there that I could do and HE could not!! He and I have been using the dvds to work out ever since and both of us could not be any more pleased with the results:-)

June 26, 2008 at 10:11 am
(496) Katie Jean says:

Ok, I wrote in March that I was starting back on my walking and Winsor Pilates. Life got busy and I got as far as my walking. So, it’s a start…I walk 4 miles every morning, it takes me an hour, and I wear a Heart Rate Monitor and stay in the fat burning zone. NOW, I have to get back to the dvds. I am 5’3″, 180 lbs., and need to lose at least 40 lbs. Is there anyone out there who WAS in my position and lost the weight? Please tell me which WP dvds you used, what worked for you, etc. I know everyone is different, but I found myself in a rut with just the 20 min. work-out and the 50 min. work-out (when I used these 4 yrs. ago.) I think back then I must have gotten bored with the two work-outs and stopped using them. I look forward to any and every tip offered! Thank you! (Also, I am following the Zone Diet, suggested by my naturopath.) Katie Jean

June 28, 2008 at 12:52 am
(497) zorica says:

it is important to look at what you eat, and yes they may be redundant videos but look at it this way it is even worse to go to the gym and do redundtant exercises…this is a great workout give it at least 2 weeks

June 29, 2008 at 4:53 pm
(498) sue says:

Hi,Going to start 20min workout tomorrow.I have lots of aches and pains eg lower back pain, stiff painful neck so i am hoping wp makes me more toned and supple.I am 52years old,hope i get the same results as some of you youngsters!I will keep you posted

June 29, 2008 at 11:56 pm
(499) mare says:

i bought it a month ago and i was so happy with it but on the third day and while i was practicing,i hurt my knee and since that time iam unable to practice any more,but iam waiting to get better in order to use it again because i really liked it.

July 1, 2008 at 4:37 pm
(500) Wendy says:

I have had the system for a few years. I used to swim to keep in shape, but moved out of my apartment into a house and left the pool behind. :( Since then, I’ve had another child and am trying to find the time to get back into it. I’ve done the beginner circle once and after I was finished I thought about doing another video, but then remembered how sore you can get the next day. The soreness wasn’t so bad, so tonight I think I’ll try two different ones. Wish me luck!

July 6, 2008 at 6:08 am
(501) ecstasy1692 says:

hello!
im using te ab prog more often then the other ones,cuz i wanted to rid off the belly.and i did it!yayyy
im at the 7t session!i cant wait tosee myself when i’ll be at the 30th session.ummmmm

but ‘thights&buns’prog…i’ve used it a few months ago..and my thights&butt wore very different:>in the good way!
but i dont want a bigger butt…i really dont.and i dunno what to do..im using this prog too…but..im afraid…i hope my butt will be smaller…

what about u,guys?

kisses and ood luck!

July 9, 2008 at 7:50 pm
(502) Su says:

Hi everyone,

Itís really uplifting and motivating to read your comments and experiences with Windsor pilates. I am so glad that I discovered it 3 years ago. Nearing the age of 30, I knew that I had to start changing my lazy habits or end up being unhealthy and unhappy. I Tried lots of gym routines and diets like atkins but pilates really got me moving in the right direction to make changes to my life and how I live it.
When I started, I noticed the difference in my body very quickly, within days in fact. I noticed that I was stronger, more toned, more flexible. My posture is sooo much better now. I sit up straight without thinking about it whereas before I used to slouch a lot which caused back pain. All gone! And yes, after a few weeks of doing it, other people noticed it. Someone even asked me if Iíd had surgery because they couldnít work out how my muscle definition around my abs were appearing so fast!
I find that doing cardio workouts with pilates is a definitely a great well rounded combination as someone said before. I recently discovered Turbo Jam and do the 45 minute cardio and/or 45 minutes windosr pilates. Everyone has noticed a dramatic difference again! I think my body needed a change of routine and itís definitely worked. I am trying to get my friends and family to do it too. Itís made a huge difference to my body. Iíve gone from a UK 14 to almost an 8. Something I NEVER dreamed I could achieve.
I also started the raw food diet last November (worth checking out what a difference THAT makes -http://www.shazzie.com/raw/transformation/), eating 80% raw food. Thatís just a personal thing. Windosr Pilates+Turbo Jam+Raw food diet is perfect for me and it is a great journey everyday.
Good Luck to everyone and wishing you good health in mind, body and spirit.

July 19, 2008 at 12:23 pm
(503) Katie Jean says:

I did it this week! I got back to doing my Winsor Pilates dvds! Yay! I am still walking 4 miles every morning (1 hr.) and then I immediately do a WP work out. I’ve got a stack of them, so I just started doing the first one on the top of the stack. Then, I move it to the bottom of the stack and do the next one the next day. One work out I’m not too pleased with it the Accelerated Fat Burning work out. It’s all standing and dance moves. After doing an hr. of cardio (my 4 mile walk) I’m really ready for some mat work and not this. So, I think I’ll just skip that work out in the mix. I’m already feeling so much better! I have noticed that I find it easier to get off the couch, get up from, sitting on the floor, etc. I’m using the Winsor Pilates Work-Out Journal as well. I’ll check back in to let you know what my progress is…just wanted to share! Thank you for listening!

July 22, 2008 at 4:44 pm
(504) Trice says:

I started the Win10 Challenge today. Having difficulty with the calories intake count but otherwise so far, Day 1, was good. I did the 45 minutes Workout and my 10 min walk. :-)

Looking forward to tomorrow!

Anyone else on the challenge?

July 27, 2008 at 4:17 am
(505) Ros says:

Just seen the advertisement for Windsor Pilates and have logged on here. Most comments are very positive – maybe too good to be true! Is someone from Windsor writing them?

July 28, 2008 at 10:42 am
(506) Susie says:

I’m 49 years old and over the past 10 years gained 55 lbs. I would start a diet, and walking exercises (it seemed every other month)! Then I would binge and go back to my old ways. My friends would say menopausal women have a hard time losing weight. Well I’m here to say you can loose weight. In April of 2008, I started to do pilates (the circle) and cut out sweets and bread, I also cut out cream in my coffee and tea (I just take it black). I would do the pilates on Mon, Wed, & Friday. I would walk on the treadmill for 45 min on Tues, Thurs, & Saturdays. Sunday was house cleaning day. I have lost 40lbs in 4 months. This is the first time something has worked for me. Imagine, starting a diet every month for the last ten years. Pilates worked for me. I’m no longer embarrassed to go places. I want to loose another 25lbs by Thanksgiving, I have no doubt that I will.

July 28, 2008 at 5:50 pm
(507) Joanne says:

Susie,

Congrats on your great success! I just turned 40 and I am finding it hard to get these stubborn pounds off so your story is inspiring to me:). Could you tell me which of the circle workouts you are doing and for how long? I am doing the regular Winsors (the original tapes_ without the circle and am wondering if I would be better off switching to the circle workout instead to get me out of my plateau? Also, at what pace on the treadmill are you walking? I usually try to do between 3.3 – 3.7 but am not sure if that is fast enough or not. Thanks for your help:).

July 30, 2008 at 1:35 am
(508) candy says:

HI EVERYBODY
I HAVE ORDERED THE WINDSOR PILATES TOTAL WORKOUT AND I AM SO EXCITED.. I CANT WAIT UNTIL IT COMES BUT I HAVE A FEELING IT ISNT GOING TO WORK FOR ME :( CAN ANYBODY TELL ME HOW LONG IT TOOK THEM TO LOSE WEIGHT ? BECAUSE I AM GOING ON HOLIDAYS IN JANUARY AND REALLY WANT TO LOOSE WEIGHT BEFORE THEN! PLEASE HELP ME…

July 30, 2008 at 4:54 pm
(509) Gwen F says:

Candy, it really will work for you. The trick is to stay with it, faithfully. You are very realistic about wanting to be in shape by January. You can have fantastic results by then. Find an eating plan you can stick to, one that you can incorporate into your lifestyle in the long run. I have used the one in the program, and the pounds are melting off. I also visit this site often to get encouragement and inspiration. Give it your best!

July 30, 2008 at 11:50 pm
(510) Hopeful Girl!! says:

I’m a sixteen year old girl that weighs 220 lbs and is 5 feet 7 inches =[

About a year ago, my father fell ill and died. This took a huge toll on my confidence, soul, and my body. I started eating like crazy, and gained so much weight.
I weighed 138 lbs before he died, and I loved my body. Now it’s completely transformed, and I don’t know what to do.

My mom bought the WP series about 3 years ago, and I just found it today. I’m going to use it, and see if it helps me.

I want to loose weight, but I also want to feel healthy and happy again. I really hope this works!

All of these success stories have really encouraged me to start living my life again. I can’t wait to start tonight!

I’ll post updates to let you all know if it works for me as well as it has for all of you!!

July 31, 2008 at 12:38 am
(511) candy says:

THANKYOU GWEN. . . I WILL GIVE IT MY BEST AND I AM GOING TO USE THE EATING PROGRAM THAT COMES WITH MY PILATES. WHEN IT ARRIVES I WILL GIVE IT AGO AND KEEP POSTED AND LET YOU NO HOW I GO. THANKS AGAIN

July 31, 2008 at 8:17 am
(512) Trice says:

Hey

Ros I have to say that I was like you at first and wondering if that was really true but then I tried winsor pilates for myself and WOW. I am on the last day of the 10 day challenge (Win in 10) and well, the results I great. I am actually smaller than I usually am when I reach this weight. I managed to fit in a dress I bougth over a year ago and never managed to zip up until now. For one I am impressed and glad I was off sick on that monday so that I could see the informercial and made the impulsive decision to buy it. Also I can’t wait to get my next DVD so that I can diversify my exercises. :-)

Another way I can see a difference is in what I can do, in the 45 min workout there’s a mat exercise I couldn’t do adn thought I would never ever be able to do. Well, yesterday I did it! True it was with help supporting my back with my hands but when I started I couldn;’t even do that! :-)

One last thing, I hope this is allowed on here, if it is not apologies. I was looking for a support group and this one had gone a bit quiet so I wasn’t sure if people were still using it so I created one on Facebook so if any of you are on Facebook and want to drop by search for Winsor Pilates. :-)

Bea

August 2, 2008 at 2:14 am
(513) Jill says:

I too have the problem of the thin upperbody and a bigger lower body. I am not big but I would say I’m not nicely in proportion. I have a small frame but bigger thighs and bigger calves, which I absolutely hate

So I’ve started with WP, hopefully I will get results too! I will post in 4 weeks!

August 2, 2008 at 8:40 am
(514) Trice says:

Hi Jill,

I would say it will definitly trim your lower body. I can see difference in parts of my body which usually get smaller last! lol! :-)

Good Luck!

August 2, 2008 at 12:49 pm
(515) Hopeful Girl!! says:

Yay!
I just started last night, and I can feel the muscles in my thighs getting tighter!

I’M SO EXCITED!!!

August 3, 2008 at 6:54 am
(516) Trice says:

I have reached a plateau and not really loosing weight. One day I’ll be loosing then the next I gain 1 lb or 2 then I loose them then put it on. :-( Any advice?

August 3, 2008 at 3:52 pm
(517) Krissy says:

This program is simply amazing! When I was in high school, I did Winsor Pilates in conjunction with running and lost a total of twenty pounds. The weight came off easily because I led a sedentary lifestyle prior to that.
When I went away to college, I had a very busy schedule and rarely broke out my Pilates tapes or DVDs. However, I have been experiencing tightness in my shoulders and back recently, so, I’ve broken the DVDs out again and feel so much better. My posture is improving and I know that my muscle tone will be better in no time. I feel so much more energized and am thrilled to have started the program again.

August 3, 2008 at 4:25 pm
(518) beth says:

Hi Hopefull Girl, just wanted to say Im sorry for your loss and I can understand somewhat about eating to help ease the pain.I also lost my husband 4yrs ago and had also put on quite a bit of weight for me.
I have been doing winsor pilates since March. It really does work, but you have to be consistent and watch what you eat. I do her dvd’s every morning. I have lost 15lbs and im so much smaller than I was. I am now getting compliments all the time. Just be patient and dont; give up. I wish you all the best of luck and please keep us updated. Beth

August 8, 2008 at 2:41 am
(519) sarah says:

hi i am a 16 year old girl and i weigh 85kgs and very depressed about my weight people call me fat and i get really upset about it! i got my windsor pilates yesterday and i have started using it and excited that it is finally here… i will let u no how i go

August 8, 2008 at 6:07 am
(520) Trice says:

Hey Sarah, sorry to hear you are depressed abotu it. Stick to Winsor Pilates and you’ll soon see the difference. :-) Keep up posted.
Good Luck.
b

August 9, 2008 at 4:15 pm
(521) Natascha says:

It really works, it is great.

August 30, 2008 at 4:21 am
(522) Hopeful Girl!! says:

I have lost 15 lbs, and lost 5 inches on my hips, and 3 inches off my waist!!

This thing really works!
I can’t wait to go to Cabo in December and show off my new body!

Thanks for the support by the way Beth!
I’m glad there’s someone out there that can relate to my story!

September 1, 2008 at 10:26 am
(523) Lorrayne says:

Hi,

I’m from the UK and found myself watching the infomercial at 2am last week. Deciding that I really needed to do something about my 5’2″ 170lb ‘figure’ I have ordered the dvd’s with the circle and having read all the comments on here, I can’t wait to receive it and start the programme.

I am 53 years old, so hope it will work for an old bird :-)

Will let you know how I get on.

September 3, 2008 at 1:39 pm
(524) Gwen Wiebe says:

Lorrayne: all the best to you. I am 48, and i can’t think of a better exercise for this stage of my life. I have to round it out with a healthy eating plan and about 40 minutes of brisk walking. It does work. The biggest challenge for me is staying consistant. This last summer was so busy with the kids at home, we went on holidays, and I worked a fair bit. Does anyone have advice for how to stay with it during the busy times when time and energy and will power are limited?

September 3, 2008 at 7:06 pm
(525) Erin says:

I have been using Winsor Pilates for a little over a week now, while eating regularly because I do not want to follow the Pilates meal plan because I want to find something that I can stick with long-term. So far, I have not experienced any weight loss or extreme loss of inches like many are reporting. I have actually gained weight and I am wondering if this is because of my new muscle? I do see a bit of a difference though: my stomach is tighter and more toned and some areas are firmer. I have lost little inches though. I am alternating the 20 min and accelerated body workout every other day. I am wondering if anyone has been in my position or if someone could offer me some advice on why I am not seeing huge results or what I should be doing? I want to lose weight and inches but I am not seeing amazing results yet and I am close to giving up or slacking off. Please – if someone could help and give me some advice, it would be so appreciated!

September 4, 2008 at 12:34 pm
(526) yvonne says:

I have just brought the starter pack I am 23 and am unhappy with my body shape, I am not bothered about weight gain or loss as much just want to be able to look in the mirror and smile, I have been struggeling with my weight ever since leaving school and learning to drive, last year i managed to get my body shape back and felt comfortable with myself, unfortunately I dislocated my knee and was in bed for three weeks feeling sorry for myself eating a lot of dominos pizza, after that there was strictly no excersize for a while and well i piled on three stone,i think thats about 40lbs, the main thing that works for me when getting fit and losing inches is plenty of water excersize and sensible food, but no silly diets I wont starve myself. befor i dislocated my knee i was going to gym class’ 3 times a week and working up a right sweat, but the best class I did, the one i noticed the most change in was Core stability which i think works on many of the same principles as winsor pilates so i have got my fingers crossed hoping this will be as effective.

oh and I am a very scepticle person when it come to telly shopping, and par of me does believe that all these comments have been put here by the company them selves, so we will see and I will report back.

sorry for the long rambeling post.

September 4, 2008 at 2:23 pm
(527) Gerri says:

I am 50+, walk for exercise, but need quite a bit of toning in arms, buns and inner thighs. I would like to try Pilates and wonder which of the video’s would be most beneficial for these areas.

September 4, 2008 at 3:10 pm
(528) Emmma says:

Hey im 14 and from the uk and i watched the tv ad for Windsor Pilates but my mum wont get it for me because of the extra dvds a month. Does anyone know how to cancle them without a fuss?
I am 10 stone 7 and am the biggest of all my friends … i hate my hips and thighs!

Please Help! xxxx Thanks

September 5, 2008 at 11:25 am
(529) Kendal says:

Hi Emma, i too had the same problem with the extra DVD’s a month, but you are able to deny this offer if you want and just take the advertised set, if you cant be bothered with the fuss of that (like me lol!) you can just order it all from ebay, they have great winsor pilates deals and its all cheaper than the TV as well
Good luck :)

September 6, 2008 at 9:52 am
(530) Emmma says:

Hey! Thanks Kendal :)
Very helpful xx

September 9, 2008 at 3:52 pm
(531) Nazia says:

FREE PILATES FREE on the google site.

Type in “pilates” and click on video and boom you have the winsor pilates.Why pay for it when its free.CONSISTENT WORKOUTS WILL GET YOU THE RESULTS.

BELIEVE ME IT WORKS..all the celebrities are doing it..It works but you have to understand everyone has a different metabolism, while some can eat junk and still do pilates and still lose but on the other hand some people have to eat healthy and in combination with pilates lose weight.

September 11, 2008 at 7:11 am
(532) Lorrayne says:

Lorrayne (523) is still waiting for her dvd’s to arrive and where I was so fired up before about starting the exercises and trying to emulate all of you successful people on here, I am becoming quite disheartened by the wait.

Hopefully continuing to read all of your success stories on here will keep me motivated until I can start.

September 13, 2008 at 5:48 am
(533) Emma says:

Has anyone experienxed the circle breaking? i havnt got it yet but was just wonderingig if can snapped?
Please comment!

September 17, 2008 at 4:09 pm
(534) Beth says:

Hopeful Girl, Wow good for you!!Winsor pilates does work and I swear by it. In march of last yr , I weighed 142lbs, the heaviest I had ever been in my life. I started her dvd’s and watched my calories. I am down to 124 and went from a size 11 to a size 6. I dont; miss a day! I love it , love it , love it! Please keep the faith everyone ! If you are consistent you will see amazing results. It took about 4 months for people to start giving me compliments, so don;t give up.The results are worth it!! All the best to you all and keep us updated.

September 18, 2008 at 4:11 pm
(535) Trice says:

Beth – which DVDs are you using and how often do you do them and for how long? I am finding that I love them but I am getting bored with the same routine but I am not finding new ones in the uk :-( Any advice?

September 19, 2008 at 5:52 pm
(536) beth says:

Hi Trice, I am also in need of some new dvd’s. I do the 2o minutes ab sculpting 4 to 5 days a week and on the weekends her accelerated body sculpting for a hour. I live in Canada and you just can;t go to the mall and buy her dvd’s. I think someone mentioned shopping on ebay and for me shop northern.com. I heard her buns and thighs dvd was good. Which dvd’s are you using right now? How much success have you had? I know about the getting bored as I need something different now as well. I am most interested in taking it off my waist and flatten my stomach. Let me know and maybe we can talk about which dvd’s are good and what I should be looking for also? Best of luck

September 20, 2008 at 12:53 am
(537) Georgia says:

I’m going to start now. I want to be able to wear a bikini! =D I’ll alternate between twenty minute workout and the accelerated one, since people here seem to like that plan… I’ll keep updating :]]

September 21, 2008 at 3:53 pm
(538) khaiming says:

I am 26 and have been out of shape since my son was born i have always wanted to do something about it but have always found an excuse for my laziness. But this morning, while i was playing with my son, he came and pinch my belly and sterted flapping it like a pancake!!! I know it’s time to get back in shape. does winsor pilates really work???

September 22, 2008 at 7:18 am
(539) Yvonne says:

Hello, every one I ordered my starter kit at the begining of september and I was really excited but I have still not recieved it and the excitement is drifting, I phoned up the orderline again they said they have had stock issues in the last month and are placing the order again for me. so hopefully I will be able to report some good news too.

September 22, 2008 at 7:40 am
(540) Emma says:

WOW i just got my WP pack in the mail today and i am so excited about it and more so now after reading what it has done for you guys iam very over weight but i dont care because i have been on a weightloss road now for a few short months and i know that i wont be this was foreva… cant wait to try WP…

September 22, 2008 at 11:46 pm
(541) Desperate in Dallas says:

I am a mother of four and only 28 years old…having said that, I look at my body and feel shame that I look the way I do. I am 5’4 and clock in at 200 lbs. My husband speaks words of love over me daily but in disgust of myself, I feel unworthy to accept them.
My birthday is in a little over a month and I wanted to lose some of the weight that I had gained during pregnancy number four. I want to lose 20 lbs…shooting for the moon!
But I am willing to give Winsor 30 days, pretty much all I have until my birthday, to see if all this really works.
To ‘They Are Liars’, I am a sceptic as well, but I figure what do I have to lose expect pounds. I want to look in the mirror and see the woman that my husband sees, that’s not too much to ask for, right? I will be checking back in weekly to give updates…if not for anything else than to just simply have some accountability.
Hoping and praying and ready for a change.

September 23, 2008 at 5:47 am
(542) Beth says:

To desperate in Dallas, Wishing you all the best of luck.If you really set your mind to it, you will see results. Don;t expect it to work overnight It takes dedication and consisentcy. Within a month you will see that you are losing inches.
Try not to get frustrated when the exercises seem hard. Believe me when I started, it was pathetic to say the least. And now 6 months later, I am so flexible.
Please keep us updated. Good luck

September 26, 2008 at 8:01 pm
(543) Sara says:

i am a huge fan of winsor pilates. i noticed a comment from a while ago asking about buying it without a credit card or checking account– check out EBAY! it’s usually always listed on there. i downloaded some from the internet as well. it really does work. i stopped doing them for a long time and (horribly) i regained all the weight that i had lost (70 pounds approx). my suggestion: once you notice a difference, keep it up. once you’re at your goal weight, keep doing at least the 20 minute one every day of the week for maintenance. people act like it’s hard to get time to work out but come ON! get up 20 minutes early and do the quickie workout. you will feel fierce and ready to take on the day.

September 29, 2008 at 9:52 pm
(544) Tascha says:

Aloha,
I totally forgot I order the WP series and came across them last night. I’m motivated after reading all the positive feedback so I will officially start tonight with my 15 yr old daughter and check back in next week. I plan to jog/run for 20 mins in conjunction because my job requires it ;o)Good luck to all that are starting and Congratulations to all are doing well and loving it. I would love to love an exercise routine so wish me luck.

Mahalo

October 4, 2008 at 4:17 am
(545) Emma says:

I got mine today …. :)
I hope it works!
i guess i’ll report back to tell you if any results :)

October 4, 2008 at 10:40 am
(546) Molly says:

What one is the best?
because i thought that the 20 min workout was not as good as everyone here said it would be.
bit dissapointed.

October 5, 2008 at 3:44 pm
(547) Emma says:

I can touch my toes after doing WP Circle twice! :)

October 6, 2008 at 11:24 am
(548) jessica k. says:

i got the winsor pilates set like in march and i used it for about a month but i dont think i did it right because some of the excesizes i couldnt do like in the advance circle thing. actually it was like 2-3 weeks not a month. i still have the whole set and Jenny ur 17 ? r u sure it worked. which excesizes did you do? just the circle workout??? because i really want to lose fat on my legs everything else is fine. and what do i eat? this isnt only for jenny anyone please help. how long would it take?

October 6, 2008 at 11:27 am
(549) jessica k says:

sorry im not saying my stomach and arms are fine they are a lil flabb. but i can live wit it like at the beach i can show it i have a gut but yeah i more focused on the legs . but Jenny tell me exactlyy what u did i sound despirate i kno i just always was fooled by fads n shyt.

October 6, 2008 at 5:06 pm
(550) Julie says:

Winsor Pilates rocks!! It is easy. You don’t work up a sweat, so you can do it any time. You will immediatley notice an improvement in your energy level. Your flexibility and posture will improve very quickly. Say good-bye to back fat (those little rolls around the bra strap). I recommend it to everyone…. young or old, fit or fat. It is truly amazing… results are noticed by everyone around you before you realize the improvements yourself!

October 6, 2008 at 5:21 pm
(551) Emma says:

What one do you use Julie
:)

October 7, 2008 at 12:20 pm
(552) angela says:

I am 44 years old and I have been using the Winsor Pilate Dvds for 6 years. If they didn’t work, I would have stopped after 6 months. I am a fan!

October 7, 2008 at 3:50 pm
(553) Lauren says:

Ok, so everyone who is saying i lost all this weight within a week, sorry I don’t believe it. Yes, Winsor Pilates is amazing, but its not a miracle weight loss solution, I don’t think any workout is a miracle. The key to losing weight is not dieting and working out like crazy for a few weeks. The key is changing your lifestyle, eat in moderation, and stick to a workout you can enjoy. Another thing, when your trying to lose weight, don’t use a scale and don’t set a weight goal. Judge your weight by how you feel and how you look, not by how the numbers are telling you you look. I’ve been working out for a few months now, mixing cardio and pilates. I feel great about myself, my confidence has gone way up, but I honestly don’t know my weight, and I’m glad I don’t. Muscle weighs more than fat. Good Luck evrybody!!

October 7, 2008 at 4:29 pm
(554) Yvonne says:

hello everyone, I have just received my winsor pilates circle dvd package, my work out routine starts tomorrow but I had a sneaky go at the 10 min blast and I feel good, so here are my measurements and I will keep you posted on how its all going,

height = 5″ 6′
weight = 12st 4 lbs
waist = 111 cm
hips = 107 cm
thighs = 69 cm
calves = 40 cm
chest = 104 cm
upper arms = 32 cm

I am measuring the largest parts of my body so I dont get confused about where I have previously measured.
Yvonne

October 10, 2008 at 5:31 am
(555) Sue B says:

I’ve used winsor pilates and have noticed much better results when I alternated the treadmill and pilates. I definitely see a change in my body shape but I am still waiting to firm up my arms. I’ve always had nice skinny arms but now I’m in my forties they have become flabby and dimply. I am struggling to stick to exercise long enough to see toning and firming in the arms. Has anyone had success in firming up flabby, dimply arms. I would really appreciate a response.

October 11, 2008 at 1:41 am
(556) Amanda says:

I lost 37 pounds on the John Thurman 30 day body makeover. I started going to College, and got sidetracked and stopped loosing weight, I am so lazy when it comes to working out. So I started buying Richard Simmons DVD, Yeah I would sweat but I didn’t feel much satisfaction because it really wasn’t doing much for my muscles, which I needed because of all the excess skin from the weight loss. I usually lift weights, and do sit up’s on a big exercise ball, I remembered my mother ordering the Winsor Pilates DVD set with the sculpting ring awhile back I recently found them and OMG after the 20 minutes I felt great, and I felt soreness in my arms and my stomach from the muscles being worked out, I will definitely try doing this routine 3 times a week for 20 minutes.

October 12, 2008 at 10:56 am
(557) momof2 says:

Hi
I am a 32 year old female and weigh about 175lbs at 5’7.I have recently started to exercise by walking 5 miles at least 5 mornings out of the week.I want to add to this the pilates,but I don’t know which ones to start with.Can anyone give me any advice?My main areas that I would like to focus on are the stomach,butt,thighs and arms(pretty much everything).Any suggestions would be greatly appreciated.
Thanks

October 16, 2008 at 12:04 pm
(558) Lissa says:

Hey momof2! I just wanted to let you know that Mari Winsor just came out with a new video called Pilates for Pink. It’s a great new workout that includes a resistance band that really helps tone up every part of your body. I always felt that the earlier videos didn’t target the arms. This one definitely does! On a side note, one dollar of the purchase goes to the Breast Cancer Foundation, so not only will you be helping yourself, you’ll also be helping others! Good luck!

October 18, 2008 at 12:19 am
(559) momof2 says:

Thanks Lissa

I am gonna try to find them at my local Target this weekend and I also plan to check Ebay!Can’t wait to get started!!!!!!

October 19, 2008 at 6:17 pm
(560) marinabug says:

Where is Desperate in Dallas? I want to hear how you are doing?

October 21, 2008 at 8:49 am
(561) Flossy says:

I have just recieved my pilates in the mail. Ive tried them out and they seem to be doing something, I can feel every muscle in my body. I was just wondering if anyone had any other suggestions of a way i can lose wieght. Im doing her fat burning workout and the sculpting one as well and also walking nearly every day or when i have spare time.

October 21, 2008 at 8:59 am
(562) gem86 says:

Hey
Im 24 yrs old a used to be pretty thin and then i started going out with my boyfriend and put on about 24 kilos (which is heaps):(
So i saw the add for winsor pilates on the TV and i thought id give it a go, i can now feel every muscle in my body just after 3 days of doin the pilates. I do the fat burning workout and the sculpt workout as well and also walk about 3k about 4 days a week. I was just wondering if anyone else could give me any suggestions.
Thanks…

October 23, 2008 at 2:41 am
(563) Mary Semeatu says:

Hi there pilate people….

I am a very huge size 20-22 female who is in so much need of help of losing a lot of weight. I was told that pilates might work for me. But don’t know if I should buy it??? Can someone help me out please, I’m desperately in need of someones help…thank you.

October 23, 2008 at 12:51 pm
(564) Terri says:

I am also a very huge 20-22 female. I bought and am starting saturday morning. I hope this works.

October 23, 2008 at 12:51 pm
(565) Terri says:

I am also a very huge 20-22 female. I bought and am starting saturday morning. I hope this works.

October 25, 2008 at 1:24 pm
(566) beth says:

Mary and Terry, Best of luck to both of you!Pilates does work but you have to be consistent with it.Be patient too, it does not happen overnight. It took me 3 months before people started noticing and giving compliments. I swear by it. Dont give up when some of the exercises seem to difficult. The more you do it , the more you will be more flexible. As for the weight loss, I just started my watching my calories. The first I did was cut out pop.Dont try to do it all at once, small baby steps.
I found a winsor pilates circle workout at a used store. I have the tape now but no circle.I may have to buy it online because there is not winsor pilates in Canada. Has anyone had succces with her circle workouts? Please let me know how effective this tape is. Thanks so much. Keep up the good work everyone and good luck.Keep us updated. beth

October 26, 2008 at 12:19 pm
(567) surphyn says:

i like to know if i use winsor pilates for 20 minutes work out,will i lose 6lbs in 2 weeks?

November 20, 2008 at 9:39 am
(568) katie says:

I just started pilates today, i am doing alternate days for abs and bun and thigh 20 minute video’s. Also cutting down on food will report back in 7 days to let you know how it’s working.

November 20, 2008 at 11:49 am
(569) Rose says:

I used to be very chunky. About a year I was a size 12, I followed the winsor pilates system religiously and I am now a size 2. I can wear whatever I want now. The thing about winsor pilates is that one must be very consisted and eat wisely.

November 20, 2008 at 1:41 pm
(570) Gabriella says:

Im going to be fifteen in january and i was wondering if i could drop about fifteen pounds before the tenth. will it work? currently im walking and riding my bike three days a week without any difference. will adding the advanced routine help? Im about ten pounds overweight and i hate it! i think ill come back on new years day and tell about my results :) much love gabbie.

November 21, 2008 at 4:11 pm
(571) stacy says:

I bought this set of dvds years ago and never once used them, I found them in the basement going through stuff, I started using them 2 1/2 months ago every other day and I’ve lost 15 lbs from 163 to 148lbs at 5’5″this is the first time I’ve stuck with a work out plan and have noticed a difference other than jogging but I have a bad knee and it seems to strenthen it,The nice thing about this dvd is I can do it in my pjs, Im not stopping I’m moving to the next video now!!! good luck it so refreshing I never want to stop, I’ve never felt better!

November 21, 2008 at 4:19 pm
(572) stacy says:

I wanted to make one more comment, I’m 41 and its very hard for me to lose weight Lately I’ve had problems with my thyroid. I have been keeping a closer eye on the carbs and sugar.

November 23, 2008 at 1:00 am
(573) Chelsea E. says:

Hi I’m Chelsea. Congratulations to those who have lost weight and those who are taking the inniative to lose weight. I am currently a university student with free time on hand. I was in spin class for a month and half and it worked wonders for me but I lost motivation to keep going. I’ve found this randomly and felt encourage after reading review after review. I am 5’0ft weighing 145, but I don’t look it completely.

I just really hope this would work out for me because I am going to purchase my tapes sometime this following week. I want to look fierce by time spring comes or spring break either or lol next year.

Have a nice day everyone.

November 23, 2008 at 8:05 am
(574) Madison says:

Hey everyone,
Im 24 yrs old and wiegh about 106kg. very depressing. About a yr ago i wieghed about 85kg and i have slowly put on wieght since i have been with my boyfriend. About a month ago i purchased winsor pilates and haven’t seen much of a result. I do the 20 min work out 3-4 times a week and i walk my dogs every morning, but going into summer i thought i would start swimming. I also eat healthy, i have cut out soft drinks and chips, can any make any suggestions of what else i can do??
Help????????
Madi

November 23, 2008 at 3:08 pm
(575) Annie says:

Hey,

I’m 17 years old, 5 ft. 2 inches and I weigh 103 pounds but for some reason, I have a tummy that won’t flatten. You can notice it easily and I want it to go away before I go to college. I play tennis for school and I run at least 2 times a week but its still there. After reading these reviews I decided to try winsor pilates but I’m not sure which DVDs to get. Any suggestions?

Thanks!

November 29, 2008 at 3:37 am
(576) Tiffany says:

I’m 25, 5’6 and weigh 193. I’ve gained about 60lbs over the last 3 years. I just borrowed my friends 50 minute. I’m totally inspired by the comments I’ve read. I can’t wait to see changes!

November 30, 2008 at 1:42 am
(577) maria says:

im 16 5’6″ and 148 lbs. ive gained 20-25 lbs this past year. im trying 1 hour (abs, buns and thighs, upper body) every other day and a 1200 calorie diet. i’ll reoprt back to let you know how its working.

November 30, 2008 at 7:03 am
(578) delphine says:

has anyone tried the upper body sculpting video? I just hate the fat in my arms and would like to tone my upper body…

December 2, 2008 at 4:56 pm
(579) Theresa says:

I have been doing the original Windsor Pilates for a year and I love it. It is the only form of exercise that has really changed the shape of my body. Going to the gym daily for an hour and a half doing weights and cardio didn’t give me the results that Pilates has given me. I am toned and strong and really happy with my body now. I have just ordered the circle series – so excited! I can’t wait for it to arrive because I am sure it will give me even beter results. WINSOR PILATES FOR LIFE!!

December 29, 2008 at 11:39 am
(580) Laura says:

YES!!! I did windsor pilates for about 4 months…I went from a size 14 to 11 in just four months….i really saw the difference in my thighs and butt!

December 29, 2008 at 8:11 pm
(581) Joanne says:

How long did you do it for Laura? Was that 4x a week with the 20 min workout? I have been thinking of trying to do the 50 min workout 4x a week to increase the rate of my weight loss which has been kind of slow at this point.

December 30, 2008 at 4:43 pm
(582) zaichenok says:

Hi, i was really inspired to read all these stories! Hope everyone is working hard. Ive started up pilates again, 10 months after my second baby, if anyone is interested in working on it together, join me on sparkpeople, i started a profile there and a thread asking people to do pilates with me and help each other. here is the link:http://www.sparkpeople.com/myspark/messageboard.asp?imboard=6&imparent=13078713 hopefully i will see you there. (by the way, its free to start ur own page there, to monitor your weightloss.)

January 3, 2009 at 9:29 am
(583) Sam L says:

I’m 20 years old now, but when I was 16 I used winsor pilates at least 5 times a week, and lost 30 pounds over a 2 month period. I was originally 180-185lbs, and I’ve been sititng at 148-150lbs for 4 years now.

I never gained any of the weight back, and loosing it helped me get in the habit or working out more often. Once I reached my goal weight I felt more confident in my athletic ability and started going to the gym and doing more weight baring exercises.

I would have to say the one thing that I like the most about this work out is not only the results I saw, but the fact that you get to lay on the ground for the whole thing. It doesn’t have me aimlessly bouncing around from one move to the other.

January 4, 2009 at 6:25 am
(584) Yvonne says:

Hi am starting pilates today but i came on here yesterday to see what everyone had to say about it, the website zaichenok talks about in her post is really good I had never heard of it untill now and in the past I have paid up to £10 per month for the same sort of thing, http://www.sparkpeople.com the only thing i would change about this web site is that it needs to be made more world wide. But I recomend that you look at it.

January 14, 2009 at 12:05 pm
(585) Mindy says:

I bought winsor pilates last year with the intent i was going to use everyday. For real this time! I hate working out, by the time i get home from work all i want to do is sit on my lazy butt. however i’m tired of having the extra weight and flab i’ve acquired over the years. This past Monday i broke my dvd’s back out. I’m determined to do the workouts everyday. i’m trying to switch it up to keep from being too sore. i’ve done the abs, the circle and the buns and thighs. i can definitely say i feel it the next day. When you do the workouts it doesn’t feel like your doing much at all or that it will make a difference but you WILL feel it the next day. I’m hoping to stick with this and see fast results. I’m planning a vacatin to Mexico in May and i want to look like i did at 20 in a bikini, but better! Right now i’m 5’0″ and fluctuate daily between 117-120 lbs. For those who have been doing it longer, how long did it take to SEE results? Weeks? Months?

January 14, 2009 at 3:23 pm
(586) Nikki says:

if you are trying to loose weight and burn fat: do one of the 22 minute work outs of winsor pilates 4x a week and do 30 minutes of cardio 3x a week and you with a calorie intake of less than 1500 calories a day you will loose 5 pounds a week or more and you will see a differnce in your tone and weight in just one week. I know this from expirence, i lost 100 pounds last year with doing just that, Start it NOW it will work. Winsor pilates is hard to get used becuase its hard but you will see results and get used to it over a few weeks.

January 17, 2009 at 11:14 am
(587) Jessica K. says:

Hello i have a question. alst summer i did some of these pialtes and i didnt stick to it i maybe did it 2 weeks nad i havent seen a difference thats why i stopped. do you think if i do 30-40 mins of cardio (stationary bike) everyday or 6x a week and the windsor pilates circle workout (20 min workout) like 5x a week will i see a diff and will it help? my calorie intake will be about 1,200-1,300

January 17, 2009 at 5:27 pm
(588) Sabrina says:

Hi. I had my WP Sculting Circle delivered this morning. I’ve just done the beginner workout, and i did struggle with some of the exercises – belly got in the way! But I did feel it in my tummy and bum and thighs.
I used to be really fit – workout in gym upto 2hrs, 5 days a week. But, due to one thing or another I have let myself go and have put on about 3 stone last year. I’m out of breath now just running up the stair!
Anyway, I’m gonna give this WP a go and see what happens. I’m praying it will work as i’m really depressed about my size and shape.
Gonna watch my diet and get some walking in too. Will let you all know how i get on.

January 18, 2009 at 11:01 am
(589) jessie says:

i have a question. is it better to do it 4-5x times a week or everyday? because i can do both. are the results the same? or is it better everyday if you want ot lose it faster.. i do stationary bike everyday 30 mins. so help

January 19, 2009 at 12:10 pm
(590) Desperate in Dallas says:

Well it’s me again! And if anyone is wondering, I’m still desperate :(
After I first posted we had a few family tragidies back to back and my health took a side step to everything else going on. But I am back and ready yet again!
Will update with progress!

January 19, 2009 at 9:21 pm
(591) j.k. says:

Desperate in Dallas i remember u from reading your old posts? did u ever start the pilates? and did it work for you until u stopped?

January 19, 2009 at 9:31 pm
(592) JESSICA says:

Hello ALL. I have a question to those who have already did the Windsor Pilates. Which workout should i do to lose the weight and inches? I’v seen a lot of people posting about how great the results were from the 20 min. circle workout? but which one hould i do. i eat healthy and do cardio (bike) 30 min a day. Mostly i want my legs to be skinnier and lose so flab on my tummy it just has a little gut.

January 22, 2009 at 9:08 am
(593) kenya says:

Yes it works.

January 22, 2009 at 10:31 am
(594) Jay says:

I’m just wondering if I can leave comment here freely so that I know all the comments are real. :P

January 24, 2009 at 1:14 pm
(595) suzzy says:

i have a quuestion.. the “bun and thigh workout”..does that help your legs become slimmer? when i do the excersize i dont really feel muscles in my legs or my legs working. i just feel my buttocks alot and the sides of my legs? ….and after the workout i really feel my butt. i have no problem with my butt but i just want to slim down my legs will this workout help. and the circle workout i do the bun and thigh every other day and the 20 min everyday along with 30 min of cardio everyday. help me out

January 24, 2009 at 4:36 pm
(596) Beth says:

Hi again everyone!I haven;t been on in awhile, but that doesn;t mean I have stopped winsor pilates. I haven;t, I still do her ab and bun and thigh dvd every other day. The results have been unbelievable. I set a goal for myself last March and I have surpassed that goal. I am now a size 4 and weigh 118lbs. It was hard work and dedication.Please everyone don;t give up.
Now I have people at work asking me to be their personal trainer lol lol.
Good luck everyone and keep us updated. Be consistent , watch what you eat and it works. I swear by it!!Winsor Pilates for Life!!Beth

January 25, 2009 at 6:15 am
(597) Louise says:

I finally received my winsor pilates kit, and im the process of blowing up the ball. I have about 30kg to lose and will let you know how i go. My partner is away so i am going to try and get fit and healthy..i have two months..will it work?

Goodluck all other starters.

January 25, 2009 at 1:50 pm
(598) DTH says:

Pilates WORKS!!! If you strengthen your core and back then your legs will follow suit. Be sure that your shoulders are relaxed, your belly button is always tucked in and you FOCUS on the muscles you are working. You will see results very quickly. It does not replace cardio, you still need to vigorously exercise your heart!!!!

January 26, 2009 at 12:55 pm
(599) Heather says:

I purchased winsor pilates a couple of years ago. I’d say it works on your flexability, but I never noticed any significant weight-loss associated with it. Nowadays I get more use out of the mat I got with the DVD than the workout itself ^_^

January 26, 2009 at 7:56 pm
(600) Joanne says:

Hi Beth,

Congrats on your awesome success! How many sizes did you go down to get to a size 4 and how long did it take? I have been using the 20 min workout 3-4 days a week and the odd day I will do the hour long one if I am feeling up to it along with trying to do 30 mins on the treadmill 3 times a week. I am not seeing results as fast as I would like. Any suggestions or tips on things that worked for you to get you in the great shape that you are at now would be greatly appreciated:). Your fellow Canadian from Vancouver. Thanks!

January 27, 2009 at 1:10 pm
(601) Sus says:

Thanks to all the great comments, I have been inspired to start the tapes I purchased years ago and never used. I’m so happy I found this site. Thanks again!

January 27, 2009 at 1:40 pm
(602) Chrissy M says:

One word…. YES!

It does work. I do think that a person really does need the push to start but when u get to it… 20 mins feel like 5! So go for it! you have nothing to loose! :)

January 27, 2009 at 6:50 pm
(603) beth says:

Hi my fellow Canadian and everyone else across the world!!In March 2008,I weighed almost 145lbs and was a size 9to 11.This was the heaviest I had ever been in my life.I was very uncomfortable in my own skin and decided to do something about it. I researched pilates and started doing a little at a time. I was all over the mat to say the least.I couldn;t do half the exercises.I just stayed true to it,and then I advanced. The only dvd’s I do are her bun and thigh,abs and her accelerated workout.I watched my calories of course.The first thing I did was cut out the pop.It took threee months for people to start to notice.You will see results, if you are consistent and watch what you eat.Pilates has transformed my body.Im never going back to where I was.I soo hope everyone has as much success as I have.Good luck to you all and dont; give up!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

January 27, 2009 at 6:55 pm
(604) beth says:

I am really wanting her circle and her circle dvd. I have been on ebay but can only find the dvd.I know I can shop at shopnorthern.com, but still find it expensive.Please someone help and please let me know how the dvd is and how great the workout is. I can;t wait to actually get it.

January 28, 2009 at 8:16 am
(605) Joanne says:

Hi Beth,

Thanks for your reply and words of encouragement! About the circle and the DVD’s, I have seen far more of them on Ebay.com over Ebay.ca so you might want to try that route. Also try amazon.com too as they have some good deals as well but I have found very good deals on workout DVD’s at Ebay.com and I receive them usually within a week depending on shipping. Good luck!

January 31, 2009 at 2:22 pm
(606) Jessica says:

OMG i lose 2 inches of my stomach! i was 28 and now 26 while sucking in…i measured it jan 5. it was 28 n today i did its 26. jan 5 i started doing my stationary bike and thats it. but 13 days ago i started pilates maybe that speed up ..it help i felt my abs n lower tummy working. just the circle workout is good. i also did some of the bun and thigh since i want to make my legs slimemr but i didnt measure them yet!….

February 4, 2009 at 6:27 pm
(607) traci says:

how many calories does the accelerated 50 minute workout fat burning one burn??

February 5, 2009 at 2:00 pm
(608) Joanne says:

The best way to figure that out would be to wear a heart rate monitor watch that also shows you the calories that you have burned throughout your workout. Everyone’s amount of calories burned will be different as metabolisms and resting heart rates are going to vary. I bought a MIO heart rate monitor at Wal Mart and it was only 35 dollars and is worth the investment so that you stay in your fat burning zone and are burning fat, not carbs or sugar. Good luck!

February 5, 2009 at 5:21 pm
(609) Katie Jean says:

Hi everyone! I can truly say that Winsor Pilates DOES work. At least it does if you watch your food and do cardio. I was very successful 5 yrs. ago and lost 22 lbs. and went from a size 14 to a size 8 in 3 months. BUT,then I started loosening up my restrictions on my food regimen (specifically I started eating flour and sugar products again- BIG MISTAKE!) Now, I’m back where I started again. BUT, now, I am determined to lose the weight and slim down for good. I’ve been ignoring my own health, but I’m not anymore. I KNOW Winsor Pilates works. I loved how I felt and how I looked. Plus, I know I was a healthier version of myself and THAT is so important. Thank you for listening!

February 11, 2009 at 4:09 pm
(610) Cali Q says:

I just got married in Aug. 08, and didn’t realize how bad I looked or how tight my pants looked until I got the wedding Pic back… I was embarrassed to say the least (More for my wife cause I just didn’t look good). I had looked in to the Pilate’s workout many times before, and over X-mas while visiting the in laws my wife remembered she had some of the videos back home. I just started using them 2 days ago… MT GOODNESS!!! I have fallen in love already. I’m just glad I get to do it in my own home. Those tiny little girls up there showing no strain on there face while I’m floppin all over the mat….

Current: 6’3″ 235 lbs. 2/11/09
Goal : 215 Lean Lbs.

Will keep you updated, my new found family…

February 11, 2009 at 10:09 pm
(611) Lise says:

I have the advanced circle workout, and the upper body, abs, and buns and thigh workouts. Of course I also have the 20 minute circle workout as well, but I was wondering how to arrange my workout schedule around those first 4 mentioned for good results? How should I rotate them? Thanks!

February 16, 2009 at 8:23 pm
(612) Sue says:

I’m wondering if it gets easier the more you do the tapes. I’m having a hard time, guess I’m really out of shape.. I’m getting discouraged, did anyone else have trouble at first?

February 21, 2009 at 9:17 am
(613) Ryce says:

Hi!
I have a busy schedule with school and all, and I’m out of the house for most of the day. I just wanted to know what’s the best time to do these exercises?
Thanks a bunch!

February 23, 2009 at 3:40 am
(614) Georgia says:

Okay, I’m going to start now. I’m 5’11 and have always hated my stomach – I’ve had Windsor for a while now, but keep falling off the wagon because of my schedule. I’m 15 and weigh 70ish kg – I’ll keep updating.

February 23, 2009 at 4:52 pm
(615) Beth says:

Hi again everyone!Im so excited.I bought her ab dvd off ebay using the resistance band.Has anyone tried this dvd before?Im curious to see how it is. Im still trying to get her circle and the advanced dvd. Winsor Pilates for life!!I am soo addicted!!Let me know if anyone has tried this new dvd I have bought.Thanks Beth

February 28, 2009 at 1:46 am
(616) Veronikah says:

SUE, dont be discouraged because you’re having trouble with the excercises.
I know how you feel, i was definitely having trouble when I first started and thought i’d NEVER be able to do some of the moves Mari demonstrated. Lol.
The more you do it, the easier it gets!!

RYCE, if possible, I suggest making that commitment of getting up early in the morning to do the videos..this way, you’ll have it out of the way!

Windsor Pilates is truly amazing, and definitely will give you results you guys…

Good luck to all!

March 5, 2009 at 7:26 am
(617) MissyG says:

If you want a convenient exercise vid that is simple to stick to yet effective, Windsor Pilates (20 min one) is great. It’s best to use in conjunction with other cardio/aerobic activity, because it is geared towards strengthening and toning muscle (sculpting and definition) not burning calories. the aerobic workout vid was, for me, very naff with some odd jungle-esque music and distracting tacky LA set design. Maybe it’s just me, but those exercises were not going to induce a sweat- a key component in aerobic/cardio, so don’t be fooled! But the real value is the Pilates, which is brilliant. |bsolutely fine for beginners/those returning to fitness as well as those who are already fit but could benefit from strengthening and toning. I’ve had mine for one year, and I noticed improvements within two weeks. The more you follow it, the stronger your muscles become and so you can really focus on good technique and push yourself harder.

In a nutshell, well worth it for £10 (UK). i ddin’t get the additional DVDs- the 20 min, with 10 min extra dvd and the circle were enough for me. I use this with running and swimming.

March 6, 2009 at 1:34 pm
(618) ali says:

It absolutely works. I have been doing winsor pilates since 2001 and it is the only workout I have stuck with and will continue to do. Results are quick and there are always new workouts available to keep you motivated and interested! I couldn’t say enough good things about winsor pilates!!

March 6, 2009 at 5:11 pm
(619) lgshine:) says:

ITS AMAZING!!!! i do the fifty minute pilates everyday (well almost everyday…:) and well i havent lost any weight but all my fat got toned into muscle…. i weigh about 124-128 off and on and really had my body toned:) i noticed that my butt was so flat and my abs were all blah and were hanging so i started doing p90x…. but that just focused on my abs and i got a pack but atill had a bulging stomach and the rest of my body was flabby… yet pilates tones evry mucsle in my body and picked up my butt:) thanks:) any ?S just ask…

March 6, 2009 at 10:44 pm
(620) Tina Trying to Start Over says:

I have done Windsor Pilates before and it has definitely worked. Recently I was in an environment that really affected my state of mind and health on top of personal issues that arose and found myself extremely depressed. I ended up gaining a lot of weight going up to 165lbs. I’m only 5’4″ and 22 years old. I ended up getting sick with the flu followed by the stomach flu recently. That “helped” in losing a significant amount of weight going down to about 145lbs. I’m ready to take charge of my life again and ready to be happy. Part of that is being healthy. I just want to be able to breathe while walking up a hill and be able to carry my groceries home, that in essence is my goal. My goal weight is about 126.5lbs because based on the BMI that is the weight that is right smack in the middle of the range of a healthy weight for a person of my height! Anyway, this is a way of keeping myself accountable. I’d appreciate the support and I’ll report back in the next couple of weeks!

March 8, 2009 at 10:54 am
(621) seemsgood says:

I have tried it on and off again, but I just got a tape and did it yesterday, and not even like seriously did it. I just tried to get through all the exercises in the advanced tape. I had to take breaks or do the modified moves. But two days later I can feel every muscle in my stomach! Something must be going on! It feels like a did about 500 crunches.

March 11, 2009 at 10:48 am
(622) Sarah says:

Winsor Pilates is the only pilates that I have ever REALLY enjoyed. The moves are easy and you can do them from the first day you start. I have tried many other DVD’s and am about give up and spend the big bucks to buy another Winsor. Does anyone know a good place to look for an older Winsor DVD? It would have been around 2002 or 2003, I think. It was a 20min. work out that touch on a little bit of everything. I have found some of the new ones but I am kind of attached to the old one that I used back in the day. Please help!!!

March 11, 2009 at 5:38 pm
(623) Amy says:

I first started Winsor pilates after winter break in college. (when I was home for the holidays, I put on about 15 pounds.) Well, the workout felt nice and easy…not too bad, but the next day, I felt muscles I didn’t know I had! I dropped the 15 pounds plus a few more! That was the best shape I’ve ever been in.

I re-started the pilates now that I finally have room to do them again…I do the Upper & Lower body DVD’s two times per week…I can already see definition in my arms and my butt is getting higher and tighter…just like she says it would in the video!

On days I run, I do the 55 minute Accelerated Sculpting video. You can really see your progress each time you do the video…some moves you couldn’t do, you can the next time or some stretches you can stretch further…it’s great!

March 12, 2009 at 2:13 pm
(624) Joanne says:

Sarah,

You can find all sorts of Winsor DVD’s on Ebay for reasonable prices. That is where I bought the whole DVD set to replace the set that I originally had on VHS version and had purchased back in 2002. You can find the DVD that you are talking about for around 12-15 dollars. Good luck!

March 17, 2009 at 7:36 pm
(625) Mackenzie says:

It is a great program for toning and flexibility. I’m a pretty big girl and it doesn’t do too much for rapid and large weight loss, but I play for a golf leage and it is GREAT for toning the muscles needed to play a great game of golf.

March 19, 2009 at 9:46 am
(626) sarah r says:

I absolutely LOVE windsor pilates! I am a 27 year mom of 3.. i have been overweight since having my 1st child almost 10 years ago….Last year i topped the scale at 230 lbs and i am 5’5. I have been doing pilates for 6 months and have lost 75 pounds!I went from a woman’s size 20 to my current 7/8 in pants, in tops went from a 2 or 3x to a medium top! Now mind you i also watch everything i eat! I eat 6 small meals a day and i drink alot of water. I started doing beginner pilates 3 times a week but kicked up to everyday…now i average at least 4-5 times a week….doing the advanced now……when i first started pilates it was rough because i couldn’t do alot of the exercises but i stuck with it and can now do all of the exercises! Pilates truly elongates your muscles and gives you that lean look! It is all about flexibility and control! but i will say you do have to eat right as well as do the pilates! The great thing with the windsor pilates is that if you cant do the regular version of an exercise they do offer the modified version which still gives you a great workout and is easy to do! Good luck to you all and to new users of the windsor pilates: stick with it, its rough at first but once you are able to do the exercises you will see results!

March 23, 2009 at 3:53 pm
(627) beth says:

Well I finally got her ab dvd with the resistance band off ebay. I have got to say that I love it. I have been doing winsor pilates for a year now.Completely changed my life.I found that I am sore after doing this dvd!!Winsor Pilates for life!!!!!!!!!!!!Beth

April 6, 2009 at 3:07 pm
(628) michi says:

ok im around 13,14 and this program is really hard because of the size of my bust because i wear a size d so its a little hard to go up and down. i noticed though that in the video no women there had a larger bust i mean it works but its hard when you have a big bust

April 6, 2009 at 11:53 pm
(629) fashanna says:

hi!so i started this about three weeks ago and at first i didnt see a diffrence but i just got on the scale and i am around 5 pound lighter!!!omg i am so happy i see the diffrence and every thing i love love love this workout plan!!thanx

April 11, 2009 at 5:43 am
(630) James Coulbert says:

I cant stand all this rubbish about Pilates making you lose 6 lbs in the first week! Pilates is amazing and does work but if you are overweight, I would focus on eating properly and sticking to it. Cardio exercise will work on your fat body, whereas Pilates will tone the muscle. If you’re fat, lose it, if you are already slim or recently slim because of hard effort with dieting then, Pilates is an excellent way to sort out the remaining skin that is left behind. And before I get a torrent of messages back saying that I don’t know what I’m talking about and that it’s really hard to lose weight, don’t bother because I’ve done it. I used to weight 238lbs and I now weigh 182lbs, I’m 6’4″ (193cm). You can do it too. But the best advice that I can give you is to stop kidding yourself. Being overweight and doing minimal exercise ain’t gonna work. Eating properly and doing plenty of normal activity will work for you. Once you’ve got that sorted, Pilates is the next step.

April 16, 2009 at 1:47 am
(631) Bree says:

Im 17, 5’7 and 162 lbs. im not fat but not exactly skinny either. im 11% body fat so i have been trying to lose those last few pounds.

last month i went on a low calorie diet, did 30 hour long winsor pilates sessions, and did cardio. i went down a pant size in about a month. it really does work you just have to committ which is one of my flaws. recently over the last few weeks i lost control and went on a binge eating spree. i can feel my pants getting tighter so this week i put myself back on my diet and plan to do winsor pilates again. WISH ME LUCK I will report back after 30 sessions.

April 28, 2009 at 2:52 pm
(632) Mymy says:

Eating right is a bit of a challenge for me, even though I realize it is vital for weight loss. I am going to start using the Windsor Pilates Videos ASAP! I hope that exercising will mtivate me to eat healthier!

April 30, 2009 at 4:58 pm
(633) Beth says:

My friend ordered her circle and two dvd’s with it and lent it to me. OMG, I soo loved it. I could do the advanced but yes it was challenging and I loved every minute of it!!Keep up the good work everyone!!It works, if you are consistent and eat right. Winsor Pilates for life.What I wouldn;t do to meet Mari in person and tell her that this has changed my life and Im never going back to where I was!!!

May 14, 2009 at 10:29 am
(634) Catherine says:

I have been coming to this site to read the comments and to get motivated. Finally I am motivated. My current weight is 120lbs (as of May 3/2009). I started watching what I am eating and started to do exercise. As of May 14th, 2009 I have already lost 5lbs. My goal is to loose 16lbs. I have 11 more pounds to go. Many years back I bought winsor pilates videos and worked with them. I loved doing pilates. I thought I would start winsor pilates from yesterday but unfortunately my vCR remote control was not working, my batteries were drained. I am going to buy the batteries today and I am determined to start the winsor pilates from today. I will keep you posted. Thank you all for motivating me.

May 18, 2009 at 8:05 am
(635) no more excuses says:

hey i jus finished readin all the comments and thought i’d get involved. I’m 23 weight 13st 4lbs and my body is quite in proportion really. I will be doin the dvds 5 days a week. I will keep you up to date with my progress. I have recently gone vegan which i hope will speed up the weight loss process. Gud luck to everyone who is trying to gel out of the rut which is being over weight.
.

May 19, 2009 at 8:31 pm
(636) Sandy says:

Hi! I’ve been doing winsor pilates consistently since December. I have lost a lot of inches off my waist and I am down to 26 inches around the waist. I love winsor pilates. I vary my workouts every day. I have the circle, the band, the huge ball, and the small sculpting ball. This keeps me motivated and not bored as well as makes me feel it every single time since my body never knows what to expect. I’ve recently been doing the band workouts more and I find those to be the most challenging and to provide the fastest results. I am happy to hear everyone stories. :) I wish everyone luck!

May 27, 2009 at 2:02 pm
(637) tsahai says:

i been doing winsor pilates for a month havent seen any resuilts yet but my consistancy has not been up to par. The workout is hard when you start but after you keep going it gets easier and you feel great when your done. I would like to know how many calories does the 30 (really 40) minute workout burn?

May 27, 2009 at 8:55 pm
(638) Sandy says:

Hey! the only way to really know how much it burns is by buying a heart monitor that calculates calories. However if you wish you can try looking up a calorie counter through google and put in your height, weight and activity. It seems like it might be accurate. Usually it has beginning, intermediate, and advanced pilates and you can just type in how many minutes you did it

May 29, 2009 at 7:38 am
(639) Liane says:

Which Winsor Pilates should I get for my mother who wants to lose inches? (mainly in the stomach and thighs)

May 29, 2009 at 7:30 pm
(640) Joanne says:

Liane,

She would benefit from the Buns and Thighs DVD because it focuses on the lower body and all of the DVDs focus on the abs. The 20 minute workout is good as well as it is short in length and covers the whole body. The best deals are on Ebay for all of the different DVDs that Winsor has. Good luck!

June 3, 2009 at 12:01 pm
(641) Huh? says:

Okay… I feel like i’m half convinced, but not really sure if i should believe most of these comments.

6 pounds in a week? What? Somehow i have a feeling most of the “success stories” posted on here were advertising from the company… is there any real person who REALLY has found pilates to work REALLY fast?? Why aren’t there any more miraculous success stories in 2009? All i see are people saying stick to it, it should work in a month or so… but no real success stories! Ug, i just wanna see some proof! Does anybody have some real motivation for me?? Cause i really really want to believe in this… it’s seems like a dream come true that i need

June 3, 2009 at 2:52 pm
(642) swetazhny says:

I’ve owned these DVDs for quite a few years. I’ve tried them on and off and always LOVE them, but I’ve just not been consistent until recently, since I prefer to exercise outside in the sunshine.
I’ve been alternating the Upper Body (20 minutes), Buns and THighs (20 minutes) and 20 minute video 3 times a week for about a month and have noticed big results in my flexibility and tone. After 3 days, a friend told me that my arms looked good. It doesn’t seem that hard, but it really WAKES UP the muscles. I like that it doesn’t make me bulky, just toned. Because I tend to get very bulky with other exercises.
I would like to keep doing these videos, but wonder when I might get bored with them. I’m going to look at the other DVDs that Winsor has and try those to shake it up a little.

June 3, 2009 at 3:29 pm
(643) Kelsey says:

I’m 19, a freshman in college, weight 140 lbs, 5’4″, pant size 6-7.. I remember using Pilates in High School, and how it made me feel so trim and fit, no longer like my jiggly parts were hanging off of me for all the world to see! But now i’ve gained 20 lbs, and I’ve read all the comments above and am so encouraged! But i don’t know if i should believe all of them. Do you really lose POUNDS on pilates? Or does it just firm up what’s underneath all the fat, and you still need to work out in the gym to actually get it off? If i walk everyday and do pilates 20 min, from your guys’ experiences, can i actually lose weight?? Does anyone have pictures to prove it??
Thanks!

June 3, 2009 at 7:29 pm
(644) Sandy says:

Ok the comments about some people questioning peoples results bothers me a bit. Any program as long as you stick to it will work. If you go from sitting in an office all day coming home to eat and sit around the couch of course doing any type of exercise will help.

The only way to really see results is just picking something–ANYTHING that you actually enjoy to do every day and stick to it. If it happens to be pilates then stick to it and get a lot of different dvds ranging from beginning-advance that way your body will not get used to one of the workouts and they will keep working for you for a long time.

Like I stated before I’ve been consistent about pilates since December and I’ve seen some major changes in my body and lost a lot of inches around my waist. However, that is not the only reason I do pilates—I actually enjoy it and look forward to it every day while I’m at work. That is what actually works and keeps people fit.

June 4, 2009 at 10:29 pm
(645) gtx says:

I am just starting Pilates again I have the sculpting circle 20min workout as well as the accelerated fat burning aerobic workout. I remember there was 10 day plan, but I can’t find my book that shows me what to do, can anyone let me know, what were the instructions for 10 days, do circle workout and aerobic work out alternating days also add cardio or something this is all I can remember, if anyone knows can you please tell what the 10 day exercise plan was….thanks.

June 6, 2009 at 7:29 pm
(646) lgshine says:

how do u post pictures on this thing?? (to prove to kelsey:)

June 7, 2009 at 5:18 pm
(647) Gina says:

I love Winsor Pilates! They are the first pilates system I’ve tried, and I always come back to them. From time-to-time, I’ve tried other programs thinking it would be good to have something different but out of those half-dozen or more, none could compare. It is the only series that really makes me feel as if I’ve gotten a workout in addition to strengthening my core and back. Oddly I feel relaxed & energized while doing them. They most definitely will tone your body, people ask all the time if I’ve lost weight but in effect, I’ve just got better muscle tone and it shows.

June 15, 2009 at 2:33 am
(648) joj0 says:

hey guys,
im 17 yrs old n i did winsor pilates when i was 13 yrs old. I did it for a month n lost 6 kg (12 pounds). For those ppl who don’t notice a difference in their weight, it is written in the book that u need to do another form of exercises as ure doing winsor pilates to speed up weight loss. Also, food affects your weight loss, even if u do winsor pilates n eat the same portion of food, or eating the same kind of food, e.g. junk food, you will not see much results or hardly any! n this actually comes from my experience. If u by any chance stop doing winsor pilates, you might gain the weight back. So once u start, keep doing it! I regretted stop doing winsor pilates n now im back on it!

June 17, 2009 at 4:59 am
(649) Monique says:

Hello all! I have just taken delivery of my system this morning and am planning to blog my progress. I’m 39, have a 40″ waist (eek!) and have gained a lot of weight due to the various medications I have been on for my Fibromyalgia, which makes it very difficult for me to do certain forms of exercise, especially walking!

The timing could not be better as I have my first appointment with the pain management clinic with my hospital this afternoon, so I can sort my meds and ask loads of questions and also find out how tall I am and how much I weigh (which is a worry!)

I shall be taking pics, updating fortnightly and linking to this page (if that is ok) for anyone else who may be interested.

My main goal is not the weight loss, but toning up and increasing my flexibilty, especially with regards to stopping the excruciating back pain I suffer from.

Will link here when it’s up and running and good luck to you all, you are all gonna be my motivation to actually excercise for a bloody change!

Thank you all, gods and don’t I just wibble on

June 18, 2009 at 2:17 pm
(650) Lauren says:

I have been reading this blog for years, and doing the pilates circle off and on. I’m 5’2, 26 years old, my weight has been up and down (145 to 123) Everytime I get into my Pilates ‘grove’ i lose the weight. I do the cirlce 4x a week and walk a mile a day, as well as count my calories (1200) and watch my carb intake (its the key, calories going in to calories being burned off) I have recently got married last month (5/16) and toned up, but recently not watching my what I eat. Today I weight 137 and want to get back down to 125 (last 10 pounds) I am going to start to do the same rountine that helped me tone up every time. I will check back in 4 weeks. (6/19 to 7/17) Dedication and determination is the key. Any who thinks they can do it-for 20 minutes a day- and give 100% to this program, you will see results in less than 3 weeks-I should take measurements, because they mean more than any number on a scale…Good luck and keep it up to anyone out there stuggling…

June 25, 2009 at 12:25 pm
(651) Vilde says:

Hi!
I’m a norwigean 14 years old girl, and i wan’t to have a flat tummy. Am I to young to use windsor pilates??? Please help me…:)

June 28, 2009 at 1:49 am
(652) Ann says:

I love the Windsor Pilates series. They are the only Pilates I will do and have complete faith in. I haven’t worked out in a long while and can see it in my legs. The bun and thigh routine works really fast… if you buy this series, you will NOT be disappointed.

July 6, 2009 at 2:11 pm
(653) Rachelle says:

Okay… here is my situation. I am a total exercising beginner. I am 21 and weigh around 125. I am relatively small except for my thighs and butt, which are huge and covered in cellulite. I have been wanting to try Pilates for a while. I found this site and decided I would buy the DVDís and give it a try. But I am having a hard time figuring out which DVDís to buy and where to buy them (I live in Canada). I tried looking on EBay but there were way too many to choose from. So I wanted to ask someone elseís opinion. If I am completely new to Pilates, which DVD/ DVD sets should I choose? And where can I buy them besides online because that is proving to be a huge headache. Also, should I purchase the Thighs and Buns DVD? I am looking to loose some of the weight on my thighs and get rid of the celluliteÖ Has any one had a similar situation and had success with the Thighs and Bunís DVD? I just do not know where to start. Please provide some insight!

July 8, 2009 at 11:28 am
(654) Vall says:

Alrightyyy, i read most of the comments they seem pretttyy unbelievable but i am for suure going to report back on this thing, im going to start tmrw, the 20 min video every dayyy for a couple weeks
ill see what happens in 30 sessions
:) (L)

July 13, 2009 at 3:50 pm
(655) kristen says:

I started using pilates after i noticed i had ballooned u to 250 lbs about 3 years after i had my last child. In just 2 weeks i can see the difference and my clothes are fitting loser. I feel energized and more flexable. I am not going to weight myself till 4 weeks into it but i feel great. I also dropped my calorie intake down to 1500 and cut junk food out. Do it!! It’s amazing and easy to do.

July 16, 2009 at 12:39 am
(656) Kayla says:

Hi All…
I am 25 yrs of age and weigh around 125 kg. I have tried a lot of different things and always just put more weight on.
So i ordered winsor pilates, i then thought after that what else can i do this time to help myself more.
So i went and cleaned out my cupboards and fridge, I’m also going shopping soon to buy healthy food.
Could anyone give me any other options or advice????
I also plan to start working with my dog on a daily basis.
Thanks heaps Kayla

July 16, 2009 at 9:05 am
(657) Sus says:

Kayla – drink water

July 17, 2009 at 1:29 pm
(658) lauren says:

4 WEEKS LATER…lost 7 lbs (130) but so many inches… messed up my diet a bit, 4 th of july and a birthday party…but now i’m going to incorporate the bun and thigh series along with 20 circle for the next 4 weeks (8/14)- will let you all know. Good luck and keep it up!

July 18, 2009 at 9:53 pm
(659) myah says:

Lauren you are so inspiring! I’m going to start using the videos today or tommorrow!

July 20, 2009 at 1:21 pm
(660) Ellie says:

Winsor Pilates is a must!!! I was sooo unfit before but after 5 days of alternating between advanced and beginner sculpting circle 20 min workouts every day i’ve dropped a dress size and am much stronger and more toned!

July 24, 2009 at 5:06 am
(661) Dave says:

I started working out with Winsor Pilates a little over 3 weeks ago. I was 5’10″ and 190 lbs with love handles. I am currently 178 lbs and the love handles are just about gone.

My workout goes as follows:

1 hour of Winsor Pilates 3 days a week (I do the accelerated workout of 55 minutes, which works abs, butt, thighs, back, but I’m sure any pilates for an hour would be good).

I also make time to go swimming 4 or 5 days a week (for about 40 minutes). I don’t do a whole lot in the water…a few laps, treading water…I have found that just moving in the pool is good.

As far as diets go:

Either cereal or an egg white omelet w turkey bacon for breakfast. A blended smoothie of fruits, nonfat yogurt and whey protein powder for lunch. Either a tuna sandwich (no mayo) or a “Pure Protein” power bar for a snack (they only have 2g of sugar). A chicken or fish dinner. Then a non-protein fruit smoothie for late night snack.

PS I try to do my swimming in between the dinner and the late night smoothie.

I’m never hungry. The workouts aren’t as boring and unfun as others. I’m dropping weight. Abs are forming. Highly recommend.

July 25, 2009 at 2:12 am
(662) jaylee says:

My friend lost a ton of weight using the winsor pilates system & totally toned her body, in 3 months she sent from a size 16 to a 7, that was in 2005, and she still swears by winsor pilates, I have borrowed her cds for brief periods(she is now a workout maniac & doesn’t like to not have her workout videos for to long) and when i used them briefly i could start to feel & notice the difference, I want to buy my own but i can’t seem to buy it from the website as they don’t do us residents I guess, does anyone know where i can buy the whole set of windsor pilates, I am getting married in 2 months and am in desperate need of these dvds, please help:)

July 25, 2009 at 7:59 pm
(663) MyMy says:

Jaylee, I’ve heard that you can buy them on Ebay.

July 26, 2009 at 11:18 am
(664) Lauren says:

For the people that are trying to find the DVD’s, they are sold on Amazon.com!
And they do work. I started doing Winsor Pilates about 3 years ago and went from a 10 to a 2-4,and went from 128lbs to 110lbs. I had to eat right though. Junk food was a big no,no! I quit doing the work outs when I got pregnant with my daughter and gained 53lbs. Now she’s 5 months old and I’m stuck at 139lbs (size 12). I started the pilates workouts 2 days ago and I already feel so much better. I’m really looking forward to getting back into my pre-pregnancy clothes, and I know Winsor Pilates will do that for me!

July 27, 2009 at 5:36 pm
(665) Gina says:

I first tried these videos six years ago. I had just graduated college, didn’t have a job yet, and was really just bored at home when I decided to start using them. I didn’t really know better and I used the Accelerated Body Sculpting video right off the bat, and it was pretty intense for the first week. I remember being quite sore. My body really got stronger though and it started becoming increasingly doable. I don’t ever remember feeling like I had a really tough workout, or sweating like crazy or anything, but somehow my body toned up ridiculously and I lost at least two inches off my waist…in only about three weeks. I’ve put on some weight again since then, and I figured why not try this video again since it worked so well last time. Well, I’ve been using it again for only a week now and am already noticing a difference in my body’s appearance…I can’t wait to see what can happen if I continue for another month or so!

August 3, 2009 at 6:03 pm
(666) jen says:

suspicious comments. All so glowing and positive — no one even the least bit hesitant, let alone negative. Looks to me like the marketing co. did a little “tippin the scales” here by adding lots of (sound-alike) remarks. Come on — 180 to size 2 from exercise – in what,like, six months? I don’t know if even a total fast would do that. Not buying it.

August 3, 2009 at 7:05 pm
(667) Sandy says:

Jen, I know that it sounds like a lot of lies, but I am a real person who does believe in Winsor Pilates. I don’t see the point in the company doing that anymore since if you go to the website–guthy renker doesn’t even sell it anymore in the US. Guthy Renker doesn’t advertise it or anything. I believe it is because it is an old product. I think the best way for you to know is to do it yourself.

I have been doing pilates this time around for 7 months now and I have lost 5 inches off my waist and around 10 lbs. I am still working on losing weight and so I have started doing Jillian Michael’s Banish Fat Boost Metabolism. When I do that work out I sweat like crazy and see faster results. I haven’t been able to stay consistent with it yet, since it is so tiring.

I hope this helps.

August 4, 2009 at 7:09 pm
(668) lauren says:

to let everyone know, every website, every expert says that in order to lose weight the healthiest and safest is to lose 1-2 pounds a week. so lets say 1.5 lbs, for 6 months (26 weeks) thats 39 lbs-thats keeping a good exercise reigment and eating healthy. but if you execise like crazy and counting every calorie it is possible to lose close to 60 lbs in 6 months. now we all know the first 8 lbs is water weight thats why we always lose that the easiest (im talking to the women) and we all don’t eat healthy everyday… plus everyone’s metabolism is different and everyone’s body type is different. i may be able to tone my tummey faster and buy a smaller shirt. And someone is able to tone their legs faster and buy a size smaller in pants.
I don’t work for a health fitness firm or paid by a company, i just know that anyone that can take the small steps to eat right (like eating some oatmeal and a banana-instead of mcdonalds or even just hold on the extra salad dressing or bbq sauce) and try to walk 30 minutes 3x a week (which can be done, park on the far side of the parking lot, or take an extra lap to the coffee machine) Any one can lose weight, its if you take the time to improve yourself everyone, alittle at time.
Just keep in mind, calories going in to calories burned… Im not saying you can lose 10 pounds in a week, its not gonna happen. just stick to it alittle goes along way.
UPDATE-by the way- lost 3 lbs- 127lb!

August 5, 2009 at 12:19 am
(669) Claudia says:

After reading all these comments I finally bought the circle workout. I started August 3 and I am doing the program just like Mary says. I don’t follow the diet because I don’t like the food in the manual but I am following ALLI’s program which I think is great. It has only been two days but my body is really sore and I can feel my legs and my stomach hard. It seems like an easy program but the next day you will feel it. Well, I’m gonna be posting my measurements each week so you can see my progress and to keep me motivated ;)

*****Aug 3*****
Weight: 165 lbs
Body Fat: 37.6%
Stomach: 98 cm
Waist: 86 cm
Hips: 114 cm
***************

I really don’t have a weight goal, I just wanna be happy with my body

August 7, 2009 at 6:50 pm
(670) V says:

After suffering severe whiplash in a car accident, I was unable to continue my previous exercise regimine (which involved a lot of resistance training that my neck could not handle). I love Winsor Pilates! The beginner DVD showed me how to modify all of the poses to accommodate my weak neck. I am so happy that I have found a workout that I can do without causing myself extreme pain. Plus (with the exception of my neck), I am more flexible than I have been since I was a little kid. Thank you, Winsor Pilates!

August 8, 2009 at 2:25 am
(671) Mother of four, teacher, fibromylagia patient says:

Jen:
Pilates works period. I have fibromylagia and four kids, and am a teacher. The only way I feel less pain and more flexibility is with Winsor Pilates. No joke! I am astounded myself and thankful to God. I have been in pain like you can never imagine yet this excercise regimen has helped me lose weight and most importantly feel like my muscles are actually less painful and more alive. Try it… it works. I recommend you buy one basic CD and see if it works. If you like it, then go to the specialized versions. They are amazing!

August 9, 2009 at 8:33 pm
(672) Rhea says:

I just started using the winsor pilates circle and I M hoping to have some results faster than the normal pilates! Do I just do one 20 min. exercise a day or am I supposed to step it up and do it twice in a day?

August 10, 2009 at 9:28 pm
(673) Claudia says:

Hi… I’m back with results, not so dramatic, but it’s only been a week.

*****************Aug 10*************************
Weight: 163.6 lbs (1.4 lbs down)
Body Fat: 37.9% (It went up 0.3% don’t know why)
Stomach: 96.5 cm (1.5 cm down)
Waist: 84.0 cm (2.0 cm down)
Hips: 112.8 cm (1.2 cm down)
*************************************************

and I have to say this, I feel great with myself, I look more toned and I have a straight posture!!
I’ll be back next week

August 24, 2009 at 9:48 pm
(674) Sandy says:

Claudia, thank you for posting your results and giving us weekly reports. Your enthusiasm and results are inspiring. I have to be re-inspired to work out just about every other month or so. It isn’t that I don’t like to work out, I LOVE working out it is just that a lot of times other things take priority and I have to keep reminding myself to continue to make exercise a priority.

I can’t wait to hear your results next week!

September 4, 2009 at 12:49 pm
(675) beth says:

I wish that I could show you all before and after pictures of what winsor pilates has done for me.In March of 2008 is when I started and I havent; looked back since.My weight had gone up to 140 lbs, heaviest I had ever been in my life.NO it didn;t happen overnight.It took me a year to lose 20 lbs and completely transform my body. I now weight 115lbs and I am very toned. It does work!!The key is you have to be consistent.And obviously you have to watch what you eat.That is only common sense.
If you stick to it and are consistent you will see results.
I swear to it. I receive so mnany compliments annd now have my friends and family on board.Good luck everyone

September 5, 2009 at 1:41 pm
(676) Annie says:

I have several Winsor Pilates DVDs since 2003, have been using it on and off and it does work when I am consistent. I’ve been back doing the Advanced Body Slimming Workout (20 min) 3 to 4 times a week since the end of July. In addition, I’ve been swimming twice a week (30 to 40 minutes). I’ve only lost about 6 lbs in the last 6 weeks, but this is about 3 inches off my waist, and a similar amount off my hips. I also have a stronger back and more flexible hamstrings which have reduced my knee pain. I would like to lose another 15 lbs and just have to keep at it, it may take several more months. I’m not following a strict diet, but just being more sensible.

September 9, 2009 at 9:34 pm
(677) Adele says:

Hi Folks,

I’ve owed the 3 dvd series for 5-6 years easy. I’m never tried them until yesterday with my 8 year old son. We did the basic 20 minutes. I absolutely loved it. I was not sore afterwards or the next day. My son loved it too! I will take my measurements to track my progress because I don’t plan on giving this up anytime soon. I feel amazing after only 2 sessions.

September 9, 2009 at 11:19 pm
(678) mirian says:

I have been doing the whole winsor pilates plan for 1 year, I have gotten better but my tommy is still flabby with my down back. Currently I am doing 2 hours a day and I am a slim lady who wants a tone tommy and waist. Could you tell if I can get them by doing pilates and How long it would take?

October 4, 2009 at 5:42 am
(679) Lou says:

Hi,

I’ve just ordered the Sculpting kit: The Sculpting Circle, 20 min Circle DVD, Accelerated Fat Burning Workout, Fat Burning Cookbook & Exercise Planner with 10 Minute Sculpting Blast Workout. Great price of £9.95 (uk)

Can anyone tell me if this will be enough to get results? I had intended cancelling the Plan before the first additional dvd was sent out.

October 16, 2009 at 4:08 pm
(680) Panda's TT says:

I’m 20 years old, and I’ve been overweight since I hit puberty. I used to weigh 160 lbs; but, now I’ve gone down to 140 lbs…I’m 5′ 4″, so that’s not terribly unhealthy. I’m a bit nervous and excited to start Winsor Pilates; but, I’ve got nothing to lose except inches.

I’m really hoping that it will work for me and finally fix my problem areas. I have a bit of the apple shape — almost looking like a box on top of a pair of chicken legs. I’m going to try the videos out 3 times a week at first, and increase if I wish to later. I’m also going to keep up with my walking 4-6 times a week.

I ordered 4 of the DVDs (Basic, 20 Minute, Accelerated Body Sculpting, and the Abs). I can’t wait until they come in!

I’ll post my measurements and such as soon as I get them in the mail.

Good luck to everyone!

And thanks for those that stick around to encourage others (especially Melody)

October 20, 2009 at 6:27 pm
(681) PandasTT says:

The DVDs came in yesterday and I popped them in to try them out…I really like them! I’ve only done the basic and the 20 Minute one; but, I did it twice because I want to make sure I get the methods down.

Abs tomorrow!

Measurements:
Weight – 140 lbs
Waist – 36″
Stomach – 37″
Hips – 37.5″
Bust – 40″

See ya next week!

October 29, 2009 at 10:15 am
(682) Sandy says:

Pandas TT–I am really inspired by your motivation as Lauren’s! I was thinking that maybe together we can keep each other motivated to do pilates and fit in a bit of cardio (whether it be walking or any other favorite form of cardio). Maybe we could do a blog challenge or something to keep each other motivated to keep doing it—especially over the holidays!

Let me know. I look forward to hearing from you!

November 2, 2009 at 3:56 pm
(683) lauren says:

Sandy, Im in if you are…. im now up to 144.4 lbs- i started a new schedule at work, so now i have to try and get up at 5 am do walk my mile (20 mins) and do the circle. i would like to start maybe next week if you want (Nov 9th) we will weight in every week and take measurements everyother week. let me know if anyone wants to join in….

November 6, 2009 at 4:36 am
(684) georgia says:

hey all :)
i’ve tried windsor pilates a couple of times, but never stuck with it – lack of motivation and boredom with the videos i think was the reason. however, time is ripe for a fresh attempt – hopefully i’ll be able to tone up before summer! i weigh about 150lbs, but this isn’t so major because i’m 6ft, so im just really in need of lots of toning :)
i’ll be attempting it 5 times a week – last time i tried 3 times i kept putting it off and giving up. much easier to have a set schedule.
georgia <3

November 9, 2009 at 4:10 pm
(685) Sandy says:

Hey Lauren!! I’m glad that you are in! I wish I had checked it earlier. I have started a new workout regime because I get bored easily. For a bit I was attempting Jillian’s banish fat as well as her 30 day shred and doing some winsor pilates before those workouts, but a las I despite her workouts. I always had to force myself to do them and so now I am attempting something new. Yoga Booty Ballet with Pilates in between. I just started this last week. Today I did Yoga booty ballet latin Flavor with no pilates. I am thinking of doing pilates tomorrow with YBB cardio cabaret.

I will post measurements later. I am mostly doing this to tone as well as lose a few inches off my stomach (waist). Just within the last month since I’ve started incorporating more cardio along with winsor pilates there is a huge difference in the way that I look.

I wish you luck this week! Let me know if you want to do this through blogging or here.

November 12, 2009 at 8:49 am
(686) Lauren says:

Awesome Sandy, Im doing the 20 minute circle three days a week, the winor pilates Bun & Thigh Sculpting the other three days and trying to walk 1 mile a day. started on monday- start weight # 145- ewwww. check up on u next week, wanna do every friday check in…?

November 12, 2009 at 3:14 pm
(687) Georgia says:

well, it’s been a week, said i’d check in – i’ve only done it 3 times, though! i think its because of all my frenzied study (exams are in 2 days – eek!)
no noticeable difference, although my abs hurt when i tense them or when i stand up.
woot!
georgia <3

November 13, 2009 at 1:31 pm
(688) Kylie says:

It was one yr ago when I found out I had high cholesterol, I was 28 my mother had just passed away and I was at 145 lbs. I had to set up a recheck for 4 months which was March. I put it off until Jan when I had hit max weight at 155lbs and I finally said this has got to stop!!I started doing the 50 min fat burning workout 2 times a day 4 days a week and the 20 min sculpting workout with the circle once a day the other 3 days a week I also jogged 20 min a day. I started the special K diet also. In 2 months I lost 35 lbs and my cholesterol had been less than 50% of what it was in Nov. I also quit all junk food and soda. I wore a bikini for the first time in my life and felt wonderful. I now only do the fat burning wkout 2 times a wk and the sculpting 2 times a week, I feel like I’m in college again with all the energy. I just found out I am pregnant and plan on using this to lose my baby weight when all is said and done!!!!!I have never dieted in my life before this and it wasn’t even like I was dieting. It was fun and made me feel great!!!I also kept track of my routine in a journal and wrote inspirational sayings if I missed a day.

November 16, 2009 at 5:07 pm
(689) Sandy says:

Hey Georgia and Lauren..don’t get discouraged about not losing any weight. We are gaining a lot of muscle, which is why I prefer to measure myself. Something that I’ve noticed is that some days I look skinnier than others..and sometimes it seems like some weeks. I attribute it to sometimes not drinking enough water and getting bloated. So if you don’t see the scale moving but you’ve done everything right I would try drinking some chamomile tea and drinking a lot of water to see if it may be bloating.

Anywho, I”ve been bad. All last week I only did Yoga Booty Ballet and no pilates whatsoever. I know this is bad because pilates maintains my posture, but for some reason I”ve only been wanting to dance. My measurements and weight are the same. Just last week I had lost two pounds and this week I am two pounds heavier again. (but like I said I Really think it’s bloating and other causes..don’t trust the scale)

November 17, 2009 at 1:14 pm
(690) Lauren says:

Hello everyone, I did the circle twice last week, and buns and thighs once. I did start to walk two miles now 25 mins. plus. I will weigh in and start my measurements on friday. Just like Mari said in her video- “20 Minutes, who doesn’t have 20 Minutes!’

November 25, 2009 at 6:06 pm
(691) Sandy says:

Hey everyone! I hope you all have a great Thanksgiving and weekend and that it won’t detract any of us from our weight loss goals. I pretty much have stayed the same once again this week. However, I will soon be changing up my regimen more and be alternating some advanced winsor pilates videos with more intense cardio. Like I said I had been alternating with Yoga Booty Ballet and I think it will make a difference to do more intense cardio. I am going to try Dance and Be Fit: Abs burn next week along with winsor pilates. I don’t know if I stated this before but winsor pilates has toned my body, but I am still working on losing fat in my stomach.

Best Wishes!

November 28, 2009 at 1:03 pm
(692) bre says:

ok so i used to do pilates all the time until i broke up with my bf and started emotional eating. i used to be around 140 size 9 and now im 175! size 13 i really loathe being fat i really wanna be skinny, skinnier than i was before. my goal is to be in the 120′s so my plan is to do a pilates video (20mins) 5x a week eat sensibly and try to fit in some walking i will report back every week so wish me luck!

November 28, 2009 at 9:01 pm
(693) Sandy says:

Hey Bre! I am glad you have joined us in our effort to get fit! I wish you luck especially at this time when it is a bit harder to lose weight. Hope to hear back from you soon!

December 1, 2009 at 4:19 pm
(694) Lee says:

im thinking about buying it… but do you have to follow strict eating plans or extra exercise?

December 1, 2009 at 5:35 pm
(695) Sandy says:

Hi Lee–I wouldn’t say that I am on a strict eating plan. I don’t believe in fad diets, etc. I just eat whatever I want in moderation and do pilates as well as some cardio. I started off doing only pilates and lost a lot of inches and some weight, but in order to really burn more fat one has to add more cardio.

I hope this helps. I really enjoy doing winsor pilates before my cardio. I feel that it stretches me out and it gives me energy to keep going. So don’t look at it as a bad thing. Just do what you think is fun and that you will keep doing. There are winsor pilates clips on youtube. You should try one out and see if you like it.

December 2, 2009 at 3:05 pm
(696) Wobbly Mummy says:

I just wanted to leave a genuine comment to everyone – I saw these advertised on an infomercial – I googled and read up on Mari and decided to order a DVD and the circle. I would always like to lose a stone, but being a bit of an apple, just toning would also be great! I did the 20 minutes exercise this morning – THE easiest exercise I have EVER done, and tonight – well I can really feel I have worked out already! I’m sooooo sticking to this at least 3 times a week – good luck everyone, and keep posting as it is real motivation to read! :) x

December 5, 2009 at 1:37 pm
(697) bre says:

first week report%%%

well i didnt do to much this week cuz i had finals but i did wat i could. i did the 20 min circle 3x and i walked for a total of 4 miles up hill. i did not lose any inches form my thighs but i did lose an inch off of my lower pooch area which im really excited, but im not gunna stop till i hit my goal. ill try and do more this week than i did my first week and thanx guys for all of the encourgement it is a real motivator to see everyones input on their achievements with pilates.

i will post my 2nd week report 7 days from now

December 7, 2009 at 10:15 am
(698) moniki says:

personally any kinda of Pilates helps tone and strengthen u in areas that can be troublesome. I notice the difference when putting on clothes or my flexiblity & balance. I also, have Fibromayalgia & find on a good day 2 perform this workout and my flare-ups may not last as long or be as intense. Of course other things play apart in this. I always, recommend this 2 people of all ages but first get okay from doctor.

December 8, 2009 at 1:42 pm
(699) Sandy says:

Hey Everyone..just checking in for the week once again. I have made some further changes. I am doing a lot more harder cardio now. Yesterday I did Dancing with the Stars Dance off the Pounds and it really had my heart rate up the whole time. It is extreme cardio and tons of fun! I have also changed my diet to have more fruits and veggies and so I have finally something to report. I have lost two pounds and generally feel better with all the changes that I’ve made. I don’t do a certain winsor pilates video..I have a lot of them and do whichever I feel like doing that day. However, since for over a year all I did was winsor pilates I have been focusing more on cardio now and usually only do winsor pilates at least twice a week.

I hope everyone else is doing well!

December 10, 2009 at 10:19 pm
(700) Amanda says:

Hey guys, really enjoyed reading all of the comments on here! Ive had the ab sculpting dvd for a while but never was able to keep it up. I play a lot of sports but while this is good cardio, I really want/need to tone up general areas! I have ordered a few more dvds today and hope that I can mix them up and stick with it for longer…at least long enough to see some results that can become my motivation! I am about 5 ft 9 and weigh 171 lbs (will measure later tonight so I can see any difference). I am thinking of trying to do a minimum of 3-4 times this week to start me off and would be really keen to join in on the updates :) good luck everyone!

PS. I have also just got the element: ballet conditioning dvd to try and gain back some of the flexibility I had when I did jazz ballet when I was younger. Might try and do this in between pilates days!

December 10, 2009 at 10:23 pm
(701) Amanda says:

Hey guys, really enjoyed reading all of the comments on here! Ive had the ab sculpting dvd for a while but never was able to keep it up. I play a lot of sports but while this is good cardio, I really want to tone up general areas! I have ordered a few more dvds today and hope that I can mix them up and stick with it for longer…at least long enough to see some results that can become my motivation! I am about 5 ft 9 and weigh 171 lbs (will measure later tonight so I can see any difference). I am thinking of trying to do a minimum of 3-4 times this week to start me off and would be really keen to join in on the updates :) good luck everyone!

December 12, 2009 at 11:57 am
(702) bre says:

second week report

i did a lot of cardio but not a lot of pilates. i still have the same measurements as last week so my goal for next week since im on winter break is to do alot more pilates and keep up my cardio regimen. im doing well with my eating btw.

see you in the next 7. bye guys!!! :)

December 14, 2009 at 10:07 am
(703) elen03 says:

Pilates is great! Im 23 and full figured, started doing pilates a week ago – 20 minutes work out. I made myself practising every day, so far. I feel my abdomen is more firm and its also doing someting to my backbone muscules, cause by back doensīt hurt anymore and i noticed sitting with straight back without any problems (before it was uncomfortable for me) In adition i feel better – mentaly and physicaly…i used to practise basic yoga…i has almost same effect. I fell for pilates and hope to keep on practising!

December 15, 2009 at 6:27 pm
(704) lillahr says:

hey , can someone send me some pilate workouts to my email adress pls ! im size14 and want to get think before school ball at the end of 2010 ! PLS HELP

December 16, 2009 at 3:11 am
(705) Georgia says:

Hey guys. I started a new regime at the start of the month and have done pilates 10 times since then. I haven’t noticed a great difference in my stomach, but I’m not so worried about that – apparently it’s the hardest place to tone – but after only 7 pilates workouts people said my legs looked longer and slimmer and that I was standing straighter. I’m looking forward to pilates every night, it really relaxes me – and it works, it really does! Can’t wait to see my future body thanks to Winsor :)

December 16, 2009 at 12:41 pm
(706) aimee says:

I love Winsor Pilates! Four weeks ago I started doing the 20 minute workout an average of five times a week. Very quickly my strength and flexibility improved, and my hip and knee pain all but disappeared! I weighed and measured myself this morning, and I’ve lost 16 lbs and 1 1/4″ off my bust, 2 3/4″ off my waist, and 2 1/2″ off my hips! I still ate whatever I wanted, but I paid more attention to my portion sizes. Believe me, I never went hungry, and I still had the occasional fast food meal or piece of cake. I plan to start doing a bit of cardio this month to see if it helps me get even faster results.

I will post again in four weeks time!

December 16, 2009 at 6:29 pm
(707) Sandy says:

Wow! I was so happy to see new people and hearing their results through winsor pilates. It reminded me how even when I didn’t feel like I was getting results I still enjoyed winsor pilates because it is relaxing and because prior to me starting to do winsor pilates last year in Sept 2008, my lower back would always hurt. Then out of no where without even realizing it one day I noticed that I felt no pain anymore. I went through the same phase as Georgia. When I First started I noticed that I could really see my knees. Now, I wasn’t really big to start off with, but I mean that my legs looked slender and I could really see my ankle bones and knee bones..not in a disgusting way but in a slender muscular way. My thighs and calves are still very toned because of winsor pilates. Howver, just like Georgia mentioned the tummy thing is a different story. I did lose five inches off my waist using winsor pilates, but I am still not where I want to be in that area which is why I”ve been incorporating a whole lot more cardio because I can see my abdomen they are definitely there I just need to burn off more fat.

I can’t wait to hear about everyone’s success. It really motivates me to keep me going :)

Thanks!

Graciously,

Sandy

December 18, 2009 at 3:42 pm
(708) Candy says:

I have been doing winsor pilates for about a year and have lost 100 pounds and gone down 11 sizes.

So..does it work? Yes. 100 times yes! Healthy weight loss has to start somewhere and Winsor Pilates was it for me. I started seeing results so quickly that it kept me motivated to keep going. I’m almost to my goal now and you can bet winsor pilates is going to get me there!

December 29, 2009 at 5:31 pm
(709) Leah says:

Hi! I began bodybuilding earlier this year as I thought it would be a great hobby, but I needed to loose fat. I was 5’1, 171 pounds at 38% fat. I used to do 40 minutes of HIIT 3 times a week with 40 minutes weight training and saw a few results, but they were very slow. I’d lose about 1.5 pounds every fortnight, if I was lucky and ended up at 162 pounds at 28% fat 6 months later. I began doing Winsor Pilates on my days off before bed and since then, I’ve lost another 11 pounds, but my body fat is down to 15%! I’d recommend it to anyone and everyone, especially those with time constraints.

January 2, 2010 at 10:24 pm
(710) Jasmine says:

Hello everyone I just got the winsor Pilates like 5 of the videos for 2.50 for all.. so I will keep every one updated and see how it goes for me.. I have read so much about this . now I want to see if it really works .. wish me luck..

January 9, 2010 at 8:14 pm
(711) Katelynn Meadows says:

I’m 16 and weigh 120 pounds and I’m not doing this to loose weight, I just want a flat tummy! Do you think this will help me accomplish that?

January 11, 2010 at 12:44 am
(712) Tina Trying to Start Over Again says:

i’m comment #620 above. well i don’t even remember how long i actually did pilates that time around. but now i’m very serious about it. i gained some weight back and i want to lose it. still shooting for 126.5 lbs! my scale is actually broken so as to my exact weight i’m not sure, but i feel it’s safe to say it’s around 150lbs. i also just want to be healthy and fit and not let my appearance affect other aspects of my life… here goes round 2!

January 16, 2010 at 5:01 pm
(713) aimee says:

Hello again! I’m happy to report that since the last time I posted (I’m comment #706) I’ve lost another 9 lbs! This brings my two month weight loss total up to 25 lbs! I’m really happy with my results, especially since this was over Christmas and New Years, and I didn’t always make the best food choices. I didn’t do as much cardio as I had intended to do (only about 5 times in the entire month) but I am hoping to improve on that this month. I’ve been doing the Ab Sculpting and Bun and Thigh Sculpting workouts back to back an average of five times a week. I think that I’m going to try the Accelerated Workout next. I will post my results again sometime around February 16th!

January 18, 2010 at 4:55 pm
(714) neenee says:

I just started winsor pilates Fat burning working yesterday. I will begin maximum burn basics workout tue.
I absolutely love the video, It is so fun and intense at the same time. I cant wait to share my success story. I haven’t weighed and measured myself yet but will soon. It really helps to see what these videos have done to everyone’s life’s. Yeah a new year and finally a new me!

January 19, 2010 at 10:16 pm
(715) Brittany23 says:

My lifestyle was pretty much like any other 23year old. Alcohol,carbs, and more alcohol to soak up the alcohol the next day from partying the night before! 40 pounds later I went from a size 6 quickly to a size 12 within 4years. Eating when I was bored, etc.Every single year I kept making flase “resolutions” to myself to quit smoking, cut back drinking etc.NEVER HAPPENED!lol.When my boyfriend and I moved in with each other I ran
across “Windsor Pilates” DVD, I just started it 2 days ago I really feel absolutely amazing just from 2workouts. Iam 5’7 185 (as of last saturday :) SOOOOO, we will c!!! I wil post again in a couple weeks! Good luck to all **Ps I DID quit smoking!

January 20, 2010 at 11:12 am
(716) bc says:

Has anyone tried the new winsor slim pilates with the accelorator?? I just started a few days ago and it is great!

January 20, 2010 at 12:45 pm
(717) aimee says:

I haven’t tried it yet, but I really want to! Maybe I will ask my husband to buy it for me for my birthday?

January 22, 2010 at 2:58 pm
(718) Sandy says:

Hi I am the same Sandy that has been posting here for a couple of months. I just wanted to say that I am finally where I need to be goal wise. Today I weigh 119 lbs and am 5’4. Since I have been doing pilates and cardio I also have some muscle definition and so that is a good weight for me. I also wanted to say that although pilates and cardio helped a lot in the end when the weight really started to drop and I even stopped working out concisely yet I lost weight was when I gave up sugar and white flour. It is amazing how just doing that will make the weight drop. Other than that I ate what I wanted and was never hungry. I also ate real food, real butter, real cream, real everything. I cook with ghee and coconut oil. I did not at all do the whole low fat diet and still lost weight. In fact, I think that eating good fats like avocadoes, coconut, etc helps people lose weight.

I hope everyone else achieves their goals as well.

GOOD LUCK EVERYONE :)

January 22, 2010 at 11:16 pm
(719) aimee says:

Good for you, Sandy! I’m so happy for you! Please stop by every now and then and update us on how you are doing.

I agree with the sugar thing, I found that eating sugar just makes me crave more sugar. Once I started to cut it out I found that I didn’t even miss it.

January 25, 2010 at 3:18 pm
(720) Tina Trying to Start Over Again says:

I’m commentor #620 and #712. I have been consistently been doing winsor pilates 3 to 5 times a week. I want to make it 5 times a week period. I decided to weigh and measure myself once a month. (I have a history of getting upset and giving up on workouts – diets – etc. if I don’t see the numbers I want and take very unhealthy alternatives.) So I will be weighing and measuring myself every 15th of the month.

Here are the numbers for 01.15.10

Weight – 145 lbs
BMI – 24.9

Chest – 35″
Arms – 10.5
Waist – 27. 5″
Hips – 38″
Thighs – 19″
Calves – 13.5″

I’ll check back in on the 02.15.10

January 26, 2010 at 3:03 am
(721) Ashley says:

Pilates does not work for me!! Around Christmas my sister gave me her Sculpting Circle along with the dvd that has the 20 minute workout, bonus 10, etc. After going on this site I was SURE that I was going to get amazing results.

The first week I lost about 4 pounds. Which I was ecstatic about. I went to the gym every other day switching between upper and lower body each time. I also was on the elliptical on those days 20 minutes. I went an extra day and used the elliptical for 40 minutes and the bike for 20. I walk my dog 2 miles daily and do the Core Secret Ab Assault and Bun Battle 3-4x a week WITH the 20 minute Sculpting Circle and 10 Minute bonus. I did the 50 minute fat burning one..but I hated it!

This past week I slacked off a little bit, but not so much..and I only lost 1 pound. I have started eating healthier too…more turkey and chicken, veggies, etc. And at 2 weeks I have lost 5 pounds. While this may seem like a great thing to some, I am HUGELY dissapointed in my results. I have read people losing sizes, inches, etc in 2 weeks and I only lost 5 pounds. I still have 25 more pounds to go by April 24th.

I might just stop using Pilates because I don’t feel its working for me.

January 28, 2010 at 10:37 am
(722) aimee says:

Hmmm, 5 pounds in two weeks sounds pretty good to me! I think you have to take into account how much weight you have to lose before you compare your results to other people’s. I lost twelve pounds in two weeks, but I also had (and still have) a lot more weight to lose than you do! I think that most people would tell you to give it at least a month before you decide, and remember to always follow Mari’s cues and pull the stomach in and breath at the appropriate times. Good luck!

February 2, 2010 at 1:35 pm
(723) Tina Trying to Start Over Again says:

I agree with Aimee 5lbs is a lot! Usually the most anyone should lose (healthily) in a week is no more than 2lbs. It seems to me that you’re ahead of the game! Also, weight loss and weight fluctuates. You really can’t expect to lose 5 lbs every week. If you have 100 lbs to lose versus 10 lbs, the person wanting to lose 100lbs may lose 10lbs in two weeks and the person wanting to lose 10 lbs total may only lose 1lb a week. Don’t lose hope, just keep motivated and working hard.

February 3, 2010 at 1:58 am
(724) Malena says:

I love winsor pilates, I buy the set with the circle 3 years ago, at first was so hard to do the pilates but became easier everytime, after sometime I stoped , had a baby and 3 years later Im back on track and is not so hard anymore. Honestly I tried other pilates videos but I really preffer Mary Winsor-Winsor Pilates .. yeah!!

February 5, 2010 at 7:23 pm
(725) Ali says:

I was working out continously on the x trainer, and doing ab workouts about 5-6 days a week. I still had ‘flab’ on my abdomen that I just could not shake at all. I tried winsor pilates 20 mins 3 days a week, with the cardio….and noticed results in the midsection in about 2 weeks….It is very addicitng because it works, and you dont sweat nor was I tired from doing it, so I try and do it 4-5 times a week for 20 minutes….definately recommend it for women who have had children, because its not easy to lose that excess at the midsection post baby.

February 10, 2010 at 7:31 pm
(726) Kate says:

Ali, Thank you for your last post! What an inspiration! I had lost 24 lbs. 6 yrs. ago and my exercise routine at that time was Winsor Pilates and cardio. Looking back at photos taken then, I see what a firm mid-section I got from WP. (With lots of health problems and caring for family members, I’ve gained back the 24 lbs. and another 22 lbs! Yikes!) Ali, your post has reminded me that I CAN lose weight and firm up and I am happily getting back to WP. I started doing them last week and I look forward to seeing the results! I’ve got a wedding to attend in 5 weeks and I’m hoping to firm up my jiggle. I’ll post some results in 5 weeks…thank you for the inspiration!

February 13, 2010 at 9:28 am
(727) AIMEE says:

I HATE EXERCISING AND I LOVE PILATES! ITS IS THE ABSOLUTELY ONLY THING THAT MADE MY SYOMACH FLAT!

February 13, 2010 at 3:44 pm
(728) Missy says:

Hi, everyone. I have been reading everyones results and its amazing. I am 24 years old and have a one year old daughter. I have been working so hard to lose weight since I had her and have done awesome with traditional excercise. I started at a size 11 and am down to a size 5/7. The only problem is that I can not seem to get rid of my baby pouch. I was interested in starting pilates to try and flatten my tummy. Does anyone have any suggestions as to which Pilates tape to use and what my routine should be for max results? I am not afraid to put in the time! PLEASE HELP!!!

February 15, 2010 at 11:19 am
(729) birdie says:

i jus ordered the new winsor slimming pilates the one where mari promises you’ll lose 10 inches in 2 weeks well i will be back to let you know how it goes. wish me luck.

February 17, 2010 at 6:12 pm
(730) aimee says:

Hello again! As promised, I am back to report on my month 3 results (See comments 706 and 713). So, this month I lost another 11 lbs, which brings my 3 month total weight loss up to 36 lbs! I mainly used the Advanced Body Slimming DVD, which I can’t reccomend enough. I did some more cardio, and although it didn’t make a huge difference in the amount of weight I lost, I will keep on doing it because I think it is important for my overall health. Since I’ve been getting a little bored with the DVDs I have, I bought a few 10 Minute Solutions Pilates DVDs to try out this upcomming month (shhh, don’t tell Mari!). I tried one last night (Pilates Perfect Body) and it really kicked my ass! It was challenging but so much fun.

Good luck everyone, I will report again next month!

February 17, 2010 at 10:02 pm
(731) celestine says:

hi i have a neck and back condition, loss off curvature in neck, hyper lordosis/kyphosis. alot of paon and stiffness, cannot bend my back or head, feel weak and unstable legs/ hips, would i benefit from this workout

February 18, 2010 at 11:12 pm
(732) Kate says:

Aimee, your results are quite amazing! I have to ask, how old are you? To lose so much weight in a few months makes me think you’re under the age of 30…is that the case? I’m 46 and at my age weight loss is a much slower process. I am definitely finding inspiration in your posts, so I will definitely keep reading. I have gotten back to my Winsor Pilates dvds, and find that my work-out from 6 yrs. ago was what helped me lose 22 lbs. in 4 months…walking 4 miles in 1 hr. and then the Accelerated Body Scultping dvd for 1 hr. So, that’s what I’m doing now…I’ll post again in a month to let you know how things go. Again, aimee, you are an inspiration!!!
Thank you!!

February 23, 2010 at 9:56 am
(733) aimee says:

Kate, you guessed it – I turn the big 2-8 next month, lol. Oddly, I am finding that I am having an easier time losing weight now then I did when I was in my teens and early twenties. I think that it it because when I was younger I would really restrict my calories which messed with my metabolism and would lead to binging and then eventually giving up. Now, even though Pilates has inspired me to clean up my eating, I am eating far more then I used to and the weight is coming off much easier. Go figure!

Thank you for your kind words – I am only three months into this crazy journey, but I really feel that this is something I can keep up for the rest of my life.

Good luck to you!

February 23, 2010 at 1:49 pm
(734) i-am-sam says:

hello everyone! so i finally decided to get going on the dvd my friend gave me while back! i have
accelerated body sculpting
basic 20 minutes workout
basic step by step
maximum burn cardio
maximum fat burning
the back workout
abs sculpting

im 5’7 and weight 198lbs. i want to lose at least 40 pounds but i just dont know where to start with all this…i started this morning with abs sculpting but i was wondering if someone could help me with creating a program with these dvds… by reading all of these comments, i really think that pilates can help me! thanks in advance

February 23, 2010 at 10:06 pm
(735) Kate says:

Hello i-am-sam! Glad you’re joining us! From everything I’ve read on this forum and in pilates mags., adding cardio to your Pilates work-outs is a must to lose weight in addition to the toning you’re doing. I do a 4 mile walk in 1 hr. before I do my Winsor Pilates dvd. But, soon, I’ll be joining the local pool, so I’ll be able to swim laps for my cardio. (I’m not a big fan of runnng.) I have all those dvds as well. I think a good start for you is the Basic 20 min. work-out to get a feel for the exercises and the Accelerated Body Sculpting for 1 hr. is excellent. When I first got my Winsor Pilates dvds, I alternated the 20 min. Basic and the 1 hr. Accelerated Sculpting, and THAT was a great workout! I actually didn’t bother to check out the other dvds for a couple of years. Just those two dvds helped me to lose 22-24 lbs. in 4 months. I am desperately in need of getting back to that weight loss, so I am starting all over again. I am Post #’s 726 & 732, where you’ll find my journey. So, good luck with your dvds, and remember, start out with the Basic and then check out the Accelerated Body Sculpting- you won’t be disappointed!

February 27, 2010 at 11:35 am
(736) marie says:

has anyone ordered the new mari winsor slimming system for $75 (includes shipping) tempted but not sure. 48 years old and boy have things changed. used to run 4 miles a day 4 days a week and use free weights but slacked off for the last year and feel like cra_. Need to get back on track and this looks like a track that might be needed at this point in my life. Need inspiration and a big PUSH. I’m really tempted to just order and put on my CC and go for it.

March 1, 2010 at 6:42 am
(737) Jessica.Reid says:

Hi sexy ladys!

Im 18 and have been on a constant diet since i was around 9. Ive never felt secure in my own body. So recently i’ve ordered the circle and it comes with afew dvd’s.. Not sure which until i get it.

What would any of you sugest about loosing weight on your stomache and arm’s?

Well done all for your amazing progress!
Hopefully i can come back on here and say the same in afew months!

March 2, 2010 at 4:09 am
(738) davina says:

never lost any weight, but then again i was told not to waste my money, the only way to lose weight is to burn fat and that involves aerobic/cardiovascular exercise. this item will gaurantee you lose 30 pounds (£) there is no quick fix people!!!!!

March 5, 2010 at 11:04 am
(739) cattis says:

hello ladys :) . I have been using winsor pilates many years back and forward. But now I do it 5-6 days a week, have to get in shape ones more. I had a child 7 moth ago. :) mummy belly hehe :P

And after I have read all comments I feel so happy to be a winsor pilates user :)

Keep it up girls/womens, we can all do it. I hate working out BUT i LOVE pilates :)

Sorry for my bad english I’m form Sweden. :) Take care

March 15, 2010 at 6:54 pm
(740) Ashley says:

Hey! I’ve been using the Pilates Sculpting Circle and haven’t seen any significant results. Besides that, this is the first time I’ve ever used pilates. Are there any DVD’s you guys would recommend to tone and help shed a few extra pounds?

Thanks!

March 17, 2010 at 10:37 pm
(741) aimee says:

Davina, you made me giggle with the 30 £ comment, but I don’t think you can call Pilates a ďquick fix.Ē It’s an established exercise system that has been around for decades, it is not some gimmick. As a previous poster stated, ďhealthy weight loss has to start somewhere,Ē and for many of us it started with Winsor Pilates.

On that note, I just wanted to post an update on my weight loss (see coments 70, 713 a730): I lost another 9 lbs this month, which brings my 4 month cumulative total to 45 lbs! I have officially lost all the baby weight, and now I am going to work on the 15 lbs of ďpost-wedding weightĒ I gained before I became pregnant with my daughter. I am wearing sizes that I wore when I was 20 lbs lighter, and I absolutely give the credit to Pilates. It has really toned and tightened my body in ways I never imagined.

I’m happy to see there are so many newcommers! Keep up the good work everyone!

March 22, 2010 at 10:34 am
(742) Jessica.Reid says:

Well done Aimee!
I thought exactly the same as you. Davina, what you said was not needed espically when so many women are working hard and sharing there good news on here. Shame on you for bringing negativity onto something so posative.

Anyway!
I got my dvd and circle kit, it’s really hard and i can’t keep up with it although i’m really flexible! Havnt noticed weight loss but do feel alot more alert and feel my stomache muscles aching the next day!

Keep up the good progress ladies.
x

March 22, 2010 at 5:11 pm
(743) AllaboutmeQ says:

Well, after reading the posts over the last few weeks I have decided to purchase the Mari Winsor Slimming Pilates Workout. Just got off the phone with the rep. I should receive within 7-10 days. I plan on starting that day lol. I will be back to post to give an update.

Today I made a committment to change my way of eating. I joined Weight Watchers and I woke up extra early this morning to take a 30 minute walk. I also walked before lunch..soooo, I’m trying to get a bit of a jump start. I’m not looking for a quick fix, just looking for something that will motivate me. I have a very hectic lifestyle (work FT, school, mother of a 13yr travel basketball player and wife). So trust me when I say that I don’t have time to go to the gym as often as I want to and/or should. However, I still would like to implement both Pilates with the gym and even my daily walks. Hopefully Pilates will give me the energy to do so.

I am very excited about turning 40 in October and I want to look and feel my best…Sporty 40.

March 22, 2010 at 8:41 pm
(744) JodiB says:

Hi everyone, after reading your comments I decided to leave one of my own. I ordered the new Slimming Pilates at the end of February and I JUST got is last week, and I can’t say much positive as far as their customer service. However, I highly recommend this new set, the accelerator is great and of good quality. All the workouts are 20 minutes long and they go so fast. I look forward to getting up in the morning to do these workouts and will probably start doing 2 back to back on weekends. I will probably also continue treadmill running (or outdoors when weather breaks!) every other day to burn more fat. I have always loved Pilates, and recently “rediscovered” them after a few years of cardio/weights. I won’t ever give them up again. And like allaboutme..I will be 40 in the fall and want to look and feel my best! I would be happy to answer any questions about Winsor’s new Slimming Pilates!

March 29, 2010 at 2:15 pm
(745) Itmytime2shine says:

I also ordered the new slimming pilates. I’ve had it for about a week now. I did the first workout today. It was so simple. I thought it was going to be harder. I’m also changing the way that I eat. I started that about two weeks ago and have already lost 9lbs. So, by changing my eating lifestlye and incoorporating pilates I should be seeing faster results in no time. Wish me luck! BTW… have anyone seen any results from the slimming pilates program?

April 2, 2010 at 10:43 am
(746) Orl Daisey says:

Anyone who has seen the commercial of the slimming Pilates canít help but think ďthis is it. This time I really am gonna loose it for good.Ē So I came to read what everyone is saying about Pilates. But I guess like everything else, you actually have to put in the work. However, I am glad to see that if you actually set your mind to it, you can achieve great results. I am looking forward to starting my workout. My plan is to continue my morning workout and complement it with Pilates workout. Wish me luck

April 5, 2010 at 8:15 pm
(747) beth says:

Hi everyone !!Its been awhile since I wrote!!After two years of being a dedicated pilates goddess ,I still do her dvd’s at least 4 x a week!!!!!!It has completely transformed my figure and my posture!!Wow!!Im never going back to where I was two yrs ago.Just wanted you guys to know that I got her Core plus Reformer dvd for Easter and its great!!I still do her ab,bun and thigh(sometimes with the resisitance band)and sometimes without. I also still love her magic circle. I hear everyone mentioning a new slimming dvd’s.Are they available in Canada??Let me know and let me know if she has any more dvd’s coming out. Keep up the good work everyone!!!Its all about being consistent and watching what you eat. I wish I could show everyone before and after pictures so there wouldnt be any doubts that Winsor Pilates does work.

April 5, 2010 at 10:28 pm
(748) aimee says:

Hey beth! I’m Canadian, and I ordered the Slimming Pilates system without any problems. The website is http://www.winsorslim.com. I just started doing them, and so far I am impressed. I was worried that they would be more for beginners, but you definitely feel the burn, and the Accelerator really makes you focus on your powerhouse.

April 10, 2010 at 2:44 am
(749) Joanne says:

Hey Beth,

I have followed your progress on here off and on as a fellow Canadian:) and want to congratulate you on your success. Maybe you could add a link that we could click on so that we can see before and after pics which I am sure would be inspirational to all of us. I have been plugging away at it myself but I am recovering from 2 car accidents in the past year so it is slow going unfortunately but I want to thank you for your words of encouragement and inspiration:). Cheers

April 16, 2010 at 12:44 am
(750) Alison says:

I’ve been using the program 4-5 times weekly for the last two weeks. I’m already thin but I’d like to tone. Ive noticed my tummy getting firmer but as someone with an already small stomach, this really isnt my target zone. I wonder if this workout will produce muscles in the legs, butt and arms as efficiently as some others? There seems to be no upper body targeted exercises..

I’m excited because I find this system very easy to use but in such a short time i cant say for sure how I feel about it.

Im skeptical about the comments on this page for sure…

April 20, 2010 at 1:26 am
(751) aimee says:

Well, I’m a few days late but I’m here to post my Month 5 results (See comments 706, 713, 730 and 741). I’ve lost another 9 lbs this month, which totals 54 lbs lost overall! After 5 months of Pilates, I am noticing a huge difference in my body, especially my shoulders, tummy, and butt (formerly flat and droopy, now high and round!)

This month I’ve been doing the new Slimming Pilates System, which I really like – the Accelerator is absolutely genius. I just won the circle workout system off of ebay, and I can’t wait for it to arrive so I can try it out next.

Alison: I’ve had good results developing muscle in the legs and arms, but I think it depends on what DVDs you use. I have the Upper Body Sculpting and the Bun and Thigh Sculpting workout which are obviously targeted towards the areas you mentioned. The Slimming Pilates system is also great for these areas. Just doing the 20 Minute Workout, for example, probably won’t give you the results you are looking for.

Keep up the good work everyone!

April 22, 2010 at 3:26 pm
(752) beth says:

Wow Aimee , good for you!!!!!!!!!!!That is amazing and I dont; doubt one word. I swear by it also. What is her new dvd like?The slimming dvd’s.Is it a lot of cardio, or more mat work? I do not like cardio in the least.Please let me know, I think I will order it.You will love the circle, I absoultely love it.The first few times I did, I felt it the next day and it works all parts of your body.Keep up the good work everyone

April 27, 2010 at 4:50 am
(753) janet w. says:

Hi! Ladys,

I just orded the slimming winsor pilates set. Can people who weigh almost 400lbs. start a weightloss program doing pilates? and i remember when i ordered winsor pilates 8 years ago it really worked for me i lost 60lbs in 4months. anyways i should be getting this wp set shortly as soon as i get it i’ll let you all know how weight and itches i loss.

April 27, 2010 at 10:00 am
(754) aimee says:

Thanks Beth! I really like the new workouts, and while I love Mari, I think it is a bit of a stretch to call the workouts “cardio.” They are essentially semi-fast paced matwork. I haven’t tried the Core Plus Reformer kit that you mentioned, but from what I’ve read I *think* the new workouts are similar to that. I actually saw a knock off Accelerator at Wal-Mart the other day, but I’m not sure how you would know what to do with it without Mari’s DVDs. And while I can’t comment on the quality of the knock off, I will say that I was very impressed with the Accelerator – definitely worth the money!

Janet W., if you had such great results in the past, I don’t see why you wouldn’t again! I think the secret is to find an activity you love and stick with it. Please keep us updated on your progress.

Is anyone else a member of the “Winsor Pilates Support Group” Facebook group? I think it was started by someone who used to post on this page.

April 27, 2010 at 9:55 pm
(755) JodiB says:

Aimee-I am a member of the facebook support group, are you?

May 3, 2010 at 6:21 pm
(756) Rach says:

Hi everyone!

I’ve been reading this page for over a year now and have done winsor pilates on and off but never really stuck to it for more than three weeks – which definitely made a difference! I have a holiday coming up in 4 weeks time and want to tone a little before I go! Now I’m finished with all my main uni work, I’m going to try and do Buns and Thighs everyday and alternate between the Abs one and the 20 minute workout.
I’m going to come back and post how I’m getting on, I’m hoping joining in on this page will help me keep my motivation up, as reading all your progress is truly inspiring! Keep it up :) xx

May 5, 2010 at 8:21 pm
(757) Michelle says:

Hey everyone! Your comments are so amazing. I’m 16 and weight 228. I have lost about 35 over the past year just doing Weight Watchers off and on. But I started Winsor Pilates just on Monday…and I think I am in love. Haha.

I can feel my abs being almost zipped up, and my other muscles just loving it. I will post back soon with my results. I am a junior in high school, and get my senior pictures done this October. Wish me luck, ladies!

May 8, 2010 at 1:24 pm
(758) Michelle says:

Hey guys, it’s me again. Well, today is Saturday. I haven’t done pilates yet this morning, but I have done it every single day since Monday. My stomach is firmer. When I wore my jeans that I normally have a slight “muffin top” with, the muffin top is diminishing. My best friend even commented on how my stomach looks flatter. (she knows I’ve been doing Pilates, so maybe it’s out of love, or maybe it’s the truth! lol)

I love pilates. It’s difficult the first few days, but then your body craves it. I look forward to doing it, I look forward to eating right. I have quit drinking pop and I feel amazing. I am only 16, and with the tempting food like puppy chow, cookies, and mountain dew at school, I can say that they’re no longer tempting me. I don’t care for those foods. I grab water and an orange or apple on my way to school, then have salad bar at lunch.

My sister (19, a sophomore in college) is doing it too since she’s gained the “freshman 15″ and loves it too.

I have lost two pounds since Monday (SERIOUSLY). This is not a gimmick. Not an advertisement. This is seriously an overweight teenager trying to make a difference…
And found an amazing way to do it. Good luck everyone!

May 11, 2010 at 8:12 pm
(759) gerard says:

Hi ladies! I’m a 26 year-old male, 5’6″, 125 lbs. Weightloss isn’t my goal that’s why I’m doing Pilates. I’ve always been underweight so I tried binge eating to gain weight. I actually weigh 118 lbs before. Now, the problem is my stomach isn’t flat so I tried doing the 20 minute workout 3x a week and I’m now on the fourth week. Well, I can feel the change in my body. I’m more flexible, my posture was improved and I feel confident. But my stomach is still kinda bloated and when I touch it, I can feel hard muscles underneath a layer of fat. Will that layer of fat go away if I continue with the 20 minute workout 3x a week or do I need to do something else? By the way, I wanna thank you gals because you all inspire me! Everytime I feel lazy to workout, I just click the bookmarks in my web browser that leads to this page, read some of your comments, progresses and how much Winsor Pilates changed you, and I’ll feel like working out again!

May 21, 2010 at 5:40 am
(760) Hannah J - 20 Wales says:

Morning to all of you that have left comments.
I too was sucked into the tv advert that appears every morning. I jumped straight on the internet and ordered my Windsor Circle Pilates. It took just under two weeks to arrive. In that time i found this website and managed to read all the comments. I have never been so excited to get into exercise before.
All of your comments have helped push me to be a better, happier and stronger person. Who needs will power when i have you?

Anyway Im Age 20 Femal 5ft tall and weight 9st 11Lbs/ 137Lbs.
Im a typical pear shape and a size 12Uk in trousers and size 8-10 top.
Im going on Holiday to Bulgaria with a close girl friend who is a size 8 and a size 28H in bra. I feel comlpetely useless stood next to her especially in a bikini.

With all the amazing results on here i am planning to do the 20minute and 10minute workout every day.
I also attend Curves Womens Gym 3-4times a week.
Ive been with curves for over 3months and have lost 12inches over my body but seem to be gaining weight. (when i started i was 9st 8Lbs)
Weight doesnt bother me as i know muscle weighs more than fat. I have also bought Jillian Michaels Banish Fat, Boost Metabolism(which someone on here has recommended)
I alow myself a naughty treat on a saturday night but eat under 1700calories 6days a week.
Im really hoping to loose inches off my legs and belly(podgy bit at the bottom) and to become happier with myself through these means of exercise.
Tuesday my pilates arrived and i did the 55min workout, 20min and 10min workout. Last night i also did the 20min circle and 10min workout. I do not feel sore in the slightest.Maybe this is because i havent Conquered the sucking the belly in while doing crunches.

Anyway sorry to babble on
I will be weighing and measuring myself every Saturday morning to see how i am doing.

Arms 12″
thighs 24″
belly (podgy bottom bit) 33″
and weight 137LBS
i’d really appreciate peoples comments and encouragement

Thank you
Hannah age 20 from Wales

May 21, 2010 at 11:28 am
(761) aimee says:

Hey Pilates People, and a special welcome to all the newcomers! How has everyone been doing? I can’t believe it has been six months since I dedicated myself to Pilates. Where has the time gone? This month I lost another 8 lbs, which brings my total weight lost up to 62 lbs! Over the past six months I’ve lost 6 1/2″ off my bust, 8″ off my waist, and 8 1/2″ off my hips. I’ve gone from a size 16 /18 to a size 10/12. I don’t really have a goal in mind, I am just going to keep on doing what I’ve been doing and see where I end up.

JodiB – I am a member of the Facebook group, but I am not a regular poster. I think I will post some before and after pictures on there when I settle at a permanent weight, though.

Rach – how is it going? Are you all ready for your holiday?

Michelle, way to go on losing 35 lbs! That’s great! I honestly believe that the secret is to find an activity that you love and to stick with it. Keep it up!

Gerard – If your are underweight but trying to get rid of a “belly pouch,” my suggestion would be to make adjustments to your diet. Things like white carbs, processed foods and alcohol (especially beer) can really make your stomach tent out. I bet that if you cut those things out of your diet you would notice a big improvement. Good luck!

Hannah J – It sounds like you have a really good diet and exercise plan in place, and good for you for taking measurments! That’s where I noticed the biggest improvement at first, and it was really motivating for me. It is a little odd that you weren’t sore at all, but maybe your core is already very strong? Who knows! Just keep working on your technique and I’m sure you will be fine. Keep up the good work!

Bye for now everyone! I hope hear about all of your amazing results soon!

Aimee

May 22, 2010 at 7:18 pm
(762) Joanne says:

Hi Aimed

I was wondering if your program also included cardio too to lose so much weight and if so what was your program? What Winsor pilates DVDs did you find the most effective to help you maintain a steady weight loss? Congrats on your awesome success. I find your posts very encouraging and inspiring and appreciate any information that you can offer. Thanks :)

May 23, 2010 at 7:59 am
(763) Mel says:

I started Winsor Pilates Feb 2 this year at 210 pounds. I do the tape 3 times a week with 1 hour cardio video in between those days with 1 day off. I still eat junk food but I am now 168 lbs! Its like my stomach shrunk so I cant eat as much but I’m just glad I didn’t have to diet because I hate healthy food.

May 28, 2010 at 3:11 pm
(764) maxi says:

Winsor Pilates – It does work! I used it years ago and formed a six pack within 2 weeks.
Now I’m post baby (of two years!) and want to find that six pack again. I have the circle workout and do the 20 mins 5 times a week and the aerobic workout 3 times. So far so good but it’s only been 10 days. I think we all expect miracles and I know I do but miracle or not I feel good after the exercise and that’s what it’s all about. The end results will just suddenly appear one day. Recommended.

May 31, 2010 at 10:28 am
(765) aimee says:

Joanne – I’m sorry to say that I don’t do much cardio beyond walking my kids around town, and I’ve always done that! I do know that it is good for my heart, so I just purchased some Jillian Michaels DVDs so that I can incorporate some more cardio into my routine. I have a ton of Pilates DVDs (just ask my husband!) and I pretty much just do whichever one appeals to me at the moment. If I had to pick a favorite, I guess it would be Advanced Body Slimming, since it works you HARD in a short amount of time.

Honestly, I think a large part of my success is because of how good Pilates makes me feel. A few years ago I read Intuitive Eating my By Evelyn Tribole and Elyse Resch and I’ve been trying to incorporate those principles into my life. Once I started practicing Pilates I found that I craved lighter foods and that I was satisified with less food. Maybe the mind-body emphasis in Pilates made me more in tune with my hunger and satiety cues? Who knows? I can’t really explain how or why it happened, but I remember someone else on here posting the same thing. It’s almost like “losing weight by accident.”

June 3, 2010 at 3:06 pm
(766) carolyn says:

I love Winsor Pilates. It’s great for stretching and toning my muscles, and it feels good. But i also do cardio and weight lifting to help me lose weight. I don’t think Pilates burns a lot of calories unless you do it for hours.

June 7, 2010 at 3:26 pm
(767) Sophie says:

i love windsor pilates it makes me feel as if i am having wild sex and you get right into it!I love how the chinese lady on teleshopping (where i bought mine)sort of shows her nipples while working out! so attractive.At the end of a work out you really feel like sucking a big fat juicy penis or squeeze you toned boobs. :)

June 7, 2010 at 3:27 pm
(768) helayna says:

i love windsor pilates it has really helped me achieve toned as in no time!

June 7, 2010 at 6:45 pm
(769) Jerry says:

@ Sophie really tho? you really had to go there? this is a pilates forum not a sexcapade. Anyways on to the next one.

June 7, 2010 at 10:50 pm
(770) Gayle says:

I can not get past the introduction. So I have no idea if they work or not. I know the DVD won’t work in my player.

June 11, 2010 at 6:04 am
(771) Cindy says:

Hello everyone, after reading these reviews I have ordered the Winsor Pilatesģ Sculpting Circle DVD Club Kit. I hope it is the right one I have ordered, please tell me if it is. I use to do the other exercise videos at home, but not really lost anything, and now am really bored just jumping around the house. So with encouragement and support from all you guys I hope it will work. Anyone else using this same product from now? How has it been for you? Thanks!

June 26, 2010 at 6:23 am
(772) Kelly says:

hello everyone, for a while i have been thinking about gettin wp, but i was never sure i weigh about 400lb and have tried all sorts of diets and home excercise and nothing really worked for me, but know i have realised that it takes a combination of diet and excercise to acheive what i want to acheive,

i have a holiday in 4 months and going to order my windsor pilates monday and wil deffinatly report back with my progress.

thanks for the advice its really inspired me to finally stick to something. :)

July 8, 2010 at 12:13 pm
(773) CassieKerr28 says:

heyy everyone!!
im cassie and im 16 years old. im not overweight but i would like to lose a few pounds and get in better shape before school starts again next september. since i started highschool 2 years ago ive gained about 20 pounds and im hoping to lose it again because i dont look as nice as i used to look. my thighs and butt have gotten plump and ive developed a muffin top.
will winsor pilates help me achieve my goals of losing 20 pounds? and getting in shape?

thanks alot and congrats to everyone on your super progress! from what ive read you have all done a wonderful job!

xoxo Cassie :)

July 17, 2010 at 3:23 am
(774) gerard says:

Hi everyone! It’s me again! I wanna say thanks to aimee, your advice really helped. Aside from trimming down white carbs and processed foods from my diet, I included cardio in my routine. Well, I didn’t notice it at first but when we had a pool party the other day, my sister was teasing me because of my obliques. She exclaimed “God, you have ‘Britneys’!” (yes, she meant obliques. Based on the Britney Spears video I’m not a girl, not yet a woman. Cause she didn’t know the right term before and that’s how she called obliques from then on). My goal has been achieved, but I’m gonna continue doing this. Who knows where Winsor Pilates will take me next! :)

August 9, 2010 at 5:29 pm
(775) Beth says:

Hi again everyone!!Hope you are all well!I’ve been on summer vacation since June and hmm I kind of fell off the wagon.LOL, Im still slim but am feeling not as toned.Back at it again tommorrow!!Is there a facebook support group?Wow, yes I would love to join. You could actually see pictures of before and after. Let me know everyone!!Ill keep you updated on my progress starting tomorrow again !!Keep up the good work!!

August 11, 2010 at 9:23 am
(776) Hannah J - 20 Wales says:

Hay Guys, I definitely fell off the wagon 
But Iím re-staring from scratch. I have 5months to get toned and hopefully start to feel comfortable in my own body. Since leaving high school my fitness deteriorated big time. Then I passed my driving test, became settled in a new relationship and Drive Thruís were my new favourite thing.
Iíve been struggling with my weight ever since. I know Iím not huge, but with all these celeb beach bodies appearing in magazines and the faint white lines of stretch marks scared across the inside of my thighs Iíve really lost my self esteem.
Being 20 and only 5foot with a young face I donít feel like a women, attractive or sexy. I started Curves gym this February gone and saw results, but with my weight loss I thought I was able to eat what I wanted and piled it back on again, Iíve recently been on holiday and being in a bikini was the most uncomfortable experience of my life. With the weight gain and the image of my body in my head Iíve really lost my libido with my boyfriend of three years. Turning 21 in January I really want to be able to start to like and approve of my body again. So since Monday 9th August Iíve started a calorie controlled diet with going to the gym 3 times a week, running twice a week and Iím aiming to bring back Windsor Pilates 5times a week. Like she says on the dvd, ďwho doesnít have 20minutes a week?Ē
Wish me luck ladies 
And if anyone was to set up a Facebook Windsor Pilates Page I will be joining, please paste the link on this website. I really think looking at peoples results will push me to make amends and be the real me that Iíve wanted to be for the last 3years.

August 20, 2010 at 9:26 am
(777) Nazia says:

EVERYONE SHOULD READ :

Hey guys, I love visiting this page every so often and reading about all your stories. Pilates really does work but you have to understand diet is 80% and workout is only 20%. So say even if you did 40 mins cardio and 20 pilates but do eat junk then it cancels out your workout. Saying that every person has a different metabolism rate..Some people will lose weight faster than others. Pilates reshapes your body and gives you that lean look.

I however do not feel pilates helps me with my arms but definitely helps me with my abs and buns and thighs.

JUST TYPE MARI WINSOR PILATES on GOOGLE VIDEOS OR YOUTUBE and YOU DONT NEED TO BUY these videos.

September 11, 2010 at 12:43 pm
(778) Candy says:

Hi everyone!
im 16 and i plan to start doing winsor pilates to get in shape and lose weight because in the past few years ive gotten really lazy and gained about 30 pounds, making me at an unhealthy weight for my age and height.

my mom had ordered the winsor pilates years ago, and they have been just collecting dust ever since she stopped using them.

i want to know if pilates will help me shrink my butt and thighs and give me a flat belly and no muffin top :)

also, how often do i do the tapes and do i need to do cardio and things like that too? because my mom no longer has the booklets that came with the tapes because she bought them a long time ago.

thanks :)

September 12, 2010 at 2:13 am
(779) kimberly says:

I being doing winsor pilates for almost 5 years now ! its amazing i havent being doing it straight for the 5 years but am currently getting back into it now ! its amazing how quick u notice a difference in your core strength and i highly recommend it for dancers as it helps in particular with ballet technique and balance. When teaching ballet i recommened it to my students and the ones who listened got amazing strength,balance and core. It truly works and they teach you the technique as you do it so it really is simple. And it soo fun and once you stop you just keep doing it in your head and want to do it again ! really works ! and its good how there is soo many routines that you dont get bored with doing the same one :)

September 17, 2010 at 12:59 am
(780) miranda says:

I just started doing the winsor pilates circle again with
elliptical machine every other day. I find the routine easy to
stick with and the results are noticeable within a week or two.
i’m just having trouble sticking to a diet and i hate working out
and then eating junk food right after. i feel counterproductive
and some days i eat to little then the next day i eat way too much. I just can’t seem to find a balance in my diet. any advice please ????

September 23, 2010 at 12:50 am
(781) Livvy says:

I began doing winsor pilates about a month ago, just the 20 minute workout on the first dvd as thats all ive got time for about 4 times a week. Im not technically on a diet but I stopped eating junk and snacking between meals so i just have 3 meals a day nothing else and im drinking lots more water instead of tea and coffee. So far I have managed to lose 3 kilos in 1 month (started off at 59kg now 56kg) & lots more of my clothes fit much better although I didn’t take any measurements so I dont know exactly how many inches ive lost! I would like to get down to 50kg by xmas, but i think it might start getting more difficult now as I dont have time for any cardio exercise (2 kids under 3!). Wish me luck in getting down to my first pre pregnancy weight, I hope its possible!

September 25, 2010 at 10:07 am
(782) Maria says:

I just purchased the winsor slimming pilates and the 2nd time I used it the bar snapped!

September 25, 2010 at 12:47 pm
(783) Cassie Kerr says:

Today im taking a stand against my laziness and procrastination about losing weight. today is the start of a lifestyle change! ive always been the chubby one out of my friends and its always bothered me when they can share clothes and i cant share with them.

im 16 and 128lbs which is too much for someone of my height. ive used Winsor Pilates before so i know they work. i just need to stay with the routine.

heres my plan:

winsor pilates bun n thigh workout (daily)
winsor pilates ab sculpting workout (daily)
30 minutes walking on the treadmill (daily)

im also going to drink only water and start eating healthier foods in smaller amounts. im also going to eat slower and chew my food really well so its not stored as fat immediately.

ill post back with how im doing every two weeks. wish me luck. :D

xoxo
cassie :)

September 25, 2010 at 6:38 pm
(784) Amelia says:

I just got the winsor pilates today and I have a question! If I do the 20 minute workout 5-6 days a week, drink water and eat healthy, will I lose around 20-30 pounds by Christmas time? I’m 5’9″ and 185 pounds :P and also, how many times a week should I do the accelerated body sculpting? I was thinking 2-4 but your advice would really help me out :) Thank you so much!

September 27, 2010 at 1:38 am
(785) lilly says:

My friend and I started winsor pilates after school on mondays and thursdays, when we first did we nearly died! But now our core strength and muscles are soo much better we can do a whole heap of them without hurting! My abs are certainly stronger and there is less cellulite around my thighs, it is so awesome, for people of all ages it really works :P

October 3, 2010 at 6:55 pm
(786) Casey says:

Hi, I was wondering if anyone has been using the newer Winsor Slimming Pilates, it has just been released here in NZ and I’m considering buying it. Has anyone used it? How does it compare to the previous circle and band workouts? Is it better worse or about the same? Thanks heaps

October 8, 2010 at 11:45 am
(787) Sarah says:

Amelia,

The amount of weight that you lose depends on a lot of factors. One thing that you have to keep in mind is that muscle weighs more than fat, so if you don’t lose as much weight as you wanted to, you might drop in inches and look a lot thinner and healthier. Because of this it’s hard to tell you if you will actually lose the weight or not, but you will definitely achieve toned muscles and look healthier.

I was a dancer for 16 years and at first when I stopped dancing I lost 10 pounds but I lost all of the definition in my muscles, then I quickly gained around 25 pounds of fat when all the muscle strength was gone. I’m seriously considering purchasing the mari winsor slimming pilates, but I haven’t yet because I’m weary about shelling out the $75.

October 8, 2010 at 5:28 pm
(788) dobbo says:

Well what can i say ! sounds fantastic this wp and think i am about to order the sculpting circle kit. I am from uk and 40 now and need a kick up the bum to restart my keep fit campaign. I suppose i cant really complain, I danced for 15 years and after i left the fat went to my thighs lol i then went up to 224 lb I have lost 84 lb in total but have recently (since i turned 40) put a 14 lb back on. I do a lot of walking as part of my job and i also take part in zumba lessons which i love but to be honest it is toning of my body that i desperatly need. I will be brave and post my measurements and will post another in 4 weeks and see were i stand :)

5ft 8″ Tall

154 Lb
Bust 36″
Waist 32″
Hips 37″
Bum 39″

October 24, 2010 at 6:04 pm
(789) beth says:

Can you order her new slimming Dvd’s in canada?Has anyone used them?Is is a lot of cardio??I am only interested in mat work. I hate aerobics . I have found wonderful results doing all of her dvd’s.Just looking for a different one. Keep up the good work everyone!

November 19, 2010 at 12:52 pm
(790) Dianne says:

I have done the Winsor Pilates few years ago, but for only 4 weeks…my weight stayed the same..but the inches have gone down….I am back on it again….lost one inch off of my baby tummy (I’m 51) after only 5 sessions, less than a week, but my scale has gone up about 1 and half lbs…I don’t get it….I know that the muscle weigh more than fat….but come on…that’s too soon…and I’m on Low GI diet and have been for few weeks now. The Bun and Thighs workout..what a killer…and yes it is worth it..and yes Winsor Pilates does work….I have bought all the 7 videos from Salvation Army for $14…what a deal…and they were never been used because the VHS (yes I still have VCR) were still in their original wrap. I guess my advise to the new beginners is go with the measurement and your clothes..and weigh yourself once a week or a whole month….and stay away from anything with flour and sugar. Will keep you posted…and I have read every one of your messages …. way to go everyone! Cheers!

November 24, 2010 at 11:32 pm
(791) Molly says:

I LOVE Winsor Pilates so much! I think the best part for me is that it’s soo relaxing. I don’t mind doing the accelerated version which is an hour because it’s all floor exercises that don’t even feel like working out. Some of the repetitions will probably be hard for you at first, but if you do it modified, it won’t be long until you can do it full out. I don’t know about weight loss since I did it when I was in high school and I was a size 5 not needing to lose anything but I’m starting it again so I’ll write another review in a month :)

December 2, 2010 at 11:29 pm
(792) Molly says:

Hi everyone again! I finally got the dvds and did the accelerated body sculpting today :) I am so tired. But hoping to get good results by doing it every day this month so when I go home next month I am feeling and looking better! I’m 23 years old, 5’8 and 171 lbs. I really wanna be down to 165 before I go home to visit but it seems like when I work out I just gain and never lose. But I’m also measuring inches so I will see improvement there hopefully.

For those of you who have had success with Winsor Pilates, do you incorporate cardio? and if so, how often do you do cardio vs. pilates?

Thanks :)

December 3, 2010 at 7:37 pm
(793) Diana says:

Hi everyone! I’ve read all your comments and I’m very excited about using winsor pilates. Wish me luck..!!!

Aime can I make you a question? How much did you weighed when you started using winsor? and whats your height? Thanks so much

December 6, 2010 at 8:43 pm
(794) Aimee says:

Hi Diana!

I’m 5’8″, and I weighed 245 lbs when I started Pilates. I now fluctuate between 185 – 190 lbs, and I’m a size 10 – 12 (American sizes). I’m not uber-thin by any means, but happy and healthy. :)

December 14, 2010 at 7:07 pm
(795) Dianne says:

hi Molly..for a faster result…cardio would be good idea to incorporate with Pilate…I do my walking 45 mins-1 hr ; 5 x a week…and I have friends notice that I have lost weight….I mostly lost inches..and only lost 2.5lbs .. and my pants are lose….Amazing eh….getting back at it tonight..was off of it for over a week…Bad me!!! No excuse … Happy Holidays Everyone!!! Cheers…

January 8, 2011 at 9:05 am
(796) Beth says:

Hi again everyone and Happy New Year!!I’m excited to say that I bought a new dvd of her at Walmart here in Canada!Mari Winsor for Pink Core Challenge!!The exercises are only 10 minutes long and there are 4 of them. Im loving it as it is different for me!!I have almost all her dvd’s and was looking for something different.
I’ve been back at it for a week now and I can already feel a difference!!I love Pilates!!I feel so much more flexible and toned!!It does work with being consistent and watching what you eat!! Pilates for Life!!I’ve never enjoyed exercising more than I do doing Pilates!!Keep up the good work everyone!!

January 18, 2011 at 8:05 am
(797) Jenni says:

Beth, I have read all of your comments and am truly inspired by your success! I have had the first set of WP DVD’s for years (step-by-step, 20 minute and accelerated 57 minute), and in 2006 I did the accelerated everyday for about 2 months to lose 25 pounds but man, did I look GOOD! I met the love of my life, quit smoking and got a desk job and am now at my heaviest of 260 lbs. I know that WP will help me lose inches quickly and feel great and I don’t know why it’s taken me so long to get back to it. I started again yesterday with the 20 minute and plan to do either the 20 minute or accelerated DVD everyday for 30 days. I will definitely be coming back here to post my results and hold myself accountable. I’m glad that this forum is still going strong after so many years!

January 19, 2011 at 2:07 am
(798) M says:

Hey everybody. I am glad I found this site and it has inspired me to become “FIT” again.

I started doing Winsor pilates when I was 16 or 17 after my mother had bought them for me. I was a chubby kid always growing up and decided one day that I needed to do something about it so I didn’t continue to get bigger and bigger. I ended up doing the 20 minute tape, 5 days a week and quickly shed about 40 lbs, from 170 lbs to 130lbs within 2 months. I also had cut out drinking SODA completely, which I consumed a lot of and for sure contributed to my weight.

I continued this for a couple years and then I moved out of the house and started eating crappy food, working a 9 to 5 and becoming pretty much sedentary again.

So here I am back to square one…I started doing the basic 20 minute routine again, as well as 20 minutes of cardio at the gym 3x a week.

I will continue posting here and keeping you all updated.

As of today I am 160lbs @ 5’9″. I wear a size 30 in jeans and a 9/10 in pants. Goal is to be 130lbs again!

M

January 24, 2011 at 1:51 am
(799) cialis says:

An fascinating discussion is price comment. I think that it is best to write extra on this matter, it might not be a taboo subject however generally individuals are not enough to talk on such topics. To the next. Cheers

January 24, 2011 at 4:59 pm
(800) beth says:

Jenny…Congratulations…You again are taking back control of your life!!!!!!!!!Its a wonderful feeling!!Just go day by day..You will lose the inches!I have every confidence.My sister and law have been back at it since Jan2 and I havent missed a day! God I feel soo great!!I can feel it and see it in my clothes!!Keep it up everyone!!Keep me updated. As for the comment about the price, Im not sure what you are talking about. Doing her dvd’s is not expensive!If you even have a vcr, you can buy her tapes for not even 99cents!

January 31, 2011 at 6:48 am
(801) Bianca says:

Pilates does work.
YES!
I started it like 4 days ago.
& already lost 8 pds.
I do the ab scuplting it’s not long at all.
And if I’m in the mood I do the accelerated body workout.
I’m already in somewhat shape… i weigh 130 & i wanna get down to 118
& I’m already 123 (:
& tones it everything up..

Key things you have to remeber:
Always be consistent [it may hurt the first time but just go with it, it killed me at first]
Don’t eat any junk food
Always follow exactly what she says…

Goodluck(:

January 31, 2011 at 7:26 pm
(802) Maria says:

I finally decided to start my workout program.

I found a brand new set at a thrift shop a few months ago, but finally opened it and started the program.

I am 5’3, 180 lbs (after 4 kids) with a 37.5 waist line so here hoping.

I am following the maximum weight loss plan, so MON, WED & FRI I will do the accelerated scuplting video and TUES, THURS & SAT I will do the 20 minute video.

Reading all these reviews I am so motivated and can’t wait. I only negative I find about the videos is that Mari talks a bit too much LOL.

I will post weekly updates for everyone out there.

February 3, 2011 at 4:57 am
(803) Naomi says:

ummm after all these fantastic comments, last week I decided it was time for me to begin my 20 minute workout everyday (weekend excluded).

Yeah so…so far, after 7 sessions, nothing at all happened. no weight loss, no toned anything. Will see how it goes in the future, if everything is still the same after 3 weeks than I will definitely decide it’s a waste of time.

Oh and before you say ‘you should also do cardio, blah blah’, I walk about 3 miles everyday very, very fast.

February 3, 2011 at 4:58 am
(804) Naomi says:

Bianca….

pa-lease.

February 13, 2011 at 3:18 am
(805) Ami says:

I have just downloaded all of the Winsor Pilate videos
I am so excited to start the videos. I just find it hard to change my eating habits especially at night time. Hopefully this will work for me, I have been overweight all of my life and I would just love to lose 50 pounds. I hope it works for me like it has worked for all of you!I am 5’8 around 220 pounds. I am not in it for the weight loss I just want to become more toned around my stomach area….ok all over lol! Wish me luck. So glad I found this posting.

February 14, 2011 at 9:40 am
(806) Emma says:

I have just started the Windsor pilates DVD toady, I am really impressed with all the comments that spanned over quite a few years. I did the 20 mins circle workout and 10 mins blast, it really did not feel like excursise and that had been why I did not do Pilate b4. However reading all your comments, maybe this works with out having to sweat and get that awful muscle burn?

March 2, 2011 at 7:32 am
(807) Maria says:

Update:

about 3 weeks later, lost about 8 lbs and down 3.5 inches on my waist.

Haven’t done any cardio really, just stuck with the videos. Cut out all pops, juices and alcohol so I think this really helped as well. Before when I went to the gym I still drank all these things and never lost anything.

My waist looks more toned and I can fit in some pants that I put away cause they were tight.

I have 3 weeks to go til our vacation so I am hoping for maybe another 5-10 lbs. Wish me luck :)

Previous comments:

I finally decided to start my workout program.

I found a brand new set at a thrift shop a few months ago, but finally opened it and started the program.

I am 5′3, 180 lbs (after 4 kids) with a 37.5 waist line so here hoping.

I am following the maximum weight loss plan, so MON, WED & FRI I will do the accelerated scuplting video and TUES, THURS & SAT I will do the 20 minute video.

Reading all these reviews I am so motivated and canít wait. I only negative I find about the videos is that Mari talks a bit too much LOL.

I will post weekly updates for everyone out there.

March 13, 2011 at 3:30 am
(808) Jamie says:

I’ve recently decided to take up excercising because of
A trip to Hawaii I’m going in in april. I’m only 16, and I can
Admit I don’t have the best “bikini body”, but every day after
My twenty minute Winsor Pilates workout, I can certainly
Feel it in my abs. I have high hopes that it will work
After reading all the fantastic reviews.

March 18, 2011 at 7:29 pm
(809) chaitanya says:

Winsor pilates really works! but we have to be consistent!
thats what she says in many of her workouts.
be consistent and you’ll see a great difference in you very fast!

April 25, 2011 at 12:10 pm
(810) Danielle says:

I have these DVD’s and I am excited to start them. I will start today!!! 20 minutes a day?! I can do that. I have a 14 month old and it is very difficult to get anything done. I will keep everyone posted. I’m glad I found this. It will help me stay on track I think.

April 26, 2011 at 1:29 pm
(811) Loopyloo says:

Hi my Winsor Pilates circle workout came this morning. I am sick of feeling overweight and unhappy. I am 5ft 4inches and am a size 10/12 uk size. I have a friends wedding and hen do coming up and i want to be skinny, not to bothered by what the scales say but im deffo interested in losing inches.

Here goes, will get bk to u all in a week!!!

Wish me luck!!

April 26, 2011 at 10:04 pm
(812) Brenna says:

Hello,

I have been reading these ever since last summer when I got my winsor pilates (i have the originals). Well I decided to really be dedicated to them this time (before I would only do them for about 2 weeks), i want to lose more inches then weight, so I am hoping these will do the job(:

I will be posting my results also.

April 27, 2011 at 4:28 pm
(813) Madison says:

Hey everyone, I just got the 55 minute accelerated fat burning workout. I’m 21, 5’3 and 126lbs. I would ideally like to get down to 110lbs (between studying and work there is little time to exercise). I did the workout once so far (although at the moment I’m definitely mostly flailing around I’m sure I’ll get the hang of it). Does anybody have a recommendation of how many times a week I should be doing this to reach my goal by lets say August? Of course everyone is different but I am changing my diet to go along with it (less carbs, no soda and smaller portions).
Thanks guys :)

May 10, 2011 at 6:18 pm
(814) Arawyn says:

Hi,
I have been using the circle win10 workout for 10days now. The biggest change for me has been my posture. I don’t even have to think about standing correctly it has just naturely changed which is really great. Also lost an inch from my waist, stomach and hips in the first week. I plan on alternating the accelerate fat burning workout and the 20min circle workout each day. day 10 now and I plan on making it to day 30. good luck everyone and i hope to hear about your progress.

June 21, 2011 at 3:00 pm
(815) Jerri says:

Hey everyone!!!!! I love reading these posts and finally jumped on the WP bandwagon! So far I have been doing the workouts for 2 in a half weeks. I started at 250 pounds I am now currently 235 pounds….thats 14 pounds……went from a size loose 20 to a size 16….sometimes an 18 depending the cut of the clothes. But this is such an awesome workout…..I also started cutting alot of my carbs back…..so that helped out also….but the main thing i do is the accelerated workout for 1 hour 5 days a week….3 days of the week i go in the gym to do 1 hour on the elliptical machine. I noticed while doing pilates, sometimes you might not notice a huge weightloss but the inches count! I haven’t measured myself but the clothes I have its getting loose and loose everytime. I had a double stomach (please don’t laugh lol) now i have a small pouch left. My love handles went down alot…..its really great….I start my workouts during the evenings after work and pilates 2 hours before I go to bed so the burn can last thru the night. but I have some of the best sleep and I wake up feeling great. Thanks everyone for the success stories….I will keep reading them to keep me motivated to get to my goal around 160 pounds. keep it going folks!

June 27, 2011 at 11:06 pm
(816) Annie says:

I bought the DVD 6 years ago and tried it on and off. With three kids there is not much free time on hands. I usually go back to it when I have back aches. Somehow after doing the 20 min program, my back feels much better and I sleep better. I decided a week and half ago to do this regularly. I needed the exercise and good sleep. Doing this slowly without rushing really works the abs. I can feel the muscles working hard and yes, my husband is seeing the difference! There is much more strength in the abdominal muscles and my bladder control after middle age is improving! A strong, healthy powerhouse does make a difference for a mid-life aging body. I am 40 years old and feeling better than in my 20′s!

July 3, 2011 at 10:01 am
(817) Marina says:

Hello Everyone!
reading these posts are soooooo inspiring! you guys have all motivated me to get back into doing pilates again :)

im going to start the program today, and i will post an update here every week to let you all know how i am doing! my goal is to lose about 10-15 pounds, but i want to lose more inches rather than weight. i just want to fit into my old jeans again LOL!
so im going to do the Bun and Thigh sculpting, Ab sculpting, Accelerated Workout, and the 20 minute workout. ill alternate between these videos everyday, and ill also start going for walks or runs (well, more like jogs lol) and eat much more healthier!

wish me luck, ill post back in a week! :)

August 4, 2011 at 9:01 am
(818) maria says:

latest update:

have been up and down with the pilates, doing full weeks and then off for some other weeks :( However I can happily report that I am weighing in at 168 lbs so 12 lb weight loss since I first started.

I have started drinking fruit smoothies as well for energy and to stay full, it has helped alot and got me to cut out my daily Ice Caps from Tim Hortons LOL (added bonus is that I can save almost $50 a mth from not buying these anymore.)

well leaving for another vacation on Sept 3 to the Dominican so hopefully I can lose maybe 5-10 lbs by then if I truly stick to the pilates for the rest of the month.

post back at the end of the month.

PREVIOUS POSTS
Update:

about 3 weeks later, lost about 8 lbs and down 3.5 inches on my waist.

Havenít done any cardio really, just stuck with the videos. Cut out all pops, juices and alcohol so I think this really helped as well. Before when I went to the gym I still drank all these things and never lost anything.

My waist looks more toned and I can fit in some pants that I put away cause they were tight.

I have 3 weeks to go til our vacation so I am hoping for maybe another 5-10 lbs. Wish me luck

Previous comments:

I finally decided to start my workout program.

I found a brand new set at a thrift shop a few months ago, but finally opened it and started the program.

I am 5′3, 180 lbs (after 4 kids) with a 37.5 waist line so here hoping.

I am following the maximum weight loss plan, so MON, WED & FRI I will do the accelerated scuplting video and TUES, THURS & SAT I will do the 20 minute video.

Reading all these reviews I am so motivated and canít wait. I only negative I find about the videos is that Mari talks a bit too much LOL.

I will post weekly updates for everyone out there.

August 8, 2011 at 8:20 am
(819) Emma says:

Hi,

I am going to properly start working hard with Pilates this week, about an hour per day.

I have to work hard at weight loss because of hormone imbalances, so my total weight loss regime includes: Drinking 2L+ water, taking an Omega 3 supplement, cutting out white carbs, high fat, high sugar foods, eating mainly raw fruits and veggies and drinking green tea with lemon.
Because its the holidays, I will be working out for an extra 2-3 hours on top of Pilates for quick results, and when back at school I will work out for about 1.5 hours per day including at least 40 mins of Pilates.

Experience has told me that weight is not a great indicator of success, so I will update with my inch loss results weekly and just hope they are as good as everyone else’s on here!

8th August 2011:
Bust – 37″
Waist – 30″
Hips – 39″
Bum – 43″
Thigh – 26″

Here’s hoping for great results, hopefully writing on this forum will give me some extra motivation as well!

August 10, 2011 at 8:33 am
(820) lisa says:

How many calories would you say winsor pilates bun and thigh burns?

August 29, 2011 at 7:56 pm
(821) Ramona says:

Okay. So I brought out the Winsor Pilates today for the first time in 4 years (went from size 20 to 14). The previous experience I had made a huge difference in my body – especially stomach fatness. Now, I’m a size 12/14 (depends on the brand), but stomach fat has returned with a vengeance! I just finished the 20-minute workout. I am sweating. I am in bad shape! Will post next week about result.

October 9, 2011 at 7:48 pm
(822) Esther says:

I am 5’2″ and before trying out Winsor Pilates, I weighed 150 lbs. I carried a spare tire around my waist because all of the weight gain would go straight to it. In (literally) 2 weeks of working out to the DVD, my whole body tightened up and most noticeably — my waist line. I’ve tried every diet you could imagine (Phen Fens, South Beach, Atkins, NutriSystem, etc.) but it really never worked for me. Yes, it’s cliche to say it, but I lost the weight only to gain it all back (even faster than taking it off).

Winsor Pilates really does work. The moves seem easy but you know you’ve gotten a good work out when your entire body aches the next day. Can’t explain why since it seems like you’re doing nothing strenous. I’ve probably lost a good 6 inches from my waist, and my butt and thighs were definitely toned (including arms).

Fast forward 3 years (pregnancy, new mom stage, etc.) and I’ve gained the weight back (took 3 years though!). It’s been 2 weeks since I’ve been training for my first 5k but the training doesn’t even come close to the results I’ve seen from doing Winsor Pilates. I run approximately 12 miles a week but hands-down, Winsor Pilates wins. Needless to say, I will be starting her program again on Monday (tomorrow!).

October 14, 2011 at 5:57 pm
(823) Sofie says:

Hi all pilates lovies!

Im a 23yr old girl from Norway. And I have just ordered the pilates sirckle.
And I wonder if there is any advice u can give me bfore starting on monday?
And how many times a week I shoulod do it?
What has been working for YOU?

Btw, u are all VERY inspiering ppl! I enjoyed rading sum off the stories!

Love from Sofie

December 21, 2011 at 12:41 am
(824) Rachel says:

I had pneumonia this past February and I smoked, I ended up very sick. I quit smoking in March and started to gain weight immediately. I weighed 192lbs. I started doing pilates 3x a week and walking for 45 minutes every day. It is December now and I weigh 148 lbs and I am healthy. I also eat a healthy Mediterranean diet with one meal a week that is anything I want. People that know me would ask in amazement what I was doing because the fat that went *first was around my waistline. I am still losing inches all over like crazy.

December 21, 2011 at 11:56 am
(825) Joanne says:

That is awesome Rachel! Which videos were u using? If you dont mind me asking, how old r u? Reason I ask is that I am also doing the vids 3x a week and lots of walking but the weight isnt dropping as fast as I would like. I am in my early 40′s so not sure if it is a metabolism issue or what. Keep up the good work!

January 6, 2012 at 12:03 pm
(826) Cornseed says:

I have the Mari Winsor slimming pilates. Its now been a month and there is a positive side and a negative side.. Positive, in 2 and a half weeks I lost 14,6 centimeters overall. Negative, i went on a 6 day vacation and I actually felt the centimeters growing back. So now… I’m back at square one, is this normal or do I just have a bad metabolism??? So bumbed!!

January 6, 2012 at 12:03 pm
(827) Cornseed says:

I have the Mari Winsor slimming pilates. Its now been a month and there is a positive side and a negative side.. Positive, in 2 and a half weeks I lost 14,6 centimeters overall. Negative, i went on a 6 day vacation and I actually felt the centimeters growing back. So now… I’m back at square one, is this normal or do I just have a bad metabolism??? So bumbed!!

January 15, 2012 at 3:38 pm
(828) MB says:

I purchased the Winsor Pilates years about 10 years ago when I was in my teens and noticed results, but only done them for about a year. My New Years resolution was to get back in shape so I purchased the new Winsor Pilates with the 4 DVD’s and the accelerator. After about 1 1/2 weeks I have already dropped 5 pounds and feel great!! They truly work!

January 30, 2012 at 10:29 pm
(829) Aimee says:

Hello Folks! I used to post here all the time in 2010 when I was losing weight after having my second child. (I am currently down 90 lbs!) Three months ago I had hip replacement surgery (I’m only 29) and have been unable to do any physical activity since then, so as not to risk dislocating my new hip. I am at the smallest weight I’ve been in a while, but I feel flabby and like I lost all my muscle tone. In a couple of days I will be 12 weeks post-op, which means I will be able to restart my beloved Pilates practice! I am so excited, I never thought I would miss it this much! Wish me luck!

February 6, 2012 at 9:00 am
(830) Jerry says:

Aimee!!!!! I have been reading your comments over the years and your story has given me great inspiration! And congrats to your weightloss! You’ve done an amazing job, and I hope you feel better from your surgery :) …….

I commented back in the 400′s. So far like I stated before Im 5’8, and weighed 248lbs (size 18). Now due to my changing of my eating habits and consistent workout (not pilates) I am down to 213lbs (size 14). Now Since its February I want to stay indoors and not go to the gym, so I will be starting my pilates in my basement. I will repost in a month to show my results.

April 13, 2012 at 4:50 pm
(831) Cassandra says:

Hello everyone.

Well i am a 19 year old female, i weigh a huge 255.6lbs. I’ve always had issues with my weight since i can remember. I’ve decided finally that I’m ready to give it my everything, so i ordered the winsor pilates series, and am so looking forward to it arriving. My plan is to combine it with also doing cardio and other exercises at the gym :)

I will post back my results once by set arrives.
Really excited after reading all your comments :)

April 16, 2012 at 12:25 am
(832) Logan says:

Hey, I was wondering if there is any Winsor DVD in particular that can sculpt and get rid of the love handle area as well as sculpting the lower ab area (basically the entire lower waistline)?

Thanks

April 23, 2012 at 1:30 pm
(833) Taggart says:

So I bought the circle pilates years ago and never really gave it a go. Been putting on tones of weight recently. I just moved house and found the circle and a few DVDs so I decided to give it a go.

I will post some results after 10 days, on day 3 now. But enjoying it so far. Doing the circle pilates and the fat burning workouts. As a clumsy person its nice to be able to follow an aerobic dvd and not feel silly!

To Logan: there really isnt one that you are looking for. You can work out various muscle groups but if you dont get rid of the layers of fat covering them, you wont see results. The answer is cardio cardio cardio for an all over body effect. The fat burning dvd is great for that.

May 4, 2012 at 7:19 pm
(834) Beth says:

Hi everyone!!Sorry its been soo long since I have written.Im still a die hard pilates fan!I love Mari Winsor and no other pilates dvd’s will ever compare to hers.I have just started doing her Maximum Burn Advanced Series and OMG..it’s wonderful!!Very challening, so you have to be very comfortable with all the exercises before you begiin. My stomach is still sore a week later. I am doing her Pilates for Pink for 20 min every evening as I am reallybusy through the week for anyting longer than that.On the weekends I am doing the maximum burn, it is 55 min long.
For all of you just starting out, be patient..You have to be consistent and watch what you eat. This does work but you have to work at it. You will see a difference, I promise you that. It really tones and u lose inches. I would start out at the basics , until you are comfortable to move on. Her 20 min ab routine is awesome and so is her bun and thighs. Her circle dvd is amazing too. I pretty much own all of them , so now I am challening myself even furthur.
Keep us updated, you can do this!!!!Pilates will always be my favorite exercise and I will never do any other dvds but hers!!!!

May 5, 2012 at 7:21 am
(835) Taggart says:

Started to think no one posted here anyomore lol.

I started two weeks ago. Have only lost 2 pound but have lost 9.5″ all over and am feeling firm!!

I am just using the buns and thighs workout everyday plus either the circle pilates for beginners or the maximum burn aerobic workout.

I hope to move on to the advanced circle pilates soon but I am pleased with my progress so far!

I used to keep a blog for when I was quitting the cigarettes and it really helped to keep motivated. Been smoke free for over 2 years now. I decided I should keep a blog during this journey too come and join me @

next update @ session 20!

May 5, 2012 at 5:52 pm
(836) Kate says:

I posted here ages ago and now I’m starting over. Lots of life crises have happened in a very short period of time and my weight has suffered for it, the least of which was emergency spinal surgery at Christmas (or else I would have been a quadriplegic on a breathing tube.) Yes, THAT was the least of the crises! I was not allowed to exercise for three months (couldn’t even pick up a gallon of milk) so my weight has suffered. Now that I can exercise again I am getting back to the pool (doctor recommended) and I’m going to get back to my Winsor Pilates and I am thrilled! I will post again in a couple of weeks to share my progress. Thank you for being there.

May 6, 2012 at 9:55 am
(837) Taggart says:

hi kate, I hope you are doing well in your recovery! I would say once you start moving again the weight will fall away. Keep positive and I look forward to hearing your results!

June 25, 2012 at 11:06 am
(838) Jose says:

Just ordered my Winsor Pilates DVD today. How much weight can I expect to be losing with doing it for 4 hours a week, plus going running 3 times a week for an hour? someone please answer!! and does it really work that fast??
Thank you!

July 13, 2012 at 10:29 am
(839) MarinaB says:

Hi everyone! Hope you all are doing well with your pilates routines :)

Im 18 years old and seriously out of shape. I weighed 122 pounds when I started the program almost two weeks ago. I have to say that i was amazed with the results i had after just the first week. I already lost 4 pounds…woohoo! I’m going to continue doing pilates all summer so that i can have a killer body by the time i head back to school in september.

i have not changed my eating drastically. I eat mroe fruits and vegetables than i used to and i try to cut out unnecessary treats and sweets throughout the day, but other than that my eating is the same. I also eat smaller portions of food than i used to beacause i stop eating when im full.

i have my bikini hanging in my room to remind me of my goal. Hopefully i have the chance to wear it and look really great!

I will post back every Sunday with my reports on how I am doing. Hopefully i can lose my goal of 12 pounds quickly. I want to weigh 110 pounds (dont worry! its healthy for my height)

Good luck everyone! :)

July 18, 2012 at 2:06 pm
(840) Vicki says:

MarinaB-How is your progress coming? What is the exact pilates DVD that you do? I just ordered the Winsor Slimming DVDs with the accelerator and am waiting for it to arrive. I am weighing in at 124 and hoping to get down to 110 as well.

July 19, 2012 at 10:45 am
(841) MarinaB says:

Vicki im so proud that you decided to try out pilates! They work wonders for your body!

So far i have not lost any weight since my first post, but i believe that has a bit to do with the fact that ive been craving sweets lately and I’m bloated as well (that time of the month…uggh!) but i am keeping up with the pilates and while this week i can’t see a difference, boy can i feel it! My tummy feels stronger and my posture is much better :)

I am using a mix of dvd’s that i just alternate between. im using mari winsors Lower Body pilates and flat ab pilates dvd’s, her pilates for pink (with the resistance band) video, her cardio pilates dvd, and the pilates with mari winsor dvd.

I hope i have some good news in terms of my weight loss next week! I am still eating better and sticking to my pilates!

good luck!! :)

December 3, 2012 at 8:12 am
(842) Eric says:

I bought the VHS tapes about 9 or 10 years ago. I was overweight and wanted to lose some so I started doing the workouts. After a week I felt so good I changed my diet and started doing weights, running and cycling. I started every workout with the Winsor Pilates for over a year and lost 50lbs. I have unfortunately gained all that weight back and then some. I dug the Pilates tapes out of a box in the basement a few weeks ago and started again. So far I have lost 5lbs and I feel great. I’m starting again but I will always start with the Winsor Pilates tapes because they make me feel energized…Yes I still own a VCR.

December 29, 2012 at 9:15 pm
(843) Kay says:

To anyone who’s made it this far down…. I have several of Mari Winsor’s 20 minute pilates workouts from the body accelerator, to the ab sculpting and the buns and thighs. I alternate between these and workout out 5 days a week.

I workout on and off. But when I need to get toned fast I go straight to Mari Winsor. Within a week I can see more muscle definition in my abs. It makes me feel great.

So YES! It DOES work!

January 6, 2013 at 5:50 pm
(844) Gen says:

I do Winsor Pilates and love them. Great for toning especially the butts and thighs video. Non-impact. I have a bad back and can do the butts and thighs.

February 17, 2013 at 1:01 pm
(845) Kate says:

Hello, Kate here! I was Post #”836.” I am in desperate need of my Winsor Pilates! I have neglected my own weight gain as I have been my husband’s caregiver during his 17 month battle with Stage IV cancer. I know I need to “put on my own oxygen mask first before I take care of my loved one,” but it can be difficult, to say the least! Please give me a pep talk, my Winsor Pilates friends! WP helped me lose weight and tone up 8 yrs ago, so I know it can work. Also, I turn 50 on March 1st! Any 50 yr. olds out there with any encouragement for me? Thank you!

February 27, 2013 at 12:21 am
(846) Connie says:

Hello kate
Postings from 2006 to 2013 and Windsor pilates is still going strong. Like yourself I too was successful in the past doing this series. I am in my mid 50s and know I must get back on track to staying healthy, strong and maintain energy so I can continue my job working with disabled teens. I was out this evening trying clothes on and come to the conclusion that I will not buy anything new until I lose at least 10 lbs.
We must tell ourselves “Yes….I am ready to once again be successful in loosing weight and inches and keeping it off. I am tired of imagining what it could be like, and how I would look. I want to ‘be there’…..’feel it’…..and ‘see it’. This is possible. We have done it before and will do it again. We know how much harder it becomes when we let it get out of control. We take back that control and now we are responsible for our own choices. Let us be proud of ourselves. Let others be proud of us. We owe it to ourselves. We deserve to be happy and feel great about ourselves. With this we will always pay forward our energy and happiness to others. One day at a time means being consistent day after day.With this comes a goal. a goal that we have reached.
I now choose to do pilates as increasing my exercise. I do this with joy and commitment. This will improve my over-all health and well being.
PS. I crave to reach my goal more than I crave that……Really? Ha Ha
It’s been fun chatting with you. The best to both of us.
Connie

June 1, 2013 at 3:31 pm
(847) heart diseases says:

When I originally commented I clicked the “Notify me when new comments are added” checkbox and
now each time a comment is added I get three emails with the same comment.
Is there any way you can remove people from that service?
Cheers!

July 20, 2013 at 8:20 am
(848) Cordell Smaller says:

One thing I’d prefer to touch upon is that weightloss routine fast can be achieved by the proper diet and exercise. A person’s size not simply affects appearance, but also the quality of life. Self-esteem, depression, health risks, and physical abilities are impacted in weight gain. It is possible to make everything right but still gain. If this happens, a medical problem may be the perpetrator. While excessive food rather than enough exercise are usually to blame, common health concerns and traditionally used prescriptions might greatly add to size. Many thanks for your post right here.

July 20, 2013 at 9:18 am
(849) Tianna Prusha says:

Thanks for the post. My partner and i have always observed that the majority of people are needing to lose weight simply because wish to look slim along with attractive. However, they do not usually realize that there are additional benefits to losing weight also. Doctors say that obese people are afflicted by a variety of conditions that can be instantly attributed to their own excess weight. The good thing is that people who are overweight in addition to suffering from several diseases can reduce the severity of their own illnesses by losing weight. It is possible to see a slow but marked improvement with health while even a small amount of fat reduction is attained.

August 15, 2013 at 3:18 pm
(850) Stephanie says:

I bought the windsor pilates maximum burn basics literally 8 years ago and it’s always my go to. I actually sweat from the 20 minute work out. It’s so simple but it makes sense… You’re constantly moving, keeping your heart rate up (burning fat) but you’re not killing yourself or your joints. Plus the movements are elongated and stretching so you’re getting a bit of that pilates effect. When I first used it years ago I lost weight and I gained about a half an inch on my frame… I can see it in my old pics. I was doing the 20 min workout and the mat work.
On a superficial note I have to say how annoying and distracting some of the people are in the video. Gosh!!!! That guy in the yellow! O_o WTF!?!? I want to reach through the tv and slap him !!! Those stupid dance moves he does … Geeze. He’s not even using the right technique for the workout because he’s too busy trying to be Rico Suave. Ugh… Gross.

August 16, 2013 at 1:36 pm
(851) Lady Dy says:

I am 51 years old and was in great shape just three years ago…then I moved in with my boyfriend and instead of him adopting my lifestyle I slowly started living his. I gained 75 pounds in 3 years. One day I got up and said enough is enough and that is the day I decided to do something for myself and get back into shape.
I have been doing “walk away the pounds” for the past 6 weeks and have lost 29 pounds…..I had bought the Windsor Pilates DVD years ago and used them ones or twice….but now after reading all these comments(and I mean I have read all of them) I am going to add the Pilates to my workout routine.
Thanks everyone this is exactly what I needed :)
I will keep updating as I go……..starting Monday Aug 19 2013

August 18, 2013 at 9:37 pm
(852) Magdalena says:

I have done MWP a few years ago, and went from 140 to 120 lbs (at 5’4″) in about 4 months. I was in the best shape of my life and loved my body (this is coming from someone who is never satisfied with her body). It’s been about 8 years since then, and one baby later (2 months ago) and would like to restart the exercises! I have basically all of her DVDs. I weigh 128 now (lost all of my baby weight in 2 months!! 35 lbs!) and would like to see 115-120 on the scale :) and of course lose my mommy tummy! Hopefully I’ll update with great results.

August 23, 2013 at 4:22 pm
(853) JanetO says:

Winsor Pilates is the best!! I used it for about three years 9 years ago and saw results extremely quick. I lost 68 pounds and totally transformed my body. My back aches went away totally and I felt wonderful!! Then I met a wonderful man and decided I would rather cuddle that 20 minutes in the morning rather than work out!! STUPID!!! Even though I have gained back most of the weight it is distributed differently!! I am starting my Winsor Pilates back up this weekend and am so excited. Hopefully my 12 year old daughter will do it with me.

November 11, 2013 at 9:17 pm
(854) Magdalena says:

I wrote comment #852 UPDATE:

Been doing Pilates beginner circle workout for 3 months now (2 months really strict schedule, 4x a week, and the last month slacking off 2/3x a week) and went from 128 lbs to 121 lbs! Haven’t seen this low of a number in years. I toned my whole body so nicely. My waist was 31.5 inches and now it’s 27 inches. I will try to be a bit more strict again and will update in a couple of months :)

December 30, 2013 at 9:17 pm
(855) Dee says:

Hi
I am in my mid 50s, 70 kilos, have had 2 children by Caesarian and have a tummy hang. Does Pilates get rid of the stomach wobble and hang?
Dee

January 6, 2014 at 9:20 pm
(856) Kate says:

Has anyone done Nordic Track as your cardio with Winsor Pilates?

January 27, 2014 at 11:21 pm
(857) Magdalena says:

Another update :) It’s been another 2.5 months since my last update. I haven’t been consistent, but been doing the same workout at least 1-2x a week. I have stepped up in the last 2 weeks to consistently working out 3x a week and am at 118 lbs. I lost 10 lbs since starting it in August, but honestly could have lost more if I was more strict! I was loosely following a schedule. I haven’t been doing any cardio since it’s cold out (frigid more like) and can’t wait to get back to my hourly (at least) walks and maybe add sprints once or twice a week. I’ve been eating pretty clean – sort of paleo style – but am not restricting since I am breastfeeding. I am going on vacation beginning of March so will try my best to get down to my goal weight of 113 :) oh and my waist is 26.5 inches on a good day ;)

February 2, 2014 at 1:30 am
(858) Ann says:

Magdalena or other who reads this comments and are using this program.

wich begginer circle workout are you talking about? 20 min workout and abs, butt etc?

I’ve been doing the 20 workout routine pretty much 4 times a week but I havent seen results yet. Im 5’4 132 lb I cant believe I went from 110 lbs to this point in almost 2 years but anyway I dont have kids but I was chubby as a kid and plus my really bad posture makes my stomic flabby I feel not sooo good with my weight but I dont feel like Im fat, it doesn matter my weight I always had this stomic i’ve been trying with abdominals and stuff like that but didnt have any results.

I do feel more flexible since winsor pilates routine wich is great, I feel a little very little more toned

please somebody share a routine wich worked thank u
sorry for my poor english.

March 10, 2014 at 2:44 pm
(859) Amy says:

I used it years ago and lost the discs. I need to find them because I have recently begun having bad neck pain, and I find these Pilates workouts help by properly stretching the neck, so I feel a ton better. They’re a great overall workout, and I do notice I have better muscle tone and posture when I do it fairly regularly. It’s fast-paced, unlike other Pilates videos, all your never bored. I do highly recommend it.

Leave a Comment

Line and paragraph breaks are automatic. Some HTML allowed: <a href="" title="">, <b>, <i>, <strike>

©2014 About.com. All rights reserved.

We comply with the HONcode standard
for trustworthy health
information: verify here.